Skip to main content

Full text of "Techqua Ikachi - Hopi Prophecies – Native American Wisdom for Modern Times"

See other formats

^cckqua 3kackl 

Messages from the Guardians of Land and Life / 

The Sacred Teachings of Native Cultures 
have been given to us on the condition 
. that they NEVER be sold. 

To do so would be like selling someone else's Mother. 

Feel free to copy and distribute this document 

to as many people as you wish. 

Please include this page. Thank You. 

Hopi and other Native and non-Native Prophecies 

Table of Contents 

Hopi statement at the United Nations in December 1992 2 

The Hopi Life Plan Petroglyph 5 

Messages from the UN Cry of the Earth Conference, November 22, 1 993 7 

Statement by Martin Gashweseoma, Hopi, given at the Cry of the Earth conference 11 

Statement by Manuel Hoyungowa, Hopi, at the Cry of the Earth conference 13 

Statement by William Commanda, Algonquin, at the UN Cry of the Earth Conference 16 

Statement by Leon Shenandoah, Iroquois Confederacy, at the UN, 1985 18 

The Hopi Story by Hopi Elder Dan Katchongva 1 9 

Excerpt from The Book of the Hopi. 28 

Excerpts from the Hopi Newsletter Techqua Ikachi 29 

Statement by the Keeper of the Hopi Fire Clan Tablets at Santa Fe in 1990 33 

Statement by Hopi Spiritual Leaders on August 7, 1994 38 

Recant Hopi History: Preface to Hopi Elder Dan Evehema's Message To Mankind 39 

Hopi Elder Dan Evehema's Message To Mankind 42 

Letter to President Nixon protesting the Strip-mining of Black Mesa 45 

Transcript of Hopi Elders on Art Bell Talk, June 16,1998 46 

Statement by Martin Gashweseoma in Maniwaki, Quebec November 29,1998 56 

The Essence of Hopi Prophecy 60 

Singing the Hopi Song of Purification 62 

Birth of the White Buffalo Calf 64 

The Story of the White Buffalo Calf Woman 6 7 

Jewish Prophecy: The birth of the Red Heifer 68 

Native Prophecies by Lee Brown, Cherokee 70 

Tuscarora Prophecy by Mad Bear 75 

The Seven Fires Prophecy of the Algonquin 77 

Prophecies of the Q'ero Incan Shamans 80 

Message of Our Lady of Fatima 82 

Mother Shipton's Prophecy 84 

The Visions of Dannion Brinkley 87 

Edgar Cayce 9 1 

Other Prophecies 1 1 3 

Traditional Dineh (Navajo) View of the "Hopi/Navajo Dispute" t_ ' 1 1 5 

Sources of Additional Information 1 1 9 

Revised June 1 , 1999 

Hopi statement at the United Nations in December 1992 

In December 1992, at ceremonies marking the beginning of the "Year of Indigenous Peoples", 
representatives from several First Nations spoke to the United Nations General Assembly. 
Thomas Banyacya and Caroline Tawangyouma represented the Hopi. (Much-loved Grandfather 
Banyacya passed to Spirit on February 6, 1999.) 

The program for the historic meeting at the UN was: 

Speakers: Sister Blaise Lupo, co-director, Clergy and Laity Concerned (CALC); Pir Vilayat Inayat 
Khan, Head of the Sufi Order of Islamic Tradition; Reverend Ambrose I. Lane, Minister and 
founder, Martin Luther King Jr. Community Church of the USA. 

Prayer: Wallace Black Elk, Lakota Nation 

Speakers: Native American Indigenous Medicine Council, Chief Leon Shenandoah, 
Haudenosaunee (Six Nations Iroquois Confederacy); Caroline Tawangyouma, Sovereign Hopi 
Independent Nation, Hotevilla Village; Thomas Banyacya, United Sovereign Hopi Independent 
Nation; Pandit Gopi Krishna, Yoga Adept. 

Closing comments: Javier Perez de Cuellar, Secretary G eneral of the UN, represented by Robert 
Muller, Assistant Secretary General of the UN. 

H ere is the text of the historic statement given by G randfather Banyacya: 


Thomas Banyacya, Kykotsmovi, Arizona 

The presentation by Mr. Thomas Banyacya, the final 
speaker, was preceded by three shouts by Oren Lyons, 
Faithkeeper of the Six Nations, and first speaker of the 
day. The shouts were a spiritual announcement to the 
Great Spirit of the people assembled and the intention to 
give a message of spiritual importance. Thomas then 
sprinkled corn meal next to the podium of the General 
Assembly and made a brief remark in Hopi that 
translates as follows: 

Hopi Spiritual leaders had an ancient prophecy that 
some day world leaders would gather in a Great House of 
Mica with rules and regulations to solve the world 
problems without war. I am amazed to see the prophecy 
has come true and you are here today! But only a handful 
of United Nations Delegates are present to hear the 
Motee Smom (Hopi for First People) from around the 
world who spoke here today. 

My name is Banyacya of the Wolf, Fox and Coyote Clan 
and I am a member of the Hopi sovereign nation. Hopi in 
our language means a peaceful, kind, gentle, truthful 
people. The Traditional Hopi follows the spiritual path 
that was given to us by Massau'u the Great Spirit. We 

made a sacred covenant to follow his life plan at all 
times, which includes the responsibility of taking care of 
this land and life for his divine purpose. We have never 
made treaties with any foreign nation, including the 
United States, but for many centuries we have honored 
this sacred agreement. Our goals are not to gain political 
control, monetary wealth nor military power, but rather 
to pray and to promote the welfare of all living beings 
and to preserve the world in a natural way. We still have 
our ancient sacred stone tablets and spiritual religious 
societies which are the foundations of the Hopi way of 
life. Our history says our white brother should have 
retained those same sacred objects and spiritual 

In 1948, all Traditional Hopi spiritual leaders met and 
spoke of things I felt strongly were of great importance to 
all people. They selected four interpreters to carry their 
message of which I am the only one still living today. At 
the time, I was given a sacred prayer feather by the 
spiritual leaders. I made a commitment to carry the Hopi 
message of peace and deliver warnings frbm prophecies 
known since the time the previous world was destroyed by 
flood and our ancestors came to this land. 

My mission was to open the doors of this Great House of 
Mica to native peoples. The Elders said to knock four 
times and this commitment was fulfilled when I 
delivered a letter and the sacred prayer feather I had 

been given to John Washburn in the Secretary General's 
office in October, 1991. I am bringing part of the Hopi 
message to you here today. We have only ten minutes to 
speak and time is late so I am making my statement short. 

At the meeting in 1948, Hopi leaders 80, 90 and even 100 
years old explained that the Creator made the first 
world in perfect balance where humans spoke one 
language, but humans turned away from moral and 
spiritual principles. They misused their spiritual powers 
for selfish purposes. They did not follow nature's rules. 
Eventually the world was destroyed by sinking of land 
and separation of land by what you would call major 
earthquakes. Many died and only a small handful 

Then this handful of peaceful people came into the second 
world. They repeated their mistakes and the world was 
destroyed by freezing which you call the great Ice Age. 

The few survivors entered the third world. That world 
lasted a long time and as in previous worlds, the people 
spoke one language. The people invented many machines 
and conveniences of high technology, some of which have 
not yet been seen in this age. They even had spiritual 
powers that they used for good. They gradually turned 
away from natural laws and pursued only material things 
and finally only gambled while they ridiculed spiritual 
principles. No one stopped them from this course and the 
world was destroyed by the great flood that many nations 
still recall in their ancient history or in their religions. 

The Elders said again only a small groups escaped and 
came to this fourth world where we now live. Our world 
is in terrible shape again even though the Great Spirit 
gave us different languages and sent us to four comers of 
the world and told us to take care of the Earth and all 
that is in it. 

For many years there has been great fear and danger of 
World War Three. The Hopi believe the Persian Gulf 
War was the beginning of World War Three but it was 
stopped and the worst weapons of destruction were not 
used. This is now a time to weigh the choices for our 
future. We do have a choice. If you, the nations of this 
Earth, create another great war, the Hopi believe we 
humans will bum ourselves to death with ashes. That's 
why the spiritual Elders stress strongly that the United 
Nations fully open the door for native spiritual leaders 
as soon as possible. 

Nature itself does not'speak with a voice that we can 
easily understand. Neither can the animals and birds we 
are threatening with extinction talk to us. Who in this 
world can speak for nature and the spiritual energy that 
creates and flows through all life? In every continent are 
human beings who are like you but who have not 
separated themselves from the land and from nature. It is 
through their voice that Nature can speak to us. You 
have heard those voices and many messages from the four 
comers of the world today. I have studied comparative 
religion and I think in your own nations and cultures you 
have knowledge of the consequences of living out of 
balance with nature and spirit. The native peoples of the 
world have seen and spoken to you about the destruction 
of their lives and homelands, the ruination of nature and 
the desecration of their sacred sites. It is time the United 
Nations used its rules to investigate these occurrences and 
stop them now. 

The Four Corners area of the Hopi is bordered by four 
sacred mountains. The spiritual center within is a sacred 
site our prophecies say will have special purpose in the 
future for mankind to survive and now should be left in its 
natural state. All nations must protect this spiritual 

This Hopi ceremonial rattle represents Mother Earth. 
The line running around it is a time line and indicates 
that we are in the final days of the prophecy. What 
have you, as individuals, as nations and as the world 
body been doing to take care of this Earth? In the Earth 
today, humans poison their own food, water and air with 
pollution. Many of us, including children, are left to 
starve. Many wars are still being fought Greed and 
concern for material things is a common disease. In this 
western hemisphere, our homeland, many original native 
people are landless, homeless, starving and have no 
medical help. 

The Hopi knew humans would develop many powerful 
technologies that would be abused. In this century, we 
have seen the First World War and the Second World 
War in which the predicted gourd of ashes, which you 
call the atomic bomb, fell from the sky with great 
destruction. Many thousands of people were destroyed in 
Hiroshima and Nagasaki. 

The Hopi and all original native people hold the land in 
balance by prayer, fasting and performing ceremonies. Our 
spiritual Elders still hold the land in the Western 
Hemisphere in balance for all living beings, including 
humans. No one should be relocated from their sacred 
homelands in this Western Hemisphere or anywhere in 
the world. Acts of forced relocation, such as Public Law 
93-531 in the United States, must be repealed.' 

The United Nations stands on our native homeland. The 
United Nations talks about human rights, equality and 
justice and yet the native people have never had a real 
opportunity to speak to this assembly since its 
establishment until today. It should be the mission of 
your nations and this assembly to use your power and rules 
to examine and work to cure the damage people have done 
to this Earth and to each other. Hopi Elders know that 

1 See references to this law in the articles beginning on pages 33, 
39and 115. 

was your mission and they wait to see whether you will 
act on it now. 

done and stop these nations from moving in this self- 
destructive direction. 

Nature, the First People and the spirit of our ancestors 
are giving you loud warnings. Today, December 10,1992, 
you see increasing floods, more damaging hurricanes, hail 
storms, climate changes and earthquakes as our 
prophecies said would come. Even animals and birds are 
warning us with strange change in their behavior such as 
the beaching of whales. Why do animals act like they 
know about the earth's problems and most humans act 
like they know nothing? If we humans do not wake up to 
the warnings, the great purification will come to destroy 
this world just as the previous worlds were destroyed. 

(Thomas and Oren Lyons held up a picture of a large rock 
drawing in Hopiland - see page 5.) 

This rock drawing shows part of the Hopi prophecy. 
There are two paths. The first with technology but 
separate from natural and spiritual law leads to these 
jagged lines representing chaos. The lower path is one 
that remains in harmony with natural law. Here we see a 
line that represents a choice like a bridge joining the 
paths, If we return to spiritual harmony and live from our 
hearts, we can experience a paradise in this world. If we 
continue only on this upper path, we will come to 

Its up to all of us, as children of Mother Earth, to clean up 
this mess before ifs too late. 

The Elders request that during this International Year for 
the Worlds Indigenous Peoples, the United Nations keep 
that door open for spiritual leaders from the four corners 
of the world to come to speak to you for more than a few 
minutes as soon as possible. The Elders also request that 
eight investigative teams visit the native areas of the 
world to observe and tell the truth about what is being 

If any of you leaders want to learn more about the 
spiritual vision and power of the Elders, I invite you to 
come out to Hopiland and sit down with our real spiritual 
leaders in their sacred Kivas where they will reveal the 
ancient secrets of survival and balance. 

I hope that all members of this assembly that know the 
spiritual way will not just talk about it, but in order to 
have real peace and harmony, will follow what it says 
across the United Nations wall: "They will beat their 
swords into plowshares and study war no more." Lets, 
together, do that now! 


The night before the presentations of the native people 
from around the world to the General Assembly, there was 

a total eclipse of the moon over New York City and the sky 
was clear. The evening after the presentation by Mr. 
Banyacya and the other native spokespersons, heavy rain 
and strong wind began. The weathermen had been calling 
for a snowstorm but what came the following day were the 
worst floods in New York's memory. Major highways were 
washed away by the sea and the United Nations itself 
experienced flooding of its tower subfloors, forcing a 
shutdown of its heating and air conditioning and ail 
personnel were dismissed at three o'clock. 

in the ground floor meeting room, whereon December 11, 

native peoples were meeting representatives of various UN 
agencies, Thomas Banyacya spontaneously called on ail 
the participants, including UN officials, to form a great circle. 
Ail the Elders were in the center and Thomas called in 
some non-native people as well. Each silently said a prayer. 
The forming of the circle of unity of aft people from the four 
comers of the Earth was more than just a symbolic act. One 
participant said she had never felt herself to be in such a 
safe place. Later, several people present noted that no 
further storm damage occurred in Manhattan and #at the 
storm itself abated that afternoon. 

The Hopi Life Plan Petroglyph 

On a hill above the Hopi village of Oraibi stands "Prophecy Rock": a sandstone boulder with a 
large flat face on the east side. Inscribed on the boulder is the "Hopi Life Plan Petroglyph" to which 
G randfather Banyacya referred in his speech to the UN General Assembly in December 1992. (See 
page 2.) Below is a drawing of the petroglyph which is based on first person observations of the 
petroglyph itself and a detailed review with a traditional Hopi friend from the village of Hotevilla. 
Many of the published versions I have seen do not closely match the actual petroglyph. Similar 
petroglyphs can be found throughout the Southwest; there is an interesting version in Indian 
Petroglyph National Monument near Albuquerque, for example. See if you can find it among the 
estimated 25,000 images there (!) 

Following the image is an excerpt from M editations With the Hopi by Robert Boissiere 

(01986, Bear & Co.) It contains some interesting observations which obviously were informed by 
Hopi Sources. One discrepancy with the interpretation I received is noted with a footnote. (The 
graphic in Meditations does not match the Life Plan Petroglyph. A later book by Boissiere, Th e 
Return ofPahanu, 81990 does have a reasonably accurate depiction of Prophecy Rock.) 

From Meditations With the Hopi by Robert Boissiere: 

Long before Pahana, the white man, ever set foot in the 
Americas; long before the hegemony of the red race had 
been challenged by light-skinned people, as the 
prophecies told us it would - a spot in the immensity of 
the desert; a center of Spiritual power, was Hopi. The 
land of the peaceful ones. The continent was different 
then: much space, few to occupy it 

But the energy coming from Hopi is in realms where 
communications are not of this world; in dimensions set by 
Taiowa and expressed by Massoua. Hopi was the thread, 
the bridge, the place of peace and balance. 

If perhaps there is a name, a word, that can show the 
world what Hopi peace is • it is balance. The world must 
grow, expand, but it must do it in balance. Otherwise, 
nature, the great regulator, will take over, as it is now, 
with floods, eruptions, famine, earthquakes. This is 
nature at war, nature that will convince humankind of 
the need for balance, to set in motion positive energies to 
reestablish a world in balance. 

In the beginning, we are told, Taiowa, the Creator, gave 
us his life plan, as it is written on the Rock of Oraibi 
which we call the prophecy. 

If we hold fast to the sacred way as he devised it for us, 
what we have gained, we will never lose. But still, we 
have to choose between the two ways. This is the balance 
of Taiowa's way. For he will always meet us halfway. 
That is why on the sacred petroglyph he is portrayed 
holding in his hand the thread of the sacred way. In the 
other hand is the bow, for the Bow Clan is the one which 
led us out of the Underworld at the beginning of the Hopi 
Way. That is what the arrow shot from the bow means on 
the rock.2 The diagram shows two lines: the lower line is 
the path of the Great Spirit, for in its last end, a man is 
bending on the cane the old ones use, pointing to the corn 
which is the sacred food that nourished us from the start. 
The old one shows he was the first and he will be the 
last. And so will we if we hold fast to his pathway. 

But next to him, beware of the other way, the way of life 
of those who do not pray. It is easy enough to see that 
their heads are not fastened on their body, as it happens 
with people who use their mind, instead of their faith in 
the spirit way. As Taiowa's life plan shows, their line 
ends in a zigzag way, in the void of the mind of the 
faithless life and the fruitless. 

that seems to many a much easier one. Finally seeing 
that the Hopi Way of balance is the only chance, many 
will choose to climb down the ladder, to go through the 
Great Spirit gateway. 

This time of confusion, in which many will choose either 
path, is called a time of purification. The prophecy says 
the earth will shake three times: first the Great War, 
then the Second One, when the Swastika rose above the 
battlefield of Europe, to end in the Rising Sun sinking in a 
sea of blood, The end of an Empire .... or perhaps the 
beginning of another? Now what would the third one be? 
This, the Prophecy does not say. For it depends on which 
path humankind will walk: the greed, the comfort; and 
the profit, or the path of love, strength, and balance.3 

When strong-hearted people keep on singing the Song of 
Creation, they will find the true path, forgotten by many, 
so Grandpa David says. 4 When prayer and meditation 
are used rather than relying on new inventions to create 
more imbalance, they will also find the true path. 
Mother Nature tells us which is the right way. When 
earthquakes, floods, hailstorms, drought; and famine 
will be the life of every day, the time will have then 
come for the return to the true path, or going the zigzag 

Long ago, Massoua told us, "Remember the Pahana, the 
white brother. He has the other stone tablet; but he has 
not returned it, yet. He will be sent so the people who 
held fast to the Hopi Way can be spared from destruction. 
He is the purifier, for people to go on with the Great 
Spirit life plan. It will then open our hearts and minds 
when a new age is about to be, with people renewed and 
purified through fire. 

It will be like the pure gold of a new day. But fire is red, 
and when it takes command, it will set the forces of 
nature in motion. 

We will know when purification day has come. We all 
are the caretakers of life. The balance of nature depends 
on us. The world will be what we want it to be. 

But there is another line on the sacred map drawn on the 
rock - a vertical line that connects the two ways. It is like 
a ladder that some might use to change ways, to go from 
the way of peace and balance • Taiowa's Way - to a path 

2 What appears to be an arrow between the upper and lower paths 
is instead a birdfoot: a symbol of initiation. 

3 The three shakings of the world are indicated by the three 
circles on the lower path. 

4 Late Hopi elder David Monongye, last traditional Kikmongwi of 
Hotevilla and editor of the traditional newsletter Techqua Ikachi" 

Messages from the UN Cry of the Earth Conference, November 22, 1993 

On November 22, 1993, toward the end of the UN's "Year of Indigenous Peoples", a conference 
was held called the "CRY OF THE EARTH". This historic meeting included delegations from 
seven First Nations: Algonquin, Hopi, Huichol, Iroquois, Lakota, Maya and Mic Mac. The event 
was considered extremely significant by the delegates of the First Nations. According to 
Grandfather William Commanda, Algonquin, he and elders from several other nations including 
Hopi had discovered that each had centuries- or millennia-old prophecies relating to a time when 
the very health of the Earth Mother and continuation of human life were at stake. These 
prophecies, which relate to something called "Purification", matched one another in remarkable 
ways. The elders say that in the time of the fulfillment of the prophecies, Native peoples are to tell 
all the nations of the world so that people may change before it is too late. 

However the conference, held in the Economic and Social Council Chambers of the UN, was 
sparsely attended. It is said the representatives of the nations of the world listened politely, and 
did nothing. 

The following messages were printed on a brochure entitled "Messages" which was distributed 
at the conference: 

Sponsored by: Mission of Mexico, Mission of the United 
States, United Nations Centre for Human Rights 

Endorsed by: American Indian Institute, American Indian 
Ritual Object Repatriation Foundation, Anglican Liaison 
to the United Nations, Cathedral of St. John the Divine, 
Earth Circle Foundation, Fund of the Four Directions, 
Giving of Thanks to the First People, Institute National 
Indigenista, International Labor Organisation, Mexican 
Cultural Institute, M.O.A. Foundation National Museum 
of the American Indian, Natural Resources Defense 
Council, Temple of Understanding, Tree of Peace Society, 
UNICEF, United Nations Development Programme, 
United Nations Environment Programme, World Uranium 

With Special Recognition To: The Wittenberg Center for 
Alternative Resources 

I am pleased to welcome to the United Nationsthose 
attending this conference on the theme: Cry of the Earth, 
the Legacy of the first Nations. The Spiritual Elders of 
the Four Directions have come to New York with a 
message. It is a message of warning which all of us, 
regardless of our particular faith, must share. In 1992, at 
Rio de Janiero, the world community raised a cry of 
distress. The cry of distress, of pain at the state of the 
planet has been heeded. No longer can we take the 
resources of nature as ours to master. No longer can we 
behave as the conquerors of nature. The path to 
sustainable development is to respond to the legitimate 
aspiration of peoples for better living standards while 
ensuring that future generations retain the qualities of 
life in harmony with our habitat. The responsibility of 
this generation is tremendous. It is in our power to choke 
the living organism of nature, but it is also in our power to 

preserve it, to nurture it, to replace plunder with harmony 
and waste with conservation. The concerns of sustainable 
development come late, but not too late. We have known 
all along, with the poet William Blake: "For everything 
that lives is holy, life delights in life." Today, the 
Spiritual Elders come to remind us of this truth. It is my 
sincere hope that we come to share their concerns and 
their delight in life. Welcome then to the United 
Nations; to your United Nations. 

-Boutros Boutros-Ghali, Secretary General of the United 

Prophecy is that form of vision that informs and propels 
the truest moral and spiritual leadership... Every true 
leader must possess such vision, as well as the courage to 
follow it despite whatever hardships might be thrown in 
the way. Today we meet as leaders who aspire to such 
vision. In this United Nations Year of the World's 
Indigenous People we come together in council with a 
clear goal in mind and heart: as representatives of many 
nations together, we wish to and must help to shape a 
universal pact between humanity and the planet. 

-S.R. I nsanally, President of the 48th Session of the 
United Nations General Assembly 

For all Anishnabe people, the Wampum Belts are the 
keys of Traditional Reality. 

They are the patterns of life - the doorway uniting 
Physical and Spiritual dimensions, it is significant that 
these belts - having never been held by outside forces - 
are Spiritually alive. They embody the activating power 

of the Spiritual World. The Seven Fires Belt talks of 
seven doorways, dimensions, traditional nations, spaces 
in time. Its message is woven throughout Turtle Island, 
and applies to all four races of Earth. It describes very 
grave destruction that has currently affected the balance 
of all life - environmental and spiritual genocide 
resulting from these doorways being blocked, 

It is essential for the Anishnabe - all human beings - 
to rekindle these fires and reopen these doorways. J oining 
these Seven Doors, we may light the Eighth Fire - the 
Double Diamond reunifying human life with the 
Spiritual dimensions. Forgiveness and sacrifice are the 
keys. The Belts warn of the very near time when Earth 
will shift Her balance in the Universe, with or without 
her children. This re-balancing of Life is certain to occur, 
reordering both physical and spiritual reality. It is our 
urgent responsibility to transform humanity and 
harmonize with these changes. 

Healing must be our imperative concern. 

-Algonquin Nation Seven Fires Prophecy ~ Presented by 
Traditional Chief William Commanda, Carrier of the 
Wampum Belts 

From the Eastern Door: We ape in the final stages of the 
shaking of the earth, when the Great Spirit takes the 
earth in both hands and shakes it violently. 

J ust this year, the opening of the Eastern Door took place 
in Cape Spear, Newfoundland, Canada, the furthest 
eastern point in North America. The circle of the 
medicine wheel is now complete. The Wabanaki People 
(People of the Light) have joined the circle. We have 
joined the circle with the following philosophy: 

"Heal you, the self, you help heal the family, 
The family helps to heal the community, 
The community helps to heal the nation, 
The nations help to heal the world." 

All the prophecies from other nations now coincide and 
complement each other. It is time for us all to stop 
blaming one another, heal from our wounds and move 
forward; for the survival of the world, as we know it, lies 
in our hands. We must seek out and absorb the wisdom of 
our elders and use it for the betterment of others. The 
Great Spirit left a clear and legible path in eastern 
North America with petroglyphs and natural monuments. 
This knowledge is kept under guard by our elders and only 
entrusted to those native people who abide by the natural 
laws of the Great Spirit; respect, honesty, sharing and 
caring. Without each one of these, the others do not exist. 

It is now time for Moms, Dads, Grandmothers, 
Grandfathers and children to get involved in the healing 
of our world. Make it your business too. 

-David Gehue, Spiritual Counselor, Mi-kmac Nation 

When the world ends, it will be like when the names of 
things are changed during the peyote hunt. All will be 
different, the opposite of what it is now. Now there are 
two eyes in the heavens, Dios Sol-and Dios Fuego. Then, 
the moon will open his eye and become brighter. The sun 
will become dimmer. There will be no more differences. 
No more men and women. No child and no adult. All will 
change places. Even the mara'akame will no longer be 
separate. That is why there is always a nunuisi 
(Huichol-little baby) when we go to Wirikuta. Because 
the old man, the tiny baby, they are the same. 

-Huichol Proverb 

When the original thirteen baktuns were created, a war 
was waged which caused the country to cease to exist. 
Little by little, however, our enemies came to hear the 
prophecies of Ahau; but finally even the hope of hearing 
Ahau is brought to an end, because of the words of 
opposition. When the need arises for the high authority 
at the head of the mat to safeguard our children, then we 
will feel deeply the tragedy of being captives in war; 
also when we are ordered to obey.. .And when over the 
dark sea I shall be lifted by a chalice of fire, to that 
generation there will come the day of withered 
fruit. The face of the sun will be extinguished because of 
the great tempest. Then finally ornaments shall descend 
in heaps. There will be good gifts for one and all, as well 
as land, from the Great Spirit wherever shall come 
sailing, figuratively speaking, bringing the ornaments of 
which I have spoken, from your ancestors. Then the god 
will come to visit his little ones. Perhaps "After Death" 
will be the subject of his discourse. 

-Mayan, Prophecy of the End of the Great Cycle, from 
The Book of Chi I am Balam of Tizimin 

Sacred ground is ground that is invested with belief. 
Belief, at its root, exists independent of meaning. That is, 
expression and object may escape what we can perceive as 
definable meaning. The intrinsic power of sacred ground is 
often ineffable and abstract. I behold a particular sacred 
space, and I understand-that it isin some way earned. It is 
consecrated, made holy with offerings - song and 
ceremony, joy and sorrow, the dedication of the mind and 
heart, offerings of life and death. The words "sacred" and 
"sacrifice" are related. And acts of sacrifice make sacred 
the earth. The indigenous people of the world know this 
as they know the sunrise and sunset. 

-W. Scott Momaday, Kiowa, Pulitzer Prize Winning 
A uthor 

We must all work together to protect our natural 
heritage, our flora and fauna, and the overall health of 
our global environment. These goals have always been an 
integral part of the spiritual traditions of those native to 
the soil of the Americas. Please keep me apprised of the 
accomplishments of this meeting as well as any future 
events inspired by your conference. 

-A I Gore, Vice President of the United States 

I was born on the Menominee Indian Reservation in 
Wisconsin, a land of dense forests, a winding river, and 
streams and lakes that nourish the land, animals, and 
the people. I am an extension of this environment that 
has fostered my growth and enriched my vision and 
spirit. An appreciation and reverence for the land is 
fundamental to being Indian. I am proud to declare that 
the Menominee tribal forest is one of the few forests in 
this hemisphere that is better today than it was one 
hundred years ago. My vision for Indians in the United 
States and this hemisphere is enriched by this legacy. 
We must embrace the challenges of the future fortified by 
the knowledge of our past. 

-Ada Deer, Menominee, Assistant Secretary -Indian 
Affairs, U.S. Department of the Interior 

We are now living in the fourth and final world of the 
Hopi. We are at a most critical time in human history. It 
is a crossroads at which the outcome of our actions will 
decide the fate of life on earth. 

At the beginning of this fourth world the Hopi were told 
to watch for specific signs which would mark this crucial 
period and given instructions for actions to avoid the 
annihilation of this world and for life to continue. 

Instructions included a directive to travel to a great house 
of mica (glass) which would be built on the distant 
eastern shore of this continent where leaders of this 
earths nations would gather. The Hopi were instructed to 
knock on the door of this house in order to deliver their 
message to those gathered there. If refused, they were to 
knock again, until they had done so four times. 

Since 1949, the Hopi have knocked at the door of the 
United Nations. Last December was the fourth and final 
time they would do so. Having received an invitation 
from the United Nations, this historic gathering which 
Hopi spiritual leaders have requested is the final 
fulfillment of these instructions. 

-On behalf of the Spiritual Elders, Hotevilla, Hopi 

It is prophesied in our Instructions that the end of the 
world will be near when the trees start dying from the 
tops down. That's what the maples are doing today. Our 
Instructions say the time will come when there will be no 
corn, when nothing will grow in the garden, when the 
water will be unfit to drink... We were instructed to carry 
a love for one another and to show great respect for all 
beings of the earth.. .In our ways, spiritual consciousness is 
the highest form of politics. ..We must live in harmony 
with the Natural World and recognize that excessive 
exploitation can only lead to our own destruction. We 
cannot trade the welfare of our future generations for 
profit now. ..We must stand together, the four sacred 
colors of man, as the one family that we are, in the 
interest of peace. We must abolish nuclear and 
conventional weapons of war.. .We must raise leaders of 
peace. We must unite the religions of the world as the 
spiritual force strong enough to prevail in peace. We are 
the spiritual energy that is a thousand times stronger 
than nuclear energy. Our energy is the combined will of 
all people with the spirit of the Natural World, to be of 
one body, one heart, and one mind for peace. 

-Leon Shenandoah, Tadodaho, Six Nations Iroquois 

The prophecies of the Ancestors of the Lakota Nations 
have important meaning for the future of Mother Earth. 
Through the generations, these prophecies have been 
maintained courageously, methodically and accurately. 
Now, we are in a critical stage of our spiritual and moral 
and technological development as nations. All life is 
precariously balanced. We must remember that all things 
on Mother Earth have spirit and are intricately related. 
The Lakota prophecy of Mending the Sacred Hoop of all 
nations has begun. May we find, in the ancient wisdom of 
the Indigenous Nations, the spirit and courage to mend 
and heal. 

-Arvol L ookinghorse, 19th G eneration Keeper of the 
Sacred Pipe, Lakota Nation 

Many years of United Nations action for the Human 
Rights of Indigenous Peoples have culminated in 
impressive successes in the last few years. The 
International Year of the World's Indigenous People set 
two basic aims as the framework for international action; 
to create awareness about the situation and the 
aspirations of indigenous peoples, and to integrate 
indigenous concerns in the operations of tjhe United 
Nations system with the full participation of indigenous 
communities in projects which concern them. Through the 
historic processes of drafting the United Nations 
declaration on the rights of indigenous peoples, the Rio 
Conference on Environment and Development, and the 
Vienna Conference on Human Rights, the world has 
learned to respect and listen to the wisdom of indigenous 

peoples and to recognize their unique contribution to 
civilization. The door of the United Nations is and will 
remain open for indigenous peoples. 

-Ibrahima Fall, Assistant Secretary General for Human 
Righ ts (UN) 

The Wittenberg Center For Alternative Resources 
188 Wittenberg Road, Bearsville, NY 12409 
PH: 914-679-9764 FAX: 914595-7813 

Much time and energy has been dedicated to the 
realization of the dream of having the prophecies of 

Turtle Island (North America) be told at the United 
Nations during 1993 • The Year of the Indigenous Peoples. 

What you've just read is a small portion ofthe many 
important statements and discussions from fltis historic 
meeting. The Spiritual Elders from the Four Directions of 
Turtle Island brought a much needed voice to the United 
Nations for the first time. 

"When we walk upon Mother Earth, we always plant our 
feet carefully because we know the faces of our future 
generations are looking up at us from beneath the ground. 
We never forget them." 

-Or en Lyons, Faithkeeper, Onondaga Nation 


Statement by Martin Gashweseoma, Hopi, given at the Cry of the Earth conference 

Grandfather Martin Gashweseoma, Fire Clan, is the only remaining Traditional Hopi Elder of 
whom I am aware. G randfather Dan Evehema passed to Spirit in January, 1999, and G randfather 
Thomas Banyacya followed him on February 6th. Here is the statement G randfather 
G ashweseoma gave at the C ry of the Earth conference: 


General Assembly, United Nations 

November 22,1993 

by Martin Gashweseoma 
Hopi Caretaker of the Sovereign Hopi 
Box 753 
Hotevilla, AZ 86030 


We come here from the Sovereign Hopi Nation to attend 
the "CRY OF THE EARTH" conference at the United 
Nations. We are proud that you have opened the door for 
us. My name is Martin Gashweseoma. As Hopi, we have 
come here to present our message which is about how we 
first came here from the previous world. 

The Hopi way is to lead a good life and through our 
ceremonials and mediations, we take care of this land and 
life. We still have the sacred stone tablets given to us by 
the Spider Woman. This is our title and deed to this 
world, and it was given to us with the life plan to follow, 
and with strong instructions and serious warnings. 

It was a good life. When the rains came and brought a lot 
of moisture, then our crops would yield enough for all 
living beings, including the ants, animals, birds, plants 
and human kind. 

Before leaving the previous world, we came up here to 
ask permission from the Great Spirit, Massau'u, if we 
could live here with him because the world down below 
had become corrupted. He told the people "It is up to you 
if you are willing to live with full respect for my way of 
life." They said, "Yes we are willing to live your way." 
So with his consent we came here, into this new world. 
This world is where the Great Spirit, Massau'u, first 
appeared to all first peoples, and gave them their 
instructions and rules to follow. Then the Spider Woman 
laid before them ears of corn of different colors, from 
which to take their sustenance and livelihood. The 
greediest people hurried to pick out the longest ears. But 
the Hopi, being the most humble waited until last and 
chose the shortest ears of corn. Spider Woman then gave 
all the peoples their instructions. She also gave each 
group of people their own language and name and told 
them to migrate to every corner of this continent leaving 
their footprints, clan markings, and ruins to claim this 
land. Those who found the Great Spirit, Massau'u, first 
would become the leaders of those who would come later. 
So they migrated all over this land. 

Before the migrating peoples arrived at the place where 
the Great Spirit, Massau'u, lives, he used to take walks 
nearby his home. Coming back home, bringing back violet 
flowers, he dropped them along the way. After 
discovering he had dropped the violet flowers, he went 
back to look for them, but the flowers had already been 
found by the Horny Toad Woman. The Great Spirit, 
Massau'u, asked if she would give it back but the Horny 
Toad Woman refused. Instead, she told him that in time 
there would be a crisis in this world, with which he 
would need help. At that time she would be there with 
her steel helmet to help. Meaning that someday if the 
Hopi got into trouble, a group of people with the steel 
helmet would help them. 

It was the Hopi who found the Great Spirit; Massau'u, 
first. On meeting him they asked him where he lived. He 
told them that he lived at Oraibi. He did not give its full 
name which is Sip Oraibi, which means the place where 
the earth was made solid. They asked the Great Spirit, 
Massau'u, if he could be their great leader. But the Great 
Spirit, Massau'u, saw in them that they still had selfish 
desires and many evil intentions. He did not want to be 
their great leader until they fulfilled all their desires. 
He would then be their first leader and the last. 

The Great Spirit; Massau'u, let the first group or clan who 
had found him live there with him and settle down. 
After that, each subsequent group of people who came to 
settle in Oraibi after their migrations were allowed to 
stay based on judgment of their character and how they 
had traveled when they were searching for the Great 
Spirit, Massau'u. Those who were boastful and arrogant 
were sent away to the east. Those of humble and sincere 
hearts were allowed to stay and keep the ceremonials in 
the proper manner to ensure rain for the crops and all 
living things. 

After this was settled, all the things that were to come 
were told to the first people in Oraibi by the first people 
that came from the underworld. And these understandings 
or prophecies as they are also called were continued, 
passed on from generation to generation from that day to 
this. The people were told of another race of people who 
would come to this land and claim it as their own land. 
We were told not to accept anything these people would 
offer to us, but it will tempt us and be hard to resist. They 
would be intelligent and the inventors of many things. 
Now we realize that these people. are the light-skinned 

people, the Bahanas. We were told of something that 
would come that would be pulled by animals, meaning 
wagons or carts. And ones that would run very fast, 
meaning automobiles and other motorized vehicles. 

We were told of the land being cut up by long roads and 
fences, and of highways that would be built in the sky. 
And that women would adopt male clothing. And that 
the secret of women, with clothing, covered, would no 
longer be secret, but be revealed and exposed.... 

When this happens, all the world leaders and all the 
people will be corrupted and will not know whom to look 
for direction to correct this corruption. When all this 
happens, it will mean that we are all nearing the end. 
Then the wars will come about like powerful winds, and 
will spread from country to country and bring Purification 
or Destruction to this world. 

The more we turn away from the instructions of the Great 
Spirit, Massau'u, the more signs we see in the form of 
earthquakes, floods, drought, fires, tornadoes, as Nature 
makes ready her revenge. All of this will happen at one 
time along with the wars and corruption. We see this now 
as young children become angry, killing each other and 
their parents. They show no respect. We are all corrupt. 

If this Purification does not materialize then the world 
will turn over 4 times and will leave only ants here to 
start a new life. Before people came to this world they 
were sick, just as today, we are sick from all this 
corruption. Now we are seeking a way to solve our present 
situation. This is the last world, we are not going 
anywhere from here. If we destroy this, the highest 
world, which is like heaven, we will be given no other 
chances. Let us consider this matter seriously so that this 
world is not destroyed, so that we can continue to live and 
save this land and life for the generations to come. 


Statement by Manuel Hoyungowa, Hopi, at the Cry of the Earth conference 

In addition to G randfather G ashweseoma's statement, a statement by Manuel Hoyungowa - 
grandson of the late traditional elder David Monongye -also was made at the Cry of the Earth 
conference. The following transcript was posted in 1993 by The Wittenberg Center For 
Alternative Resources: 

Submitted by Manuel Hoyungowa, Messenger from 
Sovereign Hopi Nation and Prophecy Message of 
Monongye, Religious Leader, Sovereign Hopi Nation to 
the United Nations 

September l%2 

Re-submitted 11 / 23/ 93 by the grandson of Monongye, 
Manuel Hoyungowa, "CRY OF THE EARTH", General 
Assembly, United Nations, New York 

For further information please contact" 

Manuel Hoyungowa, 

Box 268, Kykotsmovi, AZ 86039 

My name is Manuel Hoyungowa, of the Sovereign Hopi 
Nation. It is a great honor to be able to be here today to 
present a few of the Hopi prophecies and some of the 
problems that we are facing with the Bureau of Indian 
Affairs (BIA), which was created by the U.S. government 
and the Hopi Tribal Council. 

I would like to begin with some messages given to us by our 
elders. How it used to be a good life, now our lives have 
changed. Because of this new education, new culture. From 
the beginning it was forced upon our forefathers to go to 
school and learn new ways. As years went by, education 
became something that we accepted and it became normal 
to go to school so that we could further ourselves. As I was 
growing up I remember that our elders traveled with 
donkeys, then with wagons, then the first automobile 
came. All these came about, the things that our elders 
and high leaders, discussed in meetings at my 
grandfather's house. Now I know why they discussed 
these things with great concern, as I came to realize that 
this is true. I too am concerned now. I am not a high 
leader. I am just a common person that realizes this world 
is in trouble. I did not ever believe that I would be here to 
talk to the world. We are facing a serious situation and 
the world is out of balance. Out elders are old now. They 
knocked on the door of the United Nations many times, 
but they refused to open the doors for them. M ost of them 
are too old now or gone. Therefore, we are coming to bring 
this message on their behalf to the United Nations about 
our prophecies. 

Our elders say that the white men just came over 
yesterday. We say this for we have been here for many 

thousands of years before them. When the white men 
came, an intelligent person, he invented many things. He 
changed things. 

He had the same teachings from the Great Spirit; but he 
changed the symbol. He brought his own symbol and he 
wanted to convert the Hopi people to Christianity. In 
many ways he wanted to change us and take our lands 
away from us. 

So it is this foreign influence that is disturbing the Hopi 
way of life and has almost destroyed the life plan given 
to us be the Great Spirit Not just the Hopi people, but all 
native people that live on this land. 

When the white man first came here we welcomed him 
and fed him. We greeted him with open arms and let him 
live here with us. After settling down in our homeland 
they built something called the House of Mica (the 
United Nations). The House of Mica speaks of a good life 
and has said: That if anyone has any troubles, if no one 
will help you anywhere, bring your problems over to us 
and we will help you with our writings. That we will 
correct and change these things, not by war, but by the 
law, and stop all of these wrongdoings." 

Now, as we come here, most of our land has been taken 
from us. 

The Hopi Tribal Council looks to the Secretary of Interior 
for its authority and power. In our traditional form of 
government we look to our elders for council. Also, we 
wish it to be known that the Hopi Tribal Council violates 
its own constitution and by-laws in refusing to consult 
with our elders before important decisions are made. Our 
sacred land is being stripped of our mineral resources, a 
violation of the agreement we have with the Great 
Spirit to live here as caretakers of the land. 

The Hopi Tribal Council was created illegally for the 
purpose of signing our lands away for mineral resource 
development in cooperation with big business: The Hopi 
Tribal Council for greed has fjeen created to negotiate 
business deals with Peabody Coal Company for thestrip 
mining of Black Mesa/Kayenta mine, the largest coal 
strip mine in the country. And for monetary gain our water 
is being depleted, and our survival is at stake. Over one 
billion gallons of water each year is being pumped from 
our aquifer to transport coal. This is the only coal water 

transport system-slurry line in the United States in a 
desert environment. Without water we cannot survive. 

And in addition to the desecration of our sacred land, and 
depletion of our water, we are facing water pipelines, 
electricity and phone lines coming into our village of 
Hotevilla. We know that these things cannot come into 
our sacred village. Hotevilla, the last traditional 
stronghold, in prophecy is connected to the four directions. 
We have always rejected these conveniences and in this, 
the final phase, we must remain Traditional and Strong. 
If we fulfill our prophecy and our village of Hotevilla, 
allows these conveniences to come in, then we face sudden 
destruction and purification in this world. Our 
traditional elders and forefathers have always been 
fighting this. But the Hopi Tribal Council is strong and 
has forced their way into all the other villages. We ask 
you now to help us ensure that Hotevilla continue to 
preserve the traditional way. 

We have always been required to obtain permits to herd 
cattle, livestock, housing, farming, coal and wood 
gathering. This is not the Hopi way. Now some of the 
highest Hopi religious leaders are asking permission 
from the Hopi Tribal Council to obtain permits to farm 
and herd cattle and for housing. Instead of the Tribal 
Council asking the Hopi religious leaders for permission 
to do these things. So now they have almost complete 
control of our land and life, and we are at the last stages. 

It was told to us that the Hopi will be the last ones to 
have their lands taken away, of all native peoples. And 
we now have has our own borders drawn under our feet; 
indicating that all our land has been reduced by White's 
man's law putting us within a boundary they call District 

Since most of our elders are gone and old now. They were 
supposed to come speaking as high leaders from our 
Nation to you. Therefore, we are bringing their message to 
you on their behalf. 

So it is up to you to consider these matters seriously to 
follow up this with a serious investigation. We invite you 
to come to Hopi land on behalf of the high religious 
leaders. You are most welcome to come. If you do not take 
any action about what we believe to be these wrong 
doings, Purification or Destruction may occur. 

For this is our belief that we know that something 
terrible might happen, Purification or Destruction. If we 
work together we can try to save as many lives as 
possible. That is why we are here today to give you our 
strong message. We give you 4 days, 4 weeks, 4 months to 
come to Hopi land and investigate these matters. 

Nothing was supposed to be taken from within our ground. 
This is sacred land and no minerals were to be taken out of 
the ground. This we know is why the earth is now out of 

balance. It is imperative at this time that you come out 
here look into these matters, otherwise Purification will 
come without mercy. The white man has almost 
destroyed all the life plan given to us by the Great Spirit. 
If you investigate these wrong doings and correct them 
then you will purify yourselves and avoid any 
punishment. This will also bring the life plan back to 
order. But since we have deviated from the life plan it is 
up to you, the world leaders to return by example. 

When the white man came and offered us many things, 
and papers for us to sign. We have refused to sign these 
things that would risk our land and life. We have never 
signed a treaty with the U.S. government and any nation. 
From overseas the foreign people came here to talk about 
a good life plan and built a House of Mica (the United 
Nations). Our elders said that we could come to you with 
our problems. We have tried to bring our problems to the 
U.S. government but we have received no help. Therefore, 
we come again to you to ask for help. 

I wish to refresh your memories back to a critical time in 
1962, when my grandfather, Monongye came to the United 
Nations but was not allowed in. The same situation still 
exists and we are again facing a critical situation. He has 
stated that when the evil forces take over then we face 
corruption. And it is this corruption that has created the 
world out of balance. In fulfillment of my grandfathers 
great desire to speak before you, I am now honored to 
finally bring to you these words on his behalf. 

The purpose of this gathering of Indian and non-Indian 
Brothers is to consider seriously, together, a way to 
accomplish or fulfill the great task of bringing about 
World Peace, Brotherhood and Everlasting Life for all 
good people who are now living with us in our homeland. 

So let us remember that we are gathered here not only for 
the Hopi people, but we are seriously thinking of the 
future and benefit of all other Indian People on this 
continent. And we include the white people who have 
come upon our land and settled with us. 

These matters are of no small value, this is not a little 
thing. Instead, this is the very foundation of all of us 
humans who are living on this land. Our common life 
together is based on the Life Plan our Great Spirit has 
given to us. It is a Life Plan with strong instructions and a 
serious warning that we must never lose faith - no matter 
how difficult that may be. 

As foretold by our forefathers, pur prophets, we may find 
ourselves in these 'Last Days' tightly bound up with 
irregularities of man-made laws or be suffering-greatiy 
for neglecting the spiritual laws of the Great Spirit, 
Massau'u. Evil forces may take control of our forms of 
government of the world and rule dictatorial ly. All over 
the land, freedom of the people will be suppressed or 
denied them. Evil rulers will look.more to material 


things than to the spiritual laws of the Great Spirit. 
When this happens there will be unrest all over the 
world. There will be gradual corruption and confusion 
among the leaders and the people all over the world, and 
wars will come. about like powerful winds. 

FROM HERE? How are we going to save ourselves from 
this terrible invention of war? These questions are, we are 
sure, in the minds and hearts of men everywhere today. 
Humanity stands at the brink of self destruction. A 
majority of the people are and have been led by their evil 
leaders to the edge of disaster. Are we going to submit 
weakly to rules or leadership of Evil Men to our sorrow 
and shame or are we Courageous and Faithful enough to 
return ourselves to the spiritual road of the Great Spirit? 

Great Spirit, Massau'u who we firmly believed is here 
with us, listening to us and watching over us, long ago 
gave to all races of people a good Life Plan to follow. His 
commandment to all was "Be Faithful Always and I will 
be the Last." Then in very clear and simple words told us 
to love one another, to be kind to all people, animal and 
plant life on this Mother Earth. Hopi and other Indian 
Brothers are fully aware of these great teachings. 

But what happens today? Mankind is doing exactly the 
things the Great Spirit told us not to. For material gains 
many people have killed, lied, stolen, robbed their 
neighbors' property and heaped falsehood upon their 
fellow beings., There is, hardly any true love, only hatred 
in the hearts of men today. The greatest concern of the 
Hopi and others, at this moment, is not the powerful 
weapons invented by men' but the WRATH of the Great 
Spirit. The more we turn away from the Great Spirit the 
more He will punish us either with earthquakes, floods, 
lightning, great winds or all kinds of sickness or drought. 

We know from our ancient teachings that there will be 
many good white people who will one day understand us 
and help to preserve and maintain our Spiritual Way of 
Life, for they will recognize soon that the only way to 
salvation for them in the future is to help the Hopi in 
this hour of need. This has been also prophesied. 

Our Horji leaders who have faith in the Great Spirit, 
have been beaten up by U.S. Government officials, jailed 
and forced to make roads on our land Yet, in spite of all 
those injustices, they remained faithful to their religious 
beliefs. They continue to work and pray for all of us so 
that the Great Spirit will not neglect us or punish us, but 
will save all those faithful ones and allow them to enter 
real peace, brotherhood and everlasting life. 

But before that day comes there will be a day of 
Purification of this land. These are some of the things 
that Hopi people know and adhere to in order to save 
many good people at the Purification Day." 

And in fulfillment of our mission here, both with the 
spirit of my grandfather, Monongye, and I. We firmly 
believe that coming together today like this is a 
fulfillment of one of our prophecies. So we hope that you 
will listen to our warnings and act accordingly. 

Thank you 

I am sorry to say that your leaders in Washington or the 
White House seem to neglect this truth and insist on 
making more powerful weapons of destruction. They will 
never bring about real peace. They will only bring sudden 
death to all living things on the Earth. Knowing these 
truths and facts the Hopi leaders will continue to adhere 
to the teachings of the Great Spirit. They will not want 
to molest human being or animal or plant life. Hopi will 
not invent anything to destroy human being. Neither will 
they allow their minerals to be taken out at this time, for 
they know they will be used, for war purposes by present 
leaders. Our Great Spirit has sternly warned us against 
it. Therefore our leaders will not want our young men to be 
forced to go to war in foreign soil. 

Hopi leaders and Religious men will stand firmly upon 
the words of the Great Spirit for' they have made sacred 
oath or agreement with Him that they will never turn 
away from Him. 


Statement by William Commanda, Algonquin, at the UN Cry of the Earth Conference 

Grandfather William Commanda of Maniwaki, Quebec is the Keener of the Seven Fires 
Wampum Belt of the Anishnabe (Algonquin peoples). The Seven-Fires Prophecy of the 
Anishnabe is spiritually encoded in this belt The following transcription by Gayil Nails of 
Grandfather Commanda's speech at the UN is unintelligible in places, perhaps due to the difficulty 
of translating unfamiliar spiritual concepts into English. Another version of the Seven Fires 
Prophecy - also from Grandfather Commanda - can be found on page 77 


General Assembly, United Nations 

November 22,1993 

Algonquin Delegation 

William Commanda, Keeper of the Wampum Belts 

Marc Thompson, Ojibway 

Edmund Decontie 

Frank Decontie 

(Frank Decontie translated for Grandfather Commanda) 

I want to thank the great Creator to be able to be here 
today and share with you the sacred message. We are 
here due to the urgency of the cry of our Mother Earth and 
the urgency of our concerns for all forms of life, physical 
and spiritual. We have agreed to present our Wampum 
Belts which are a sacred link to the spiritual and 
physical forces which contain the forces and knowledge 
of life, from the past, to the present, to the future. They 
come to us from other dominions. What we are going to 
explain to you through these Wampum Belts is what it is, 
where it comes from, why it is sacred, what it reveals to 
us of the future, why we have a choice for the future, how 
the answers are there, but only if we listen and join again 
with the spiritual worlds. Otherwise the balance of the 
Earth will shift her axis and life will be gravely 
disturbed and harmed by this process. This is why the 
healing is essential. 

This sacred Wampum Belt is the Wampum Belt of 
the Seven Fires. This Wampum Belt has seven Diamonds 
which represent the Seven Fires. We pray every day 
that our waters will come back as it was created by the 
Creator when only First Nations were living in the 
Continents of the Americas. All waters were pure and 
healthy. Today we are experiencing many sicknesses 
that we contact from drinking the poisons from the water. 
The medical doctors are not able to find a cure for diseases 
that confront us and it is costing an impossible amount of 
money to medical departments who are trying to save 
lives. Today the paper mills, who are polluting the 
waters and the so-called tourists are not helping to cure 
the waters, They pollute with motor boats and are 
spilling the gas in the waters. It is happening 
continuously up north in Canada. This is the first reading 
of the first diamond. 

We pray every day to our Mother the Earth and we 
ask the Creator to help us save the Earth so she can keep 

on to provide us with all kinds of fruit, berries and 
gardens. We pray that the air pollution will be 
eliminated so that all kinds of grass and our medicines 
will stay alive and strong. We pray to the Mother Earth 
so that she could continue to do her job and that is to 
provide nourishment growth for all living creation of 
which she is responsible. We pray every day to the 
Creator for all kinds of different trees that she had 
provided us so that we could make all kinds of crafts, 
canoes, snow shoes, toboggans, to provide us with stove 
wood so our children will not be cold. We all give thanks 
to our Creator for our tree relations. It is a sad experience 
of what we see today, that all the trees are dying from 
air pollution. There are no more White Birch trees of 
good quality to make a Birch Bark Canoe. Hard wood 
mills are not helping to preserve those trees. The veneer 
plants are not helping because of their mass production 
manufacturing towards this one material. 

We pray everyday that the air that we breathe 
becomes pure so that we may remain healthy. It is 
causing our eyes to fade. We are unable to see as we once 
did in the past years. Breathing the poison air everyday 
is causing our women to develop cancer and other 
ailments. The wildlife is not too healthy as we have 
noticed for the last twenty years. Our animal and bird 
relations are being continuously harmed and will 
eventually die, due to this problem of air pollution. 

We pray day after day, to find a solution to be able to 
save our children from drugs and alcohol. They are 
destroying their lives. They are bleeding their parents 
for money to nourish their habits. Our children, at times, 
steal from their parents. With'the habit of stealing they 
become professional liars. Therefore, we don't know when 
they are telling the truth. It is a very sad situation to see 
our upcoming generation to be in this predicament. 

We pray that our fish will come back as the Creator 
has created them. We are concerned for all living things 
that live in the waters, whether they are big or small, 
that are presently being contaminated and destroyed as 
we deliver this message to you. 

Seventh reading. We pray' that our birds may still 
survive for they too are suffering because of air pollution 
and earth damages of wood, berries and other food 
supplies that they rely on'to survive, The water 
pollution does not help matters any for our bird relations. 
They are being poisoned by these types of harm. We as a 
people believe that when our bird relations become 
extinct, that all life will cease to exist. The prophecy of 


the Seven Fires Belt, our ancestors, people of the East, the 
Beotucks, mentioned the Seven Prophets. People were 
warned by their Elders about the first prophet Would he 
be serious or not, that would come to our people. 

The second prophet. The Elders warned the people to 
observe his behavior. Would everything be beautiful and 
valuable? This is how you will recognize his wants or 
desires through his actions of greed. 

The third prophet The people were warned that 
when the third prophet arrived, he would have 
something in his hand like a knife or a gun. We have to 
be careful. He will wound or kill with what he carries. 

The fourth prophet The people were warned that 
the fourth prophet will live amongst our people and 
therefore mix the blood of our blood. 

The fifth prophet. The people were warned about 
how he will speak with his tongue. If he speaks of the 
Creator he will be known through his manner of speech. 

The sixth prophet. People were warned that this 
prophet will arrive from the East and journey to the 
West. He will tamper with many different minerals of 
Mother Earth. 

The seventh prophet People were warned of the 
seventh prophet. When he arrives this prophet will 
have three different colors or races that do not exist with 
us at this time. Our Grandfathers have explained that 
one will come that will have a black robe or black dress 
with a belt that has a cross attached. His work is like a 
sunrise reflecting. His work and teaching will also be 
reflecting. Our Grandfather said that there will be 
others that will come in large numbers like the way our 
trees are standing. You see that Birch Tree that is 
standing? That is the color of the person. You look at the 
other side and you will see that yellow cobbler color and 
this will be the color of that other person. You look at 
the red color trees, such as the Red Spruce and you are 

reflecting within yourself. You look at the other 
direction, the Black Cherry Tree, and this is the color of 
this person. You return to the East where the Eastern 
Native People, the Beotucks, Newfoundland. During the 
1800s, the Belt with beads that were cut off and divided 
in two, two diamonds. Our Grandfathers mentioned that 
this meant that two Anishnabe Nations will cease to 
exist The Nakadis? and the Montagnais? When the fire 
was lit at the Eastern direction to the Western direction 
the Algonquin languages were then connected and 
understood from sea to sea. When the fire was lit at the 
Western direction it was said there would be no talking 
for 400 years. It has been a hundred years that the 
Native People have been talking for the recognition 
rights and to the land. When the fire from the West is to 
be lit the journey towards the East to the arrival of the 
Double Diamond Belt there will be an enormous 
gathering. It has passed and is known as the Referendum. 
This will be used to destroy all the Anishnabe beliefs and 
rights of the First Occupants of the North American 
continent. This did not pass or come to be. The immigrants 
got discouraged and did not pursue the Referendum. The 
Creator allowed the good vision to the First Nation, our 
Grandfathers that when the time comes to give the First 
Nation the opportunity to receive the Natural Rights 
and Laws. 

The Second Diamond will close the Eighth Diamond, 
entrenched to the Seven Nations, our buyers (?). At this 
time there will be a Purification, a cleansing of the 
Earth. More than two thirds of the First Nations will 
perish. Many people believe that AIDS is killing 
millions of people today. Mother Nature acting through 
natural disasters such as tornadoes, earthquakes, fires 
and floods. This is the history of the teachings from the 
First Nation People and their prophecies. 


Statement by Leon Shenandoah, Iroquois Confederacy, at the UN, 1985 

The following statement by Leon Shenandoah, Tadodaho, Haudenosaunee, (Chief of Chiefs, Six 
Nations Iroquois Confederacy) was given at the United Nations on October 25, 1985. This version 
is from the book 1/1/ isdomkeepers: Meetings with Native American Spiritual Elders, ©1990, Steve 
Wall & Harvey Arden, Beyond Words Publishing, Inc. Grandfather Shenandoah passed to the 
Spirit World in July 19%, as so many great Native American elders have recently done. 

Address to the General Assembly of the United Nations 
Delivered October 25, 1985 by Leon Shenandoah, 
Tadodaho, Haudenosaunee 

Brothers, listen to the words of the Creator given to the 
first United Nations, the Haudenosaunee, over 1,000 
years ago. 

The Chiefs of the Haudenosaunee shall be mentors of the 
people for all time. The thickness of their skins shall be 
seven spans, which is to say that they shall be proof 
against anger, offensive action, and criticism. Their 
hearts shall be full of peace and good will, and their 
minds full of a yearning for the welfare of the people. 
With endless patience, they shall carry out their duty. 
Their firmness shall be tempered with a tenderness for 
their people. Neither anger nor fury shall find lodging in 
their minds, and all their words and actions shall be 
marked by calm deliberation.' 

In every nation there are wise and good people. These 
should be appointed Chiefs. They should be the advisors 
of their people and work for the good of all the people., 
and their power comes from the "Great Peace." A chief 
must never forget the Creator of mankind, never forget to 
ask the Creator for help. The Creator will guide our 
thoughts and strengthen us as we work to be faithful to 
our sacred trust and restore harmony among all peoples, 
all living creatures, and Mother Earth. 

We were instructed to carry a love for one another and to 
show a great respect for all the beings of this earth... In 
our ways spiritual consciousness is the highest form of 
politics. When people cease to respect and express 
gratitude for these many things, then all life will be 
destroyed, and human life on this planet will come to an 

These are our times and responsibilities. Every human 
being has a sacred duty to protect the welfare of our 
Mother Earth, from whom all life comes. In order to do 
this we must recognize the enemy -- the one within us. We 
must begin with ourselves. 

We must live in harmony with the Natural World and 
recognize that excessive exploitation can only lead to our 
own destruction. We cannot trade the welfare of our future 
generations for profit now. We must abide by the Natural 
Law or be victims of its ultimate reality. 

We must stand together, the four sacred colors of humans, 
as the one family we are, in the interest of peace. 

We must abolish nuclear and conventional weapons of 

When warriors are leaders, then you will have war. We 
must raise leaders of peace. 

We must unite the religions of the world as the spiritual 
force strong enough to prevail in peace. 

It is no longer good enough to cry, 'Peace." We must act 
peace, live peace, and march in peace in alliance with 
the people of the world. 

We are the spiritual energy that is thousands of times 
stronger than nuclear energy. Our energy is the combined 
will of all people with the spirit of the Natural World, 
to be of one body, one heart and one mind for peace. 

We propose, as a resolution for peace, that October 24th 
be designated as a Day of Peace, and a world cease-fire 
take place in honor of our children and the Seventh 
Generation to come. 

Day nay ton. 


The Hopi Story by Hopi Elder Dan Katchongva 

This document can be found on the internet on the "Hopi Information Network": 

http:/ / -abyte/ hopi/ 

Following are excerpts of remarks by Hopi Elder Dan Katchongva, Sun Clan, 1865-1972. 
Grandfather Katchongva is widely and fondly remembered as one of the wisest traditional elders. 
He was the son of Yukioma, the leader of the Traditionals who were forced out of the village of 
Oraibi by the "Progressives" in 1906. The Traditionals then founded the village of Hotevilla. (For 
a short version of Hopi'history see page 39. For a more complete version, read Hotevilla. 5 ) As 
Kikmonewi (traditional religious leader) of Hotevilla, Grandfather Katchongva was an important 
leader of the few remaining fully traditional Hopi. He was one of the 30 Elders author Frank 
Waters interviewed in 1961-1962 lorThe Book of the Hopi (see page 28). 

The foil owing remarks are from a 32 page pamphlet called TheBeginning of Life to theDay of 
Purification: The Hopi Story ~ Teachings, History, and Prophecies of the Hopi People as told by the 
late Dan' Katchongva, Sun Clan (18651972) complete text, translated by banagyumptewa. I have 
been unable to find a copy of the original pamphlet which was distributed in the early 1970*s by 
The Planting Stick Project of Santa Fe, New Mexico. I believe this was an organization created by 
Tom Tarbet, who has been a student of Hopi Teachings and friend to Hopi Traditional Elders since 
the early 1960s. 


The Hopi Story - Teachings, History, and Prophecies of 
the Hopi People As told by the late Dan Katchongva, 
Sun Clan (18654972) 

Translated by Danagyumptewa. 

Originally published in 1972 by the Committee for 
Traditional Indian Land and Life Los Angeles, 


In a talk recorded on January 29, 1970, Dan told the 
story of the People of Peace, from the dawn of time to the 
attacks which led to the founding of Hotevilla in 2906, 
the school, money, and police systems which threaten to 
end the Hopi Way within this generation; and the 
consequences for America and the world. 

The thought of publishing his talk grew from the 
recognition that those causing this tragedy, and the 
millions who support them, could not persist; had they 
but a glimpse of the purpose behind Hopi resistance to 
foreign control. Dan agreed to the publication of this 
booklet on condition that it never be sold, insisting that to 
sell Hopi teachings would be like selling his own mother. 

In addition to the prophecies fulfilled during his 
lifetime, Dan was told by his father that he would live 

to see the beginning of the final event of this era, the 
Great Day of Purification. Dan Katchongva died in 1972. 


Somewhere down in the underworld we were created 
by the Great Spirit, the Creator. We were created first 
one, then two, then three. We were created equal, of 
oneness, living in a spiritual way, where the life is 
everlasting. We were happy and at peace with our 
fellow men. All things were plentiful, provided by our 
Mother Earth upon which we were placed. We did not 
need to plant or work to get food. Illness and troubles were 
unknown. For many years we lived happily and increased 
to great numbers. 

When the Great Spirit created us, he also gave us 
instructions or laws to live by. We promised to live by his 
laws so that we would remain peaceful, using them as a 
guideline for living happily upon that land were he 
created and placedus. But from the beginning he watfned 
us that we must not be tempted by certain things by which 
we might lose this perfect way of life. 

Of course we had advantage of many good things in 
this life, so by and by we broke the Creator's command by 
doing what he told us not to do. So he punished us by 
making us as we are now, with both soul and body. He 
said, "From now on you will have to go on'your own. You 
will get sick, and the length of your life will be limited." 

He made our bodies of two principles, good and evil. 
The left side is good, for it contains the heart The right 
side is evil, for it has no heart. The left side is awkward 

'Hotevilla, Hopi Shrine of the Covenant - Microcosm of the World," © Thomas E. Mails and Dan Evehema. 1996, Marlowe & Company. 


but wise. The right side is clever and strong, but it lacks 
wisdom. There would be a constant struggle between the 
two sides, and by our actions we would have to decide 
which was stronger, the evil or thegood. 

We lived in good ways for many years, but eventually 
evil proved to be stronger. Some of the people forgot or 
ignored the Great Spirifs laws and once again began to do 
things that went against his instructions. They became 
materialistic, inventing many things for their own gain 
and not sharing things as they had in the past. This 
resulted in a great division, for some still wanted to 
follow the original instructions and live simply. 

The inventive ones, clever but lacking wisdom, made 
many destructive things by which their lives were 
disrupted, and which threatened to destroy all the 
people. Many of the things we see today are known to 
have existed at that time. Finally immorality 
flourished. The lives of the people became corrupted 
with social and sexual license, which swiftly involved 
the Kikmongwi's wife and daughters, who rarely came 
home to take care of their household duties. Not only the 
Kikmongwi but also the high religious leaders were 
having the same problem. Soon the leaders and others 
with good hearts were worried that the life of the people 
was getting out of control. 

The Kikmongwi gathered the high priests. They 
smoked and prayed for guidance toward a way to solve 
the corruption. Many times they gathered, until finally 
someone suggested that they move, find a new place, and 
start a new life. 


Now they had often heard certain thumping sounds 
coming from above, so they knew that someone might be 
living there. It was decided that this must be 
investigated. I describe this briefly, for the whole story 
would take much space. 

Being gifted with wisdom, they created birds for this 
purpose. I will name three. Two which are known for 
their strength and swiftness are the kisa [hawk] and the 
pavowkaya [swallow]. The third was a moochnee 
[related to the mockingbird]. His flight is awkward, but 
he is known to be wise. They were each created at 
separate times by magic songs, tobacco smoke and prayers, 
from dirt and saliva, which was covered by a white cape 
[ova]. Each was welcomed respectfully and given 
instructions for his mission, should he succeed. 

The first two failed to reach the top side of the sky, 
but the third one, moochnee, came through the opening 
into this world. 

The new world was beautiful. The earth was green 
and in bloom. The bird observed all his instructions. His 
sense of wisdom guided him to the being he was instructed 
to seek, When he found him it was high noon, for the 
being, Maasauu, the Great Spirit, was preparing his 
noonday meal. Ears of corn lay beside the fire. He flew 
down and lit on top of his kisi [shady house] and sounded 
his arrival. Maasauu was not surprised by the visitor, for 

by his wisdom and sense of smell he already knew 
someone was coming. Respectfully he welcomed him and 
invited him to sit down. The interview was brief and to 
the point "Why are you here? Could it be important?" 
"Yes," said Moochnee, "I was sent here by the underworld 
people. They wish to come to your land and live with 
you, for their ways have become corrupted. With your 
permission they wish to move here with you and start a 
new life. This is why I have come." Maasauu replied 
bluntly, but with respect; They may come." 

With this message the bird returned to the 
underworld. While he was gone the Kikmongwi and the 
leaders had continued topi-ay and wait for his successful 
return. Upon his return with the good news of the new 
world and Maasauu's permission for them to come, they 
were overjoyed. 

Now the question was how they were to get to the 
top, so again they smoked and prayed for guidance. At 
last they agreed to plant a tree that would grow to the 
top and serve as a pathway. They planted the seed of a 
shalavee [spruce tree], then they prayed and sang magic 
songs. The tree grew and grew until it reached the sky, 
but its branches were so soft and so many that it bent under 
the heavy earth pressure from the top, so it did not pierce 
the sky. They planted another seed, this one to be a louqu 
[pine]. It grew as they sang their magic songs. This tree 
was stout and strong. "Surely this one will go through," 
they thought But it was unsuccessful, for its branches 
also bent upon contact with the solid object Again they 
planted a seed. This time it was a Igakave [reed]. Since 
it had a pointed end it pierced the sky up into the new 

Meanwhile all of this had been kept secret. Only 
proper righteous and one-hearted people were informed 
of the plans to leave the corrupt world. They were 
prepared to move out, so as soon as they knew it was 
successful they started to come up on the inside of the 
plant, resting between the joints as they worked their 
way up to the opening. 

When they got to this world, everything was 
beautiful and peaceful. The land was virgin, unmolested. 
They were very happy. They sang and danced with joy, 
but their joy was short-lived, for that night the chief's 
daughter died suddenly. Everyone was sad and worried. 
People looked at one -another suspiciously. An evil spell 
had been enacted. This caused great concern that a witch 
or two-hearted person might be among them. 

Now the Kikmongwi had great power, which he must 
use to settle the concerns of his people. He made a small 
ball out of commeal, which he tossed up above the group 
of people. The one upon whose head it landed would be 
the guilty one. It landed upoivthe head of a girl. A quick 
decision was made to throw her back through the opening 
into the underworld. The wickedness must be gotten rid 
of, for they wished to live peacefully in this new land. 
But the witch girl cried out for mercy, telling them that 
on their long journey they would face many obstacles and 
dangers of every description, and that her services would 
become useful, for she had power to fight evil. She 


invited the Kikmongwi to look back down into the 
underworld. He looked and saw his child playing 
happily with the other children in the underworld, 
where upon death we will all return. The witch girl was 
spared, but they left her there alone, perhaps hoping 
that she would perish by some unknown cause. 


It was here that the Great Spirit first appeared to 
them on this earth, to give them the instructions by 
which they were to live and travel. They divided into 
groups, each with its selected leader. Before them he 
laid ears of com of various lengths. They were each 
instructed to pick one ear of corn to take with them on 
their journey, for their subsistence and their livelihood. 
One by one they greedily picked out the longest and most 
perfect long ears until only the shortest was left. They 
did not realize that this was a test of wisdom. The 
shortest ear was picked by the humblest leader. Then the 
Great Spirit gave them their names and the languages by 
which they would be recognized. The last picker of short 
com was named HO PI. 

HO PI means not only to be peaceful, but to obey and 
have faith in the instructions of the Great Spirit, and not 
to distort any of his teachings for influence or power, or in 
any way to corrupt the HOPI way of life. Otherwise the 
name will be taken away. 

He then gave them instructions according to which 
they were to migrate for a certain purpose to the four 
comers of the new land, leaving many footprints, rock 
writings, and ruins, for in time many would forget that 
they were all one, united by a single purpose in coming up 
through the reed. Now that we were on top we were each 
to follow our own leaders, but so long as we did not forget 
the instructions of the Great Spirit we would be able to 
survive. We were now bound by a vow to live by these 
instructions and to complete our pattern of migration. 
M aasauu told us that whoever would be the first to find 
him would be the leader of those who were to follow, 
then he disappeared. 


We migrated for many years to every comer of this 
continent, marking our claim as we traveled, as these 
markings clearly testify up to the present day. On our 
way we stopped for rest near the great river now known as 
the Colorado. We had traveled far and gained a great 
deal of knowledge, not forgetting our instructions. The 
group leader was of the Bow Clan, a great chief with 
wisdom. But it was here that this great chief 
disappeared into the dark night. After putting his 
family to sleep he left in search of the Earth Center, 
where clever, ingenious people from all nations meet to 
plan the future. By some means he found the place and 
was welcomed with respect. It was a beautiful place 
with all manner of good things. Good food was laid 

before him by most beautiful girls. It was all very 

Until today we did not know the significance of this 
action. It had to do with the future. By this action he 
caused a change to occur in the pattern of life as we near 
the end of the life cycle of this world, such that many of 
us would seek the materialistic world, trying to enjoy all 
the good things it has to offer before destroying ourselves. 
Those gifted with the knowledge of the sacred 
instructions will then live very cautiously, for they will 
remember and have faith in these instructions, and it will 
be on their shoulders that the fate of the world will rest. 
The people will corrupt the good ways of life, bringing 
about the same life as that from which we fled in the 
underworld. The sacred body of the female will no longer 
be hidden, for the shield of protection will be uplifted, an 
act of temptation toward sexual license, which will also 
be enjoyed. Most of us will be lost in all the confusion. An 
awareness that something extraordinary is happening 
will develop in most of the people, for even their leaders 
will be confused into polluting themselves. It will be 
difficult to decide whom to follow. 

The Hopi knew all this would come about. All these 
aspects of today's life pattern were planned. So today we 
must stand fully on our belief in order to survive. The only 
course is to follow the instructions of the Great Spirit 


This Bow Clan chief had two grown sons. When they 
learned of their father's misdeed they were very sad. 
Their knowledge of the teachings which they had 
received from him was all in order. Now they were left 
alone to lead their people, for the very next day their 
father died. 

They asked their mother to permit them to carry out 
the order of their instructions for an event of this nature. 
She replied that it was up to them, for their knowledge 
was complete. Upon agreement, the younger brother was 
to continue in search of M aasauu, and to settle where he 
found him. There he would await the return of his older 
brother, who was to travel eastward toward the rising 
sun, where he would rest briefly. While resting, he must 
listen for the voice of his younger brother, who would 
expect him to come to his aid, for the change in the life 
pattern will have disrupted the way of life of his people. 
Under the pressure of a new ruler they will surely be 
wiped off the face of the earth unless he comes. 

So today we are still standing firmly on the Great 
Spirit's instructions. We will continue to look and pray 
toward the East for his prompt return. Tlie younger 
brother warned the Elder that the land and the people 
would change. "But do not let your heart be troubled," he 
said, "for you will find us. Many will turn away from the 
life plan of M aasauu, but a few of us who are true to his 
teachings will remain in our dwellings. The ancient 
character of our heads, the shape of our houses, the 
layout of our villages, and the type of land upon which 


our village stands, and our way of life. All will be in 
order, by which you will find us." 

Before the first people had begun their migrations 
the people named Hopi were given a set of stone tablets. 
Into these tablets the Great Spirit inscribed the laws by 
which the Hopi were to travel and live the good way of 
life, the peaceful way. They also contained a warning 
that the Hopi must beware, for in time they would be 
influenced by wicked people to forsake the life plan of 
Maasauu. It would not be easy to stand up against this, 
for it would involve many good things that would tempt 
many good people to forsake these laws. The Hopi would 
be led into a most difficult position. The stones contain 
instructions to be followed in such a case. 

The older brother was to take one of the stone tablets 
with him to the rising sun, and bring it back with him 
when he hears the desperate call for aid. His brother 
will be in a state of hopelessness and despair. His people 
may have forsaken the teachings, no longer respecting 
their Elders, and even turning upon their Elders to destroy 
their way of life. The stone tablets will be the final 
acknowledgment of their true identity and brotherhood. 
Their mother is Sun Clan. They are the children of the 


So it must be a Hopi who traveled from here to the 
rising sun and is waiting someplace. Therefore it is only 
the Hopi that still have this world rotating properly, 
and it is the Hopi who must be purified if this world is to 
be saved. No other person anyplace will accomplish this. 

The older brother had to travel fast on his journey, for 
there was not much time, so the horse was created for 
him. The younger brother and his people continued on in 
search of M aasauu. 

On their way they came to a land that looked fertile 
and warm. Here they marked their clan symbols on the 
rock to claim the land. This was done by the Fire Clan, 
the Spider Clan, and the Snake Clan. This place is now 
called Moencopi. They did not settle there at that time. 

While the people were migrating, Maasauu was 
waiting for the first ones to arrive. In those days he used 
to take walks near the place where he lived, carrying a 
bunch of violet flowers [dukyarn-see] in his belt. One day 
he lost them along the way. When he went to look for 
them he found that they had been picked up by the 
Homytoad Woman. When he asked her for the flowers 
she refused to give them back, but instead gave him her 
promise that she would help him in time of need. "I have 
a metal helmet," she told him, (possibly meaning that 
certain people with metal helmets would help the Hopi 
when they get into difficulty). Often Maasauu would 
walk about a half mile north of his du-pa-cha (a type of 
temporary house) to a place where there lay a long rock 
which formed a natural shelter, which he must have 
picked as the place where he and the first people would 
find each other. While waiting there he would amuse 
himself by playing a game to test his skill, the name of 
which (Naduwonpi-kya) was to play an important part 
later on in the life of the Hopi, for it was here that the 
knowledge and wisdom of the first people was to be 

tested. Until recent times children used to play a similar 
game there, something like hide-and-seek. One person 
would hide, then signal by tapping on the rock, which 
would transmit the sound in a peculiar way so that the 
others would not tell exactly where the tapping was 
coming from. (Some years ago this rock was destroyed by 
government road builders.) It was here that they found 
Maasauu waiting. 


Before the migrations began Maasauu had let it be 
known, though perhaps not by direct instructions, that 
whoever would find him first would be the leader there. 
Later it became clear that this was a procedure by which 
their true character would be specified. When they found 
him the people gathered and sat down with him to talk. 
The first thing they wanted to know was where he lived. 
He replied that he lived just north of there at a place 
called Oraibi. For a certain reason he did not name it 
fully. The full name is Sip-Oraibi, meaning something 
that has been solidified, referring to the fact that this is 
the place where the earth was made solid; 

They asked permission to live there with him. He 
did not answer directly, for within them he saw evil. 
"It's up to you," he said. "I have nothing here. My life is 
simple. All I have is my planting stick and my corn. If 
you are willing to live as I do, and follow my instructions, 
the life plan which I shall give you, you may live here 
with me and take care of the land. Then you shall have a 
long, happy, fruitful life." 

Then they asked him whether he would be their 
leader, thinking that thus they would be assured a 
peaceful life. "No," he replied, "the one who led you 
here will be the leader until you fulfill your pattern of 
life" (for he saw into their hearts and knew that they 
still had many selfish desires). "After that I will be the 
leader, but not before, for I am the first and I shall be the 
last." Having left all the instructions with them, he 


The village of Oraibi was settled and built in 
accordance with the instructions of the Great Spirit The 
Bow Clan chief was the father of the ceremonial order. 
They remained under the leadership of the Bow Clan for 
some time, perhaps until corruptions set in. As you recall, 
the Bow Clan chief of the past had contaminated his 
standing by taking part in the changing of the life 

Later the Bear Clan took gyer. This might have been 
because the bear is strong and mighty. There may have 
been other reasons too, such as a prophecy which told 
that a bear, sleeping somewhere in the northern part of 
what is now called Europe, would awaken at a certain 
time and walk to the northern part of this country, where 
he would wait This group is called Bear Clan because 
they came across a dead bear at the place of the shield 


symbol. Most of the important people claimed to be of the 
Bear Clan, including the Bluebird and Spider Clan 

The vow which we made with the Great Spirit 
obligated us to follow His way of life. He gave the land 
to us to use and care for through our ceremonial duties. He 
instructed us and showed us the road plan by which we 
must govern our lives. We wrote this pattern on a rock so 
that we would always be reminded to follow the straight 
road. The. Hopi must not drift away from this road or He 
will take this land away from us. This is the warning 
given to us by Maasau'u. 

Oraibi village was settled firmly. Migrating people 
were now gathering there and asking to be admitted into 
the village. The Kikmongwi and the high priests would 
always consider their request and base their judgment 
upon their character and wisdom. Those who showed 
signs of boastfulness were turned away and told to go to 
the south mesas where their kind of people lived. Only 
good people, humble and sincere in their prayers, were 

One of these groups was the Coyote Clan They were 
coming from Sh-got-kee (Si-aht-ki), close to Walpi. 
There were several reasons they were pointed out as bad 
people, but they were clever in a way. At first they were 
not allowed to join the village. But when they made their 
fourth request they were accepted according to the custom, 
and they were admitted with the agreement that they 
act as a protection, and that in time of troubles they had 
to support and help the spokesman. But they were warned 
to be cautious. Although, the devout never torture to the 
end. And that is the way we had it with all the clans, 
because on the way most of us want to cheat or deceive the 
leaders to get glory or fame; which leads us to the point of 
polkuting our way and to shake our beliefs. 

The last group that was admitted to Oraibi was the 
Grey Eagle Clan. As they finished their migration, they 
first settled in what today is called New Mexico. Because 
they'were people who like to make wars, and trouble 
makers they were, they were chased away by the Pueblo 
Indians there. As they came to this area, they settled at 
Mishongovi on Second Mesa, with the condition that they 
would not start a quarrel or conflict If they break this 
promise, they should leave without resistance. So, they 
started another conflict and they left as promised. After 
that they came to Oraibi and asked to be admitted there. 
After several attempts they were allowed to come in 
under the same promise that they had to give to the 
other village, that they would move voluntarily if they 
started restlessness or broke their promise. In accordance 
with this agreement, the leader of the Village 
Mishongovi would consider re-accepting them on Second 
Mesa, or to send them back to New Mexico where the 
Pueblo Indians could do with them what they think is 

Later, as we were forced to leave the Village Oraibi, 
and we started to settle in Hotvela, they came with us, 
with the same agreement. That is still in effect today. 
Again they started restlessness and they are now 

obligated to leave. They are the seed of all the 
destruction in our village. They betrayed the Hopi 
Nation because they bow before the ones that come with 
nice words, and through that they get benefits and 
advantages. For them, there are just two ways: the way of 
the Great Spirit or the way of Bahanna. They are 
obligated to go to Mishongovi as agreed. The people over 
there wait for them, but they don't have the courage to do 
what they promised. And they hide themselves 
cowardly behind the man-made law of Bahanna. 

Among the ceremonies of each group the prayer for 
rain was important in order for the crops to grow and 
produce an abundance of food. The people depended on 
this for their livelihood. Boastful people were not 
admitted so that the prayers would not be polluted. 

Oraibi was now firmly established. The pattern of 
the religious order was established. Cycle by cycle we 
paid respect to our Mother Earth, our Father Sun, the 
Great Spirit; and all things through our ceremonies. We 
were happy for. we were united as one. 


Time passed on, people passed on, and the prophecies 
of things to come were passed from mouth to mouth. The 
stone tablets and the rock writing of the life plan were 
often reviewed by the Elders. Fearfully they waited as 
they retold the prophecy that one day another race of 
people would appear in their midst and claim our land as 
his own. He would try to change our pattern of life. He 
would have "a sweet tongue" or a "fork tongue" and many 
good things by which we would be tempted. He would use 
force in an attempt to trap us into using weapons, but we 
must not fall for this trick, for then we ourselves would be 
brought to our knees, from which we might not be able to 
rise. Nor must we ever raise our hand against any nation. 
We now call these people Bahanna. 


We have teachings and prophecies informing us that 
we must be alert for the signs and omens which will come 
about to give us courage and strength to stand on our 
beliefs. Blood will flow. Our hair and our clothing will be 
scattered upon the earth. Nature will speak to us with its 
mighty breath of wind. There will be earthquakes and 
floods causing great disasters, changes in the seasons and 
in the weather, disappearance of wildlife, and famine in 
different forms. There wiil be gradual corruption and 
confusion among the leaders and the people all over the 
world, and wars will come about like powerful winds. All 
of this has been planned from tjje beginning of creation. 

We will have three people standing behind us, ready 
to fulfill our prophecies when we get into hopeless 
difficulties: the Meha Symbol (which refers to a plant 
that has a long root, milky sap, grows back when cut off, 
and has a flower shaped like a swastika, symbolizing 
the four great forces of nature in motion), the Sun Symbol, 
and the Red Symbol. Bahanna's intrusion into the Hopi 


way of life will set the Meha symbol in motion, so that 
the four great forces of nature (the four directions, the 
controlling forces, the original force) which will rock the 
world into war. When this happens we will know that 
our prophecies are coming true. We will gather strength 
and stand firm. 

This great movement will fall, but because its 
Subsistence is milk, and because it is controlled by the four 
forces of nature, it will rise again to put the world in 
motion, creating another war, in which both the Meha 
and the Sun Symbol will be at work. Then it will rest in 
order to rise a third time. Our prophecy foretells that the 
third event will be the decisive one. Our road plan 
foretell6 the outcome. 

This sacred writing speaks the word of the Great 
Spirit. It could mean the mysterious life seed with two 
principle6 of tomorrow, indicating one, inside of which is 
two. The third and last, which will it bring forth, 
purification or destruction? 

The third event will depend upon the Red Symbol, 
which will take command, setting the four forces of 
nature (Meha) in motion for the benefit of the Sun. When 
he sets these forces in motion the whole world will shake 
and turn red and turn against the people who are 
hindering the Hopi cultural life. To all these people 
Purification Day will come. Humble people will run to 
him in search of a new world, and the equality that has 
been denied them. He will come unmercifully. His people 
will cover the Earth like red ants. We must not go outside 
to watch. We must stay in our houses. He will come and 
gather the wicked people who are hindering the red 
people who were here first. He will be looking for 
someone whom he will recognize by his way of life, or by 
his head (the special Hopi haircut) or by the shape of 
his village and his dwellings. He is the only one who 
will purify US. 

The Purifier, commanded by the Red Symbol, with 
the help of the Sun and the Meha, will weed out the 
wicked who have disturbed the way of life of the Hopi, 
the true way of life on Earth. The wicked will be 
beheaded and will speak no more. This will be the 
Purification for all righteous people, the Earth, and all 
living things on Earth. The ills of the earth will be cured. 
Mother Earth will bloom again and all people will unite 
into peace and harmony for a long time to come. 

But if this does not materialize, the Hopi traditional 
identity will vanish due to pressure from Bahanna. 
Through the whiteman's influence, his religions, and the 
disappearance of our sacred land, the Hopi will be 
doomed. This is the Universal Plan, speaking through 
the Great Spirit since the dawn of time. 

With this in mind, I a6 a Hopi do not make wars 
against any country, because if I do, the Purifier will find 
out and punish me for fighting. And since J am Hopi, I am 
not sending my children across the ocean to fight. If they 
want to that' 6 up to them, but they will no longer be Hopi 
if they do. 

Since I am Sun Clan, and the Sun is the father of all 
living things, I love my children. If they realize what I 
am talking about they must help me save this world. 

The Hopi have been placed on this side of the Earth 
to take care of the land through their ceremonial duties, 
just as other races of people have been placed elsewhere 
around the Earth to take care of Her in their own ways. 
Together, we hold the world in balance, revolving 
properly. If the Hopi nation vanishes, the motion of the 
Earth will become eccentric, the water will swallow the 
land, the people will perish, and the ants will inherit 
the Earth. Only a brother and a sister may be left to start 
a new life. 


Bahanna came with great ambition and generosity, 
eagerly offering his hand to help 'improve' our way of 
life, establishing schools to teach us the 'better ways' of 
his life. He offered US his medicine and health practices, 
saying that this would help us live longer. He offered to 
help us mark our boundary, claiming that in that way we 
would have more land. In all the villages we rejected his 
offer. He tried many ways to induce us, but failed to make 
us submit to his wishes, for we were all one unity at that 
time, believer6 in the instructions of Maasauu. 

His next attempt was fear. He formed a police force 
consisting partly of certain people who had been tempted 
by his offers and given weapons. He threatened to arrest 
us and put us in prison, but we still stood firm. The threats 
of arrest and imprisonment were put into action. 
Villagers panicked and weaker people began to submit. 
In Oraibi, our village leadership fell when Lololma 
(Bear Clan) made an agreement with the United States 

We who still had faith in Maasauu, including the 
main priests of the religious orders, gathered together, 
rejecting the Kikmongwi's request to submit. We sat down 
together and smoked and prayed that we would be brave 
enough to take our stand. We took out our stone tablet and 
studied it in every detail. We carefully reviewed the 
road plan written on the rock near our village. This is the 
plan we must always follow, for it is in order and 
complete. We recognized that the Fire Clan (meaning my 
father) Yukioma niust lead, for his symbol, Maasauu, 
stands to the right of the reed as he faces out. 6 We also 
interpreted that since our way of life had been corrupted 
we must move to a new place where we would be able to 
follow the road without interference and continue our 
ceremonial duties for all beings. 

We smoked and prayed again and reconsidered that 
this village, Oraibi, is our mother village. All our sacred 
shrines are rooted here and must not be left unattended. 
We knew that the road would be hard with many 
obstacles. We knew that we would still be troubled by 

6 This refers to the 'Life Plan Petroglyph". See page 5. 


the newcomer, and that we must still face all the tests of 
weakness, so we agreed to stay. 

The trouble commenced its course. The Government 
wanted all of the Hopi children to be put into schools. 
They said it would do us good, but we knew that this 
'good' would only be on the surface, and that what was 
under it would destroy the Hopi cultural life. Maybe 
they thought that with an education the children might 
be able to help the old people, but we knew this would not 
be so, because they would learn to think as white men, so 
they would never help the old people. Instead they 
would be indoctrinated and encouraged to turn against us, 
as they are actually doing today. So in order to be good 
according ta the Great Spirits instructions we refused to 
put our children into the schools. 

So almost every week they would send policemen, 
many of them. They would surround the village and hunt 
for the children of school age. We could not be happy 
because we were expecting trouble every day. Fathers 
who refused to cooperate were arrested and imprisoned. 
Inhuman acts were imposed upon us: starvation, insults 
and humiliation to force us into submission. Still, over 
half of the clan leaders and religious society leaders 
refused to accept anything from the Government Because 
of this we were mocked and treated as outcasts by those 
who had already submitted. Finally they decided to do 
something about us because we were keeping them from 
getting certain favors from the Government 

This was when Lololma's successor, Tawaquaptewa, 
became, chief of Oraibi. It was under his leadership that 
the sad event, the eviction of the faithful Hopi from 
Oraibi, was touched off. Since we 'Hostiles,' as we were 
called by the missionaries and Government workers, 
refused to follow his wishes and accept the White man's 
way of life, he decided to evict us bodily. He figured 
that without our interference he would be able to take 
advantage of the good things offered by Bahanna. 


On September 7,1906, his followers, commanded by 
Chief Tewaquaptewa himself, entered the house where 
we were discussing prophecies and threw us out We did 
not resist until rifles and other weapons were shown and 
they began beating us. Then we resisted only to the extent 
of defending ourselves from injury. I was "killed," and 
bleeding, my blood flowed into Mother Earth, a prophetic 
sign that the Purifier was coming in seven days and that 
we should move out of Oraibi. When I came back to life, 
all my people were gathered to go. My father, Yukioma, 
was selected to be the leader. The women and children, 
with a few belongings on their backs, a little food, and no 
shoes, were prepared to leave. Some tried to go back to 
their houses to get their valuables and some extra food, 
but they were turned back. (In 'Book of the Hopi' it is 
said we were allowed to go back and get some belongings, 
but this is not true. That book is not accurate.) After we 
had left we learned that our houses had been looted and 

that horses had been turned loose in our fields and had 
eaten our crops, which were just ready for harvest. 
Thus we had to migrate once again to find a new 
home, leaving behind a corrupt world of confusion. We 
sought to start a new life, carry on our ceremonial cycles, 
and preserve our way of life without interference, but now 
we know that this was a dead dream, for the interference 
has continued right up to the present day. 


The village of Hotvela was settled for one purpose, to 
stand firmly on the Great Spirifs instructions and fulfill 
the prophecies to the end. It was established by good 
people, one-hearted people who were actually living 
these instructions. Water was plentiful, and so was wood, 
from which we built temporary shelters in which we 
were to survive the cold winter with very few blankets. 
Food was scarce, but we managed to live from the land by 
hunting game and picking greens. We were united into 
oneness, but it would again be split into two due to extreme 
pressure from the outside. 


Hardly had our footprints faded away in Oraibi, 
when early one morning we found ourselves surrounded by 
Government troops. All the people, including the 
children, were ordered to march six miles to a place below 
Oraibi. From there all the men were marched over forty 
miles to the U.S. Government agency at Keams Canyon, 
where they were imprisoned for about a year and one half 
for not accepting the generous offer of education for our 
children, among other things. 

The first thing they ordered us to do was to sign 
papers. We refused. Then they locked us inside a 
building without food and with very little water for 
several days until we were very hungry. Again they tried 
to induce us to sign papers, promising to feed us and let us 
go, but again we refused. They tried other tricks to make 
us sign, but each time we refused. Finally they took us to 
a blacksmith shop, where they riveted chains to our legs 
with loops and hooks, and fastened us together in pairs. 
In this way we were forced to work on a road gang for long 
periods working dangerously with dynamite on the steep 
rocky cliffs near the agency. That road is now the 
foundation of a highway still in use today. 

At night we were fastened together in groups of six by 
means of long chains. To add to our torture, soap was 
added to our food, which made us very sick When one 
man had to go to the outhouse all six had to go. All this 
time the possibility of signing certain papers was left 
open to those who might weaken. During this period my 
father, Yukioma, was being held somewhere else, so I was 
acting as leader. 

While we were in prison, only the women and 
children, and maybe a few old men, were left out here. 
They had very little food, but as if by a miracle, there 
happened to be a lot of rabbits and other wild game, so on 


that meat diet they were able to survive the hard winter. 
It was very hard while the men were away. The old 
people used to talk about it. The women had to gather 
the wood themselves. My mother used to tell me how 
they would form hunting parties and get the dogs to help. 
We had a small flock of sheep which they tended while 
we were away. During the growing season they planted 
the crops, took care of the fields, and did all the work 
that the men would normally do, in order to survive. 


During this period a group under the leadership of 
Kawonumptewa (Sand Clan), fearing even worse pressure 
from the government, returned to Oraibi to follow 
Tewaquaptewa and accept the white man's way, but they 
were rejected and driven out. They settled about two miles 
from Hotvela, where they founded the village of Bacobi. 
Unable to make out independently, they asked the 
government agency for help. The agency happily obliged 
with such things as housing materials. Now they almost 
entirely accept the white man's way, along with his 
religion. According to the Great Spirit's law they are now 
landless. Their only assets are their dwellings. But it is 
through them that the agency obtained token permission 
to build a school on Hotvela land, and with the agency's 
backing they have committed land grabs against the 
Hotvela people. It is also through them that the 
government has built a water tower on Hotvela land, 
which supplies running water to the school and to Bacobi 
village, while depleting the natural water supply of the 
Hotvela people. Most of the people in Hotvela refuse to 
use the water from this tower. Much of the trouble caused 
by the Bacobi people still exists today. I can recall much 
more that I hope will come to light. 

At the present time we face the danger that we might 
lose our land entirely. Through the influence of the 
United States government, some people of Hopi ancestry 
have organized what they call the Hopi Tribal Council, 
patterned according to a plan devised by the government, 
for the purpose of negotiating directly with the 
government and with private businesses. They claim to 
act in the interests of the Hopi people, despite the fact 
that they ignore the existing traditional leaders, and 
represent only a small minority of the People of Hopi 
blood. Large areas of our land have been leased, and this 
group is now accepting compensation from the Indian 
Claims Commission for the use of 44,000,000 acres of Hopi 
land. We have protested all these moves, but to no avail. 

Now this Tribal Council was formed illegally, even 
according to white man's laws. We traditional leaders 
have disapproved and protested form the start. In spite 
of this they have been organized and recognized by the 
United States government for the purpose of disguising its 
wrong-doings to the outside world. We do not have 
representatives in this organization, nor are we legally 
subject to their regulations and programs. We Hopi are an 
independent sovereign nation, by the law of the Great 
Spirit, but the United States government does not want to 

recognize the aboriginal leaders of this land. Instead, he 
recognizes only what he himself has created out of 
today's children in order to carry out his scheme to claim 
all of our land. 

Because of this, we now face the great&t threat of 
all, the actual loss of our cornfields and gardens, our 
animals and wild game, and our natural water supply, 
which would put an end to the Hopi way of life. At the 
urging of the Department of the Interior of the United 
States, the Tribal Council has Signed several leases with 
an outside private enterprise, the Peabody Coal 
Company, allowing them to explore our land for coal 
deposits, and to strip-mine the sacred mesas, selling the 
coal to several large power plants. This is part of a project 
intended to bring heavy industry into our area against our 
wishes. We know that this will pollute the fields and 
grazing lands and drive out the wildlife. Great quantities 
of water will be pumped from beneath our desert land and 
used to push coal through a pipe to a power plant in 
another state (Nevada). The loss of this water will 
affect our farms as well as the grazing areas of the 
animals. It also threatens our sacred springs, our only 
natural source of water, which we have depended upon 
for centuries. 

We Hopi knew all this would come about, because 
this is the Universal Plan. It was planned by the Great 
Spirit and the Creator that when the white man came he 
would offer us many things. If we were to accept those 
offers from his government, that would be the doom of the 
Hopi nation. Hopi is the bloodline of this continent, as 
others are the bloodline of other continents. So if Hopi is 
doomed, the whole world will be destroyed. This we 
know, because this same thing happened in the other 
world. So if we want to survive, we should go back to the 
way we lived in the beginning, the peaceful way, and 
accept everything the Creator has provided for us to 

White man's laws are many, but mine is one. White 
man's laws are all stacked up. So many people have made 
the rules, and many of them are made every day. But my 
law is only the Creator's, just one. And no man-made law 
must I follow, because it is ever-changing, and will doom 
my people. 

We know that when the time comes, the Hopi will be 
reduced to maybe one person, two person, three persons. If 
he can withstand the pressure from the people who are 
against the tradition, the world might survive from 
destruction We are at the stage where I must stand alone, 
free from impure elements. I must continue to lead my 
people on the road the Great Spirit made for us to travel. 
I do not disregard anyone. All who are faithful and 
confident in the Great Spirit&way are at liberty to 
follow the same road. We will meet many obstacles along 
the way. The peaceful way of life can be accomplished 
only by people with strong courage, and by the 
purification of all living things. Mother Earths ills must 

As we say, the Hopi are the first people created. 
They must cure the ills of their own bloodline so 


everything will become peaceful naturally, by the will of 
the Creator. He will cure the world. But right now Hopi 
is being hurt To us this is a sign that the world is in 
trouble. All over the world the confused people have been 
fighting, and it will get worse. It is only purification of 
the Hopi that will settle the problems here on this 
Earth. We didn't suffer all this hardship and 
punishment for nothing. We live by these prophecies and 
teachings, and no matter what happens, we will not 
buckle down under any pressure from anybody. 

We know certain people are commissioned to bring 
about the Purification. It is the Universal Plan from the 
beginning of creation, and we are looking up to them to 
bring purification to us. It is in the rock writings 
throughout the world, on different continents. We will 
come together if people all over the world know about it 
So we urge you to spread this word around so people will 
know about it and the appointed ones will hurry up with 
their task, to purify the Hopi and get rid of those who 
are hindering our way of life. 

I have spoken. I wish this message to travel to all 
comers of this land and across the great waters, where 
people of understanding may consider these words of 
wisdom and knowledge. This I want For people may 
have different opinions about some things, but because of 
the nature of the beliefs upon which this Hopi life is 
based, I expect that at least one will agree, maybe even 
two. If three agree it will be worth manyfold. 

I am forever looking and praying eastward to the 
rising sun for my true white brother to come and purify the 

Hopi. My father, Yukioma, used to tell me that I would 
be the one to take over as leader at this time, because I 
belong to the Sun Clan the father of all the people on the 
Earth. I was told that I must not give in, because I am the 
first. The Sun is the father of all living things from the 
first creation. And if I am done, the Sun Clan then there 
will be no living thing left on the Earth. So I have stood 
fast. I hope you will understand what I am trying to tell 

I am the Sun, the father. With my warmth all things 
are created. You are my children and I am very concerned 
about you. I hold you to protect you from harm, but my 
heart is sad to see you leaving my protecting arms and 
destroying yourselves. From the breast of your mother, 
the Earth, you receive your nourishment, but she is too 
dangerously ill to give you pure food. What will it be? 
Will you lift your father's heart? Will you cure your 
mother's ills? Or will you forsake us and leave us with 
sadness to be weathered away? I don't want this world to 
be destroyed. If this world is saved, you all will be saved 
and whoever has stood fast will complete this plan with 
us, so that we will all be happy in the Peaceful Way. 

People everywhere must give Hopi their most serious 
consideration, our prophecies, our teachings, and our 
ceremonial duties, for if Hopi fails, it will trigger the 
destruction of the world and all mankind. I have spoken 
through the mouth of the Creator. May the Great Spirit 
guide you on the right path. 


Excerpt from The Book of the Hopi 

An early version of Hopi Prophecy can be found in The Book of the Hopi (1963) by Frank Waters. 
Sentiment about The Book of the Hopi is mixed at best in the village of Hotevilla, the last bastion 
of Traditional Hopi people. Perhaps this is because there were only a few Traditionals from 
Hotevilla among the 30 Elders who provided material to Waters. The rest were mostly from 
Oraibi, where "Progressives" violently drove out the Traditionals" in 1906 (see Grandfather Dan 
Katchongva's account on page 19). Grandfather Katchongva, who was among Waters' sources, 
later denounced The Book of fhe Hopi, saying 'That book is not accurate." One specific criticism 
was the account of the driving out of traditionals from Oraibi which suggests they were allowed to 
go back into their homes to gather belongings. Many of the Hotevilla traditionals have stated this 
is not true. If you read The Book of theHopi, I recommend also reading Pumpkin Seed Point, 
Waters' account of the extraordinary circumstances which surrounded the research for The Book 
of the Hopi, including some fascinating material about Waters' early interaction with Katchongva. 

Nonetheless the book does contain a rich collection of material, including a version of a prophecy 
concerning the "Blue Star Kachina" and the Purification it will herald. Interestingly, when I asked 
Hotevilla traditionals about this prophecy, they were unaware of it, and said they thought it 
represented a misunderstanding of the Blue Star Kachina. It may be useful to recall that the Hopi 
split up their prophecies among the various Kivas (ceremonial chambers, also referring to a 
religious societies) and kept them secret for hundreds of years. They only compared their 
prophecies in 1949. For whatever it is worth, here is the version of Hopi Prophecy given in The 
Book of the Hovi: 


The end of all Hopi ceremonialism will come when a 
kachina removes his mask during a dance in the plaza 
before uninitiated children. For a while there will be no 
more ceremonies, no more faith. Then Oraibi will be 
rejuvenated with its faith and ceremonies, marking the 
start of a new cycle of Hopi Life. 

World War III will be started by those peoples who first 
received the light [the divine wisdom or intelligence] in 
the other old countries [India, China, Egypt, Palestine, 

The United States will be destroyed, land and people, by 
atomic bombs and radioactivity. Only the Hopis and 
their homeland will be preserved as an oasis to which 
refugees will flee. Bomb shelters are a fallacy. "It is 
only materialistic people who seek to make shelters. 
Those who are at peace in their hearts already are in the 
great shelter of life. There is no shelter for evil. Those 
who take no part in the making of world division by 
ideology are ready to resume life in another world, be 
they of the Black, White, Red, or Yellow race. They are 
all one, brothers." 

The war will be "a spiritual conflict with material 
matters. Material matters will be destroyed by spiritual 
beings who will remain to create one world and one nation 
under one power, that of the Creator." 

That time is not far off. It will come when the 
Saquasohuh [Blue Star] Kachina dances in the plaza. He 
represents a blue star, far off and yet invisible, which 
will make its appearance soon. The time is also foretold 
by a song sung during the WiSwuchim ceremony. It was 
sung in 1914 just before World War I, and again in 1940 
before World War II, describing the disunity, corruption, 
and hatred contaminating Hopi rituals, which were 
followed by the same evils spreading over the world. 
This same song was sung in 1961 during the Wiiwuchim 

The Emergence to the future Fifth World has begun. It is 
being made by the humble people of little nations, tribes, 
and racial minorities. "You can read this in the earth 
itself. Plant forms from previous worlds are beginning to 
spring up as seeds. This could start a new study of botany 
if people were wise enough to read them. The same kinds 
of seeds are being planted in the sky as stars. The same 
kinds of seeds are being planted in our hearts. All these 
are the same, depending how you look at them. That is 
what makes the Emergence to the next; Fifth World. 

These comprise the nine most important prophecies of 
the Hopis, connected with the creation of the nine worlds: 
the three previous worlds on which we have lived, the 
present Fourth World, the future three worlds we have 
yet to experience, and the worlds of Taiowa, the Creator, 
and his nephew, Sotuknang." 


Excerpts from the Hopi Newsletter Techqua Ikachi 

The following prophecies are extracted from the newsletter Techqua Ikachi ("Land and Life") 
which was published clandestinely by the traditional elders of Hotevilla 45 times between 1975 and 
1986. The newsletters were produced primarily for Hopis themselves; the traditional elders hoped 
they could interest a new generation of westernized Hopi children in the traditions of their people. 
The newsletters, which are a rich source of a wide variety of information, are reprinted in no 
discernible order in Hotevilla: H opi Shrine of the Covenant, Microcosm of the World, 1995, 
Thomas Mails and Dan Evehema, Marlow & Company. The prophecies from these newsletters 
have been extracted and reproduced in another book by Mails: The Hopi Survival Kit, 1997, 
Penguin Arkana. (While Hopi traditionals endorse Hotevilla, they did not authorize The Hopi 
Survival Kit and say it is inaccurate.) Electronic versions of Techqua Ikachi newsletters (complete 
with the original masthead and pictures) can be found on the internet at: 
http: / / www.hinduismtoday. ashram/ Resources/ Hopi/ techqua Jkachi. html 


The beginning of Human history has always been a 
disputed question. So it has been with the origin of the 
Hopi. It is a question we need not dispute, for it might 
bring confusion, knowing that other cultures are closely 
related to what our ancient fathers passed down to us long 

We believe their testimonies are clearly explained, for 
their knowledge and wisdom describes the origin of time, 
a time when man made his first mistake in the previous 
worlds. We look upon our ancient teachings as a guideline 
used in order to avoid a downfall for our mistakes. We 
have learned that through our conduct we can accomplish 
good and bad deeds. The old ones say that we have gone 
through at least three world catastrophes and each 
world was destroyed by the same error in man. 

Suppose a catastrophe happened today or tomorrow, 
what would you do or say? 

The story we are about to tell may only be a legendary 
tale, but one does not have to look very far to find that 
this story is real. In the past our ancient ones lived at a 
time when people were at a highly civilized stage, greed 
and corruption were at their peak of controlling the so- 
called "lesser grade of man." Leaders and priests were 
branded with a disgusting evil, it was a time when 
people disregarded the Great Laws. People did as they 
pleased, they ignored the advice of their leaders. This 
was a time of sorrow and frustration, for the leaders 
loved and cared for the people as children. They warned 
them of the danger and tried many times to guide them on 
to the right road and repent. There were many violent 
signs in the sky and earth given by nature. This was 
ignored with laughter and answered that these things 
were only seen by lunatics who wanted to create an 
obstacle of fear for those seeking pleasure and wealth. 

Immorality and the greed for material gain continued to 
flourish, disrupting life for those who wished to live in 
peace according to the laws of the Creator. 

The Great Spirit had been watching the hearts of all 
Humans. Failed by His warning to the people, He too 
was frustrated, sad, and felt betrayed, for His laws and 
instructions had been forsaken. It hurt Him to think that 
His own creation had turned against Him. He called 
together His servants of God, the controllers of the Earth 
and Universe. "What will it be?" cried the Creator 
sadly. "My children on Earth have betrayed the sacred 
vows they made with us. They now live beyond all 
bounds, ignoring all advice from their leader to correct 
themselves and get on the rightful path." The Gods were 
grieved, their hearts filled with sorrow and compassion 
for the wickedness of man but they could only admit to 
the wrongs committed by the people. 

The time has come! We will punish them and m-people 
the Earth with Humans of good hearts!" They cried and 
cried. The Great Judgment began the sky darkened the 
great wind began to howl, birds and animals were first to 
sense the danger of truth. All creatures fled in search of 
refuge, to the mountains and even to the cities. The 
people laughed in wonder at the strange behavior of the 
animals. The Earth and sky grew darker, the wind grew 
stronger and the God of lightning lit the sky, sounding a 
loud thunder call. The twin warrior Gods at each of the 
Earths axis released the great water serpents, and 
cracked the Earth releasing the fires beneath the crust. 
Lightning, thunder, wind, and hail struck the people, and 
in awe they watched the stoneof their houses and great 
temples crumble, falling on top of them. People panicked 
through the ruined streets, some ran to the priests, 
begging, "Oh, great ones-please help save us, we will 


"We have warned you many times," they replied loudly, 
"Nothing can be done now, the time has come for you to 
depart, but you all deserve one last thing: take your 
riches and your wealth and go down!" 

The scenes of the catastrophe were full of a frightening 
terror. The streets were strewn with ruin, corpses killed 
by falling debris or fear. It was not over-Nature opened 
up with its full force and the Earth swallowed 
everything in its wake. 

The catastrophe ended. The Creator's plan had been 
fulfilled. Spider-Woman, God of Wisdom and 
Knowledge, had withdrawn all her power. Those still 
alive had lost all reasoning and senselessly crept on all 
fours over hills and valleys. Some stumbled into cracks in 
the Earth, though still alive, their spirit was dead. 
They attacked each other and ate each other like 
animals. After many moons the water cooled and 
reseeded the Earth. The brightness returned and the 
Earth was m-peopled with righteous ones who were 
saved for the purpose of carrying on the Creator's plan, 

This story is a glimpse into the past. The future? What 
do you think? Do you want to be banished from the Earth, 
by the same patterns as our ancient ones? We hope not, but 
we are now at that time period related.. .maybe there is a 
way of correcting our faults. There must be a way!!! 

The time will come when from the earth will arise a 
mystic fog which will dilute the minds and hearts of all 
people. Their guidelines of wisdom and knowledge will 
falter, the Great Laws of our Creator will dissolve in the 
minds of people. Children will be out of control and will 
no longer obey the leaders, immorality and the 
competitive war of greed will flourish. 

When the end is near, we will see a halo of mist around 
the heavenly bodies, Four times it will appear around 
the sun as a warning that we must reform, telling us that 
people of all colors must unite and arise for survival, and 
that we must uncover the causes of our dilemmas. Unless 
man made weapons are used to strike first, peace will 
then come. 

So the time will come when we-will experience late 
springs and sarly frosts, this will be the sign of the 
returning Ice Age. 

Today, once again, the world is facing a new crisis. This is 
a war of retaliation against terrorism. A war to save the 
innocent and to punish the guilty. But who is innocent and 
who is guilty? Well, this depends on how you look at it. 
Life would be good if all men were innocent. Let us focus on 
minorities and figure who is guilty. Minorities such as the 

Native people of both North and South America and 
elsewhere. We believe militarism is born out of injustice, 
poverty and ignorance where absolute governments refuse 
to hear the grievances of minorities or to help, in resolving 
problems. So the people resort to violence, "demonstrations 
and even terrorism or other recourse when they see no 
other way to be heard. What can we do when our world 
leaders and the people are acting like fools in attempts to 
solve the problems confronting us. Once again we will 
quote the prophecy of our elders. We hope it will interest 
you so that you will be more aware of it as it has been 
happening for some time. 

According to prophecy, the day will come when people in 
high places will be hunted, and vice-versa, the lowly 
hunters will be hunted. This will get out of control. The 
hunting will gather strength and spread far and wide. 
This situation might even erupt on our land. Finally, this 
will lead us to the Biblical version of Armageddon (the 
Hopi version is closely related). A final decisive battle 
between good and evil. This will occur under one God or 
Chief. They dare say (the prophets) we will speak one 
language and that this will happen in Hopiland, in the 
village of Oraibi. This will be where the new life plan 
will be drawn, in the pattern and cycle of religion. Here 
also a final decision will be made for the wicked. They 
will be beheaded and speak no more. If this does not 
materialize there will be a total destruction through the 
acts of man or nature. Then new life will begin from a girl 
and a boy. This is a frightening prophecy and will not be 
supported by many. 

It is in the prophecies of the Hopi that in a case like this 
the Navajo may help our cause. Also the Bahannas or the 
Paiute Tribe may help. We doubt that the U.S. 
Government will easily concede our sovereignty. If 
possible both Hopi and Navajo traditional would like 
separation from those who want to be assimilated. Both 
tribes could thereby retain their identity and lay the 
foundation for a self respecting community. 

There are two water serpents, one at each pole with a 
warrior sitting on his head and tail. These command 
nature to warn us by her activities that time is getting 
short and we must correct ourselves. If we refuse to heed 
these warnings, the warriors will let go of the serpents, 
they will rise up, and all will perish. 

We are much concerned about the climate, fsfo one seems to 
be able to predict the weather/accurately from day to 
day. However, we know according to our time markers 
that it is past due for certain seeds to be planted at their 
proper time. This spring we are reluctant to plant due to 
the late snow and cold weather. Once more maybe our 
ancient prophecy is right, that one day we will plant 
wearing finger sacks (gloves) clearing away snow with 
our feet before planting. The summers will become shorter 


for maturing the corn for harvesting. The result is 
anybody's guess 

The question is, will this occur the world over?? This 
would depend on the geographical areas. In the regions 
with different climates, things will happen in different 
ways. For instance, tropical land could become a land of 
ice, and the Arctic region could become Tropical. This may 
occur during a pole shift according to Bahannas concept 
But this need not happen if we, the people, get our 
leaders to do something about the harmful things being 
done to the environment 

It is said that if the future generations find out through 
records that we did nothing to preserve the good ways, 
they will pull and box our ears, and even throw us from 
our houses into the streets. This suffering will be of our 
own making. The lack of peace in our own spiritual being 
could trigger the revolution. 

Our White brother might come and find we have forsaken 
the sacred laws and instructions. Then he will whip us 
with our mercy. Either this, or nature herself will take 

Let us take a look into the future through the eyes of our 
prophets. They say that along the way, the 
industrialized world will have certain problems. 
Throughout the world people will be uncomfortable 
because of the changing times. The worldly woes people 
will be going through. People will have to make 
adjustments to fin themselves into new life styles and 

Industrialized nations will become careless in getting 
more of the resources they need out of the earth, oil, coal, 
etc.... Believing all these things will last forever. Soon 
natural resources will be depleted. Fuel shortages will 
occur, industrial machinery will come to a standstill. The 
machinery used for planting harvesting and transport 
will become useless. Supermarket shelves will become 
empty of farm produce. The farmers and those who grow 
their own food will not sell their produce. Money will 
become worthless. The white man (Bahanna) with all 
his intelligence and technology will not be able to repair 
the damage. 

Now let us review our knowledge briefly, the centuries 
old prophecies which warn us what would happen when 
we forget the principles of right and wrong in our 
behavior. We will see extraordinary events in Nature 
and Earth, including mankind: Modem man looks upon old 
wisdom and knowledge as dead, useless and no longer 

Modernman depends on the money system and no longer on 
Mother Earth for food. According to prophecy when this 
happens Mother Earth will hide the nourishment which 

she provides because of the view that ancient food is poor 
man's food. When all food disappears modem man will 
try to correct his mistake, the conditions he caused upon 
the earth through his inventions. He will try to achieve 
some kind of method to heal the wound, but this will not 
be possible when we reach the point of no return. 

Only through peace the survival of mankind and our 
planet Earth is possible. Only if we, the human race, are 
willing to change. The Hopi play a key roll in the 
survival of the human race through their vital 
communion with the unseen forces that hold nature in 
balance, as an example of a practical alternative to the 
suicidal man-made system, and as a fulcrum of world 
events. The pattern is simple. The whole world will 
shake and turn red and turn against those who are 
hindering the HOPI." 

This prophecy related to the Biblical version of which 
may yet come to pass. This prophecy goes on to say that 
the time will come when common people will become 
concerned and frustrated because they no longer can live 
with their hectic world. They will be particularly 
against the bloodthirsty policies and the deceitfulness of 
the world leaders. The unrest will be world wide as they 
foresee that the hope of living in peace has become 
hopeless. The world over the common man will band 
together to fight for world peace. They will realize that 
their leaders have failed in accomplishing peace. People 
in high places will be hunted down like animals, perhaps 
through terrorism. In turn leaders will retaliate and begin 
hunting each other. This condition will gather strength 
and spread far and wide. It will get out of control the 
world over. Revolution could erupt on our land. 

The liberators will come in from the west with great 
force. They will drop down from the sky like rain. They 
will have no mercy. We must not get on the house tops to 
watch. They will shake us by our ears, like children who 
have been bad. This will be the final decisive battle 
between good and evil. This battle will cleanse the heart 
of people and restore our mother earth from illness and 
the wicked will be gotten rid of. 

The prophets dare say a peaceful new world order will be 
drawn in Hopiland. The people will live under one God 
and leader. WE will speak one language, the Hopi. The 
earth will bloom again. 

If this fails to materialize our Great Creator through 
nature will do the task according to their plans. It could 
be total destruction in any form. Only a brother and sister 
will survive to begin a new way of life. This prophecy is 
frightening and doubtful. Perhaps it is of no value to most 


How can there be peace? Nowhere is there peace, not 
even within the Hopi peaceful society. Bahanna society, 
every nation on earth from people in high places down to 
the lowest cast are not at peace. How can peace be 
accomplished when weapons are made to kill??? How can 
there be peace if people hate, not love??? Perhaps the 
only alternative now is "Purification". 

The men with ambitious minds will decrease, while the 
people of good hearts, who live in harmony with the 
earth, will increase until the earth is rid of evil. If the 
Hopi are right this will be accomplished and the earth 
will bloom again. The spiritual door is open, why not join 
the righteous people. 

Since mankind has lost peace with one another through 
the conflict because of the new ways, the Great Spirit, 
and the Great Creator has punished the people in many 
ways. Through ail of this there was always a small group 
who survived to keep the original ways of life alive. 
This small group are those who adhere to the laws of the 
Creator, who keep the spiritual path open, out from the 
circle of evil. According to our knowledge we are not quite 
out of the circle. 

The Horny toad Woman gave Maasaw a promise that she 
would help him in time of need, saying she too had a 
metal helmet. After the Hopi have fulfilled their 
pattern of life, Maasaw will be the leader, but not before, 
for He is the first and He shall be the last. 

At time's end, a new age will appear. There will be a new 
dawn of time when the world wilt bloom into 



Statement by the Keeper of the Hopi Fire Clan Tablets at Santa Fe in 1990 

In 1990, the Traditional Hopi had not yet carried out their sacred duty of warning the nations of 
the world about Purification. The "House of Mica" (United Nations) had refused Hopi requests to 
address the General Assembly in 1949, 1962, and 1986. Traditional sentiment regarding the UN is 
summed up by these comments in a special newsletter published by the Traditional Elders of 
Hotevilla: "...In fact, as we looked on, the UN entered the Persian Gulf war, rather than following 
their supposedly neutral tradition of resolving problems in peaceful ways. Therefore we have 
come to the conclusion that world peace is becoming hopeless. We still have our instructions to 
follow when we get to the point where leaders begin to corrupt everyone they can, and when 
relying on our leaders becomes impossible and our trust in them dims. Then not only True Hopi, 
but other devoted peoples as well, will choose to follow and struggle for their rights under the law 
of out Great Creator. This is a law that never changes nor breaks down. How does this failure fit 
the prophetic pattern 1 Why would we be told to go there when we have achieved so little? It is 
because the principle of choice always prevails. The Creator and M aasa w give us opportunities to 
influence the course of the future. If we make wise choices, the future will be better. If they are 
unwise, they will be worse." 

In December of 1990, Martin Gashweseoma, carrier of the sacred stone tablets of the Fire Clan, 
brought the tablets to Santa Fe, New Mexico to meet with Gov. Elect Bruce King and to make a 
statement to the public. Following is a news article regarding his visit and then the text of the 
statement Grandfather Gashweseoma gave on Friday, December 14: 

December 16,1990 

Nature readying revenge, Hopi warn 

by Kay Bird The New Mexican Staff 

The signs are everywhere, the Hopi say: young men 
held hostage by the military to fight a war they want no 
part of; whales beaching themselves to beg mankind to 
clean the ocean; corrupt officials betraying the 
commandments of the Bible upon which they took their 
oaths of office. 

The signs, spoken of in tablets that serve the Hopi as 
a counterpart to the biblical Ten Commandments, warn 
that the end of this era is upon us. 

Martin Gashweseoma, an Elder of the Hopi tribe from 
Hotevilla, Ariz., brought the tablets dire message to 
Santa Fe last week, warning that if something is not done 
soon to prevent further natural and moral disaster, the 
Earth will cleanse itself of its pollutants - including the 

"If s time for all human beings to look at the things 
that have developed," Gashweseoma said through 
interpreter Thomas Banyacya during a gathering at the 
Eldorado hotel on Friday. "It is starting to get close to the 
last stages." 

The sacred stones are said to have been given to the 
Hopi people by Massau'u, the Great Spirit, when the 
Hopi people emerged from the underworld into the 
current world, which they consider to be Heaven. 

One of the dark brown, flat stones is about the size of 
an index card, the other about half that size. Both are 
about a quarter-inch thick and have symbols, lines and 
other figures scratched on them. 

Other people around the world also were given stones 
by Massau'u, Gashweseoma said; if they all come 
together, the world can begin moving toward purification. 

He said he does not know where the other stones are. 

The Hopi stand to benefit if the tablets' warning is 
heeded. As Gashweseoma and his companions see it, the 
more land that is returned to the Hopi, the better off 
mankind will be. 

Why? Because the tablets held by the Hopi are the 
closest thing to a deed from Mother Earth that any 
member of humankind can get to a deed from Mother 
Earth, Gashweseoma said. 

These tablets represent a title, an agreement with 
the Creator that gave them guardianship," said Tom 
Banyacya Jr., the interpreter's son. They're reasserting 
their authority to control that." 

"We're only caretakers of it." 

The tablets also contain the moral code that Hopi 
and all people are expected to live by, Banyacya Jr. said. 

The warnings come from the same spirit, he said. 

Gashweseoma carried the tablets, wrapped in a 
patterned cloth and tied to his waist, to Gov. elect Bruce 
King last week and asked for his help in repairing the 

Four appeals have been made, unsuccessfully, to the 
United Nations to improve the world, Gashweseoma 


"Following the fourth appeal, a last chance has been 
given to America and it involves the capital at Santa 
Fe," Gashweseoma wrote in a letter to King. 

The Elders brought their national appeal from 
Arizona to Santa Fe because of the special significance 
New Mexico's capital has to the Hopi people, 
Gashweseoma said, 

Santa Fe, founded by the Spanish in 1610, was the 
first European capital among the Indian people. 

Banyacya said that a historic tablet such as the ones 
that Gashweseoma carries might be found in Santa Fe. 

The tablets, said Gashweseoma, have instructed the 
Hopi people to watch for signs that the world is on a 
dangerous course. He said the-final stage will be 
identified by famine, sickness, earthquakes and other 
natural disasters, and, finally, the buildup of "powerful 
weapons "destructive to all mankind. 

Eventually, the tablets warned, a "gourd full of 
ashes" would-be invented and dropped from the sky, 
causing the oceans to boil and the land to burn 

That event; which Gashweseoma and others 
interpret to be the bombings of Hiroshima and Nagasaki, 
precedes the Day of Purification, which will result in 
"either total rebirth or total annihilation," the brochure 

Gashweseoma was not entirely pessimistic about 
mankind's chances. 

"Once they start the cleansing of the land, then a new 
life that we've had before will revive," he said. "We 
were living in a land called Heaven. We hope that will 
be reestablished." 

The Associated Press Contributed to this story. 

The Public Statement of Martin Gashweseoma, Keeper of the Hopi Fire Clan Tablets, during his 
Mission to the New Mexico State Capital at Santa Fe, December 14, 1990: 

I am the keeper of the sacred Fire Clan tablets of the 
Hopi at the village of Hotevilla. These tablets represent 
our ancient title to this land, which existed long before 
the arrival of Columbus, and has never been relinquished. 
They have been entrusted to me under the highest 
authority, to be held until the last stage of our prophecies 
has been completed. The signs that we have entered that 
final stage are now clear. 

In fulfillment of my spiritual instructions I have come 
to Santa Fe, the oldest European capital on our land, to 
offer the people of the United States of America, and all 
humanity, a final opportunity to collaborate with the 
forces of creation to purify our lives, and restore peace to 
the world. 

The root cause of the problems that threaten life on 
earth is the concept of land title acquired and maintained 
by force. Since modem civilization is based on this 
concept, it does not hold the key to peace. 

Our original Hopi land title is based on permission. 
We received that permission from Massau'u, the guardian 
of all land and life, who holds it in trust for the Creator. 
Thus it is implemented by the forces that create this 

Regardless of differences in culture and tradition, true 
aboriginal title throughout the world is based on a 
similar relationship. To usurp aboriginal title by 
deception and force, then build an empire upon that basis, 
is to oppose the forces of life, and ensure the eventual 
destruction of that empire. The United States of America 
has become such an empire. 

Before the White Man arrived from Europe, 
everything was in order. Our life was beautiful and clean. 
The land was green and there were plenty of flowers, 
animals, birds and trees, rain and clouds. We lived in 

great happiness because we followed the simple life 
taught to us by Massau'u. 

Massau'u is both a real person and a manifestation of 
the Creator. We met him in person near the place where 
we built our mother village of Oraibi, after a long 
migration to claim the land in his name. At that point he 
gave us permission to live here as caretakers, as well as 
the spiritual knowledge by which to keep the forces of 
life in balance. This knowledge is implanted in our sacred 
stone tablets. 

But when the Europeans came they forced their 
religion, culture and language upon our children, which 
brought great division among our people. As a result, 
today our young people are turning away from this basic 
law. They no longer understand it They only understand 
the White Man's law. 

Because they were forced into this situation, there is 
now hardly anyone fulfilling the sacred instructions and 
correctly performing the ceremonies essential to the Hopi 
way of life. There are still leaders from various clans 
who know of these instructions, which reveal their true 
purpose in life, but more and more they are turning away. 
This intrusion by outside forces, and the harmful effect on 
our function as caretakers of life, is the reason life on 
Earth is now so disturbed. 

Like the Hopi, original native peoples were placed 
across this continent, and given special instructions by a 
higher being. Each had special function? by whkh to 
hold life in balance, which they were still carrying out 
when the Europeans arrived. We know these foreigners 
once had similar spiritual means for promoting life, with 
which they were supposed to bless the native peoples. 
But they had apparently misused their power. Most of 
the native peoples were forcibly stripped of their culture, 
language and religious ceremonies, depriving them of 


their function as caretakers. Those that remain face 
imminent cultural extinction. Clearly these foreigners are 
not here to help, but. to destroy everything the original 
people have left, and in doing so, destroy this world. The 
only hope for humanity lies in restoring true land title, 
which is inseparable from our function as caretakers of 

For this reason we bring our sacred stone tablets to the 
New Mexico State Capital in Santa Fe. Because it is the 
first foreign capital on this land, there must be documents 
here that confirm the rights of the original native 
peoples, and possibly information regarding stone tablets 
such as those we brought with us. We want to see whether 
someone will search for such documents, proving whether 
the original title of the native peoples, including the 
Hopi, is still binding according to existing modern laws. 

The Spanish people must have documented something 
concerning the Hopi title. When the Mexican government 
took over, it must have left similar documents, and the 
same holds true for the United States. There must be a 
whole stack of such documents. If the entire stack were 
turned over the search should not take long. The first few 
should prove that the native peoples hold the true title 
to this land, and the knowledge by which it should be 

The role the, foreigners were to play in protecting this 
land should also be revealed. Documents must exist that 
show where the United States tuned against this 
original law. What document does the United States 
have that says it is supposed to protect this area? 

The Spanish, the Mexican, and the United States 
governments have all fought over someone else's land 
without consulting the original, native peoples living on 
it, then created some kind of document But what of the 
rights of the original native peoples? Who has the 
ability to look into this, and see that the basic rights of 
the Hopi and other native peoples are restored? 

This is the key to the problem that threatens all life 
on earth. If someone can uncover this information and 
bring it before the world, it might be possible to reverse 
the destruction of the native cultures that lies at the root 
of the devastation that now threatens our entire world. 

The great powers of the modem world need to realize 
that if they are to escape the punishment that lies 
ahead, what they are doing to native peoples around the 
world must be corrected. Those who accumulate power at 
the expense of the native peoples think they have a God- 
given right; but in doing so they are increasing the threat 
to all life. And although they now recognize that threat, 
they are powerless to reverse it by any means unless they 
stop preying upon the native peoples. 

We came here to plant the seed of this realization, 
which could turn the course of all humanity away from 
disaster. An investigation within the area of the present 
Hopi villages would benefit all indigenous peoples. 
Moreover, those who now live at the expense of the 
native land title would thus be given the chance to correct 
their mistake, and avert the terrible consequences 
foreseen long ago by the Hopi, which are already in 

evidence today. Either way, this would benefit all 

Because our true original land title is essential to our 
role in holding this land and life in balance, we have 
never compromised that title by signing a treaty with the 
United States Government. We have never given it 
authority to destroy our culture and take our land, nor 
have the other original native peoples. Yet this is being 
done here and throughout the world. 

Today the Hopi are forced to live under laws that 
come from Washington DC, such asthose that created the 
Bureau of Indian Affairs and the so-called 'Hopi Tribal 
Council' without consent from the real Traditional 
People. In violation of our spiritual teachings, these 
agencies have been promoting paved roads, water lines, 
sewers and government-financed housing. They have even 
forced such things into Hotevilla, the village we founded 
in 1906 in order to protect the Hopi Way from such 

They are cutting our land into small allotments, 
confiscating our livestock, and allowing the land to be 
stripped of its mineral resources. Underground water is 
being depleted and the land is drying up. Open pit 
uranium mines are polluting the area with radioactivity, 
causing the birth of many deformed babies. This shows 
what is happening to indigenous people around the 

Those who perpetrate such abuse, and the countless 
modem people who thrive from it, truly have no land 
title. They build their power through resources taken by 
force, then use those resources to gain power to take even 
more. Since they consider the true aboriginal title of 
indigenous peoples to be worthless, they treat us like 
animals to be kicked around. 

But as the Purification foretold in our tradition 
materializes, they too will get kicked around. They will 
find themselves disrespected everywhere, just as they 
have disrespected others, and their power will collapse. 
Soon they will see how little power and authority they 
really have. 

We hope they will heed our warning for their own 
sake, and for the sake of the native peoples who want 
nothing more than to rule themselves peacefully without 
being dictated to by anyone else. Part of the commission 
we received from the Creator through Massau'u is to 
sound this warning to the world. 

We Hopi know our true white brother is to come and 
help us. He has a stone tablet representing his own title 
and power within the Creator's plan. By placing it 
together with our Fire Clan tablet, he may call upon the 
natural forces to purify the world. If the task of 
purification is left to these natural forced, we may all be 
wiped out. So it is up to all people to purify themselves 

We have also known that if the wrong white brother 
should arrive, one who has lost his spiritual path and 
thus has no title, he would bring misery and destruction. 
But when the world problem becomes great enough this 


false white brother will find his survival threatened. 
Where will he turn? 

He proposes to save the world by converting everyone 
to what he calls 'democracy,' but can he even use it to 
save himself? We hear that democracy means rule by the 
people. Yet he has reached the point where only three 
people, the President, the Secretary of State, and the 
Secretary of Defense, can start a war against-any nation 
that doesn't submit to their wishes, regardless of the will 
of the people, Congress, or existing laws. 

We Hopi don't know what the word 'democracy' 
means. The 'Hopi Tribal Council' established by the 
United States is supposed to be a democracy, but in fact it 
is only an instrument through which our people are forced 
to submit to programs conceived in Washington. Offers of 
money, jobs, a better life, and so forth, really mean signing 
away control over their land and their life. 

Such false democracy is being extended throughout 
the world. In the name of democracy the U.S. Government 
is taking control of native lands, exploiting the mineral 
resources to produce great wealth, then using that wealth 
to bribe native peoples elsewhere into accepting contracts 
to deforest their land. 

The deployment of armies to protect the freedom of 
native peoples abroad is causing the loss of that very 
freedom. It is the task of the Hopi to warneveryone 
concerned that even in the name of freedom, this will 
unquestionably lead to a third world war much worse 
than the first two, which may leave hardly any life on 
earth. This is why our religion forbidsus to join the army, 
even if we are drafted. 

Today the American people are being taught how it 
feels to be held hostage. That is how we have felt, 
having been held hostage up to the present day. In truth, 
everyone in that army is held hostage by the 
Government. Young people who want to live a long life 
are forced to suffer in the Arabian desert. We know that 
they are about to be burnt up in a war if they don't stop. 
It's up to the President to recall the troops he has sent to 
the Middle East. They must all be allowed to refuse this 
fate and return home. It is especially urgent that all 
native people who have become involved come home 
right away. 

Current education of the Hopi into modem ways is a 
continuation of the policy of forced acculturation that 
began when our children were first kidnapped and forced 
into schools. The attempt to convert the schools so as to 
promote Hopi culture damages Hopi culture even further. 
Instead of dancing at the right time of year in the plaza, 
the Hopi children are taught to do their dances in school, 
outside the natural cycle, ignorant of their significance, 
and without the traditional preparation by the whole 

This disturbs the very harmony these dances meant to 
maintain. Prior to such interference, our community life 
was held together by the relationship between the 
religious societies, each composed of a careful balance of 
the special qualities of each clan, dancing together with 
the cycles of nature. The disruption of this pattern 

accounts for the epidemic of delinquency and crime we 
witness today. 

We know the Government would like to wash its 
hands of the schools, but instead of closing them it tries to 
put them into the hands of 'progressive' Hopis who have 
already lost their tradition. They should simply close 
the schools and let us return to our original methods of 
educating the young, which were already very advanced 
- the real education from which we were torn away. We 
have no need to learn from books. We have better 
methods by which children can learn how to live in 
peace, identify plants and animal tracks, and ultimately 
learn to keep the world in balance. 

If the schools are closed, then those families who 
want their children to learn the English language would 
have to move out, earn money, and pay for that education 
themselves. This is what Yukioma was standing for when 
he brought the sacred stone tablets of the Fire Clan with 
him in 1906, and led the founding of our village at 

There is a document by the Mennonite missionary, 
H.R. Voth, which testifies to the superior quality of 
education he witnessed among the Hoteviila children 
after the new village became established. They learn not 
only how to read the animal tracks, but many songs, 
dances, ceremonies and painting, all of which contribute 
to a very good memory, as well a solid understanding of 
the Way of Peace. 

The proof that this education really works is in the 
fact that we never needed jails, courts, police,' hospitals, 
or complicated systems of administration to keep things 
in check. There was hardly any sickness because we lived 
only from the food we grew organically, without 
chemicals. Any sickness that did occur could be healed 
with ceremonies and herbs. Even today there are old 
people so strong that when you try to follow them up a 
hill you can't catch up with them. 

Now, as our land is being gradually cut up by the 
government, this beautiful life is disappearing. The 
recent division of our land with the Navajos, which the 
United States enforces through its courts and police, is 
clearly a means to seize total control, even of that land 
supposedly granted to the Hopi. Those Hopis who are 
relocated onto new areas are only allowed to lease that 
land from the 'Hopi Tribal Council.' 

Only a few centuries ago there were no Navajos here. 
We were protected by the Paiute people to the north, who 
learned many words from our language. Later the Navajos 
arrived. Since they often survived by raiding, they 
became a problem to the Spanish and later to the 
American settlers. The Americans responded by rounding 
up all the Navajos under Kit Carson and putting them in 
prison. Later they gave them a portion of the Hopi 
homeland through the 1868 treaty. After it was learned 
that the land given to the Navajos contained valuable 
resources, instead of enforcing the treaty restriction that 
they remain there, the United States' just let them 
wander off, then created another reservation for them on 
land belonging to the Paiutes, and •moved the Paiutes out. 


When the Navajos expanded onto the Hopi area, rather 
than force them back onto the Paiute land the 
Government made still another reservation for them on 
the Hopi land. 

With the discovery of mineral resources in that area 
came the passage of Public Law 93-531, which was not 
requested by the true Hopi leaders, but promoted by 
lawyers through the 'Hopi Tribal Council,' creating the 
illusion before the world that the Hopi have traded 
certain areas of their land over to the Government, or' 
approved mineral leases. 

Public law 93-351 divides our land still further, by 
requiring both Hopi and Navajo families to be forcibly 
relocated, and the artificial Hopi-Navajo border fenced 
with barbed wire. Our Elders have long warned of the 
time when a line might be drawn around our feet, granting 
us no more land than that, which really means we would 
have no land at all. This time is not far off. 

We want everyone to know that the Navajos are not 
the ones taking our land, but the United States. The Hopi 
and the Navajo made peace long ago, and sealed their 
agreement spiritually with a medicine bundle. It is 
through the puppet governments, the Tribal Councils' 
forced upon both nations by the United States, that the 
illusion of a conflict has been created on the basis of the 
false modem concept of land title. 

This short history shows how our land has been taken 
away. Why is this happening? It is done through younger 
Hopis, robbed of their tradition through compulsory 
foreign education, and arbitrarily empowered to speak for 
their whole nation through the 'Hopi Tribal Council,' yet 

never consult with their original leaders. Would you 
allow your children to sign away your family possessions 
without even letting you know? That's exactly what the 
'Hopi Tribal Council' is doing. 

Land title based on such deceit and coercion is theft 
from the very forces that gave us life. Since most of 
modem civilization is based on such false entitlement, it 
can only destroy itself. The severe problems that face not 
only humanity, but every form of life on Earth, serve to 
warn that the time of destruction is at hand. 

We can no longer escape. We must trace this situation 
to its root cause. This is why I act now to call world 
attention to the true nature of aboriginal land title, 
which alone holds the key to world peace. Hopi land 
title is based on our agreement with the Creator, the true 
owner of the land, through our meeting with Massau'u, to 
serve as its caretakers. This requires genuine knowledge of 
the pattern through which people can live together in 
peace without relying on the use of force. This way of life 
can continue forever. 

So for the sake of the indigenous nations that remain 
with us today, and all people who are moved to correct 
their ways and restore that harmony which can enable 
life in this world to continue, I have come to Santa Fe, the 
first European capital established on our land, to urge 
that those documents that might reveal the true nature of 
our title to this land be investigated and revealed, and to 
place our knowledge of the Way of Peace at your service. 

We hope that what we are asking will be brought 
about soon, and that those who sincerely wish to resolve 
this great crisis will make use of our knowledge. 


Statement by Hopi Spiritual Leaders on August 7, 1994 

The following letter was posted on CompuServe in 1994, I don't know how it was delivered to the 
man who posted it (a Swiss named Rudi Schultheiss), but I believe the letter is authentic. Its 
message is consistent with others coming from the same Hopi Traditionals. Keep in mind that 
this letter was delivered after the Hopi had twice delivered their prophecies and warnings at the 
House of Mica (the UN). The elders said the representatives of the world governments "listened 
politely, then did nothing." The following letter was perhaps one more attempt by the Hopi 
Traditionals to deliver their message as instructed by Maasau. 

(The following H PI -message J or all mankind is written 
for CompuServe by Rudi Schultheiss, Switzerland, 

Forum: New Age 

Section: Community Square 

To: All 

Date: Sunday, August 07,1994 1:08:05 PM 

From: Schultheiss Rudi, 100343,552 > 

We are entering the last days. The Hopi Spiritual 
Leaders have spoken their urgent warning and message to 
the United Nations and around the world, yet there has 
been no response. 

The sacred lands of the Hopi are being desecrated by 
water and power lines. The bulldozers are on the land. 
Soon the Hopi will be unable to conduct their ceremonies. 
Listen to their words. Then respond. The leaders say it is 
our turn to act. 

The Government of the United States only recognizes the 
illegally elected tribunal council • These are not our 
leaders, this is not our way. We must be left alone and 
allowed to follow our original instructions without the 
interference of western ways. We must protect these 
sacred lands, these sacred ways. If these instructions are 
not followed, the Purification will begin. Already the 
signs of the days of Purification are beginning: For the 
sake of Mother earth and here children, for the sake of 
all your children and your children's children action is 
needed now. 

or Destruction. The more we turn awav from the 
Instructions of the Great Spirit, the m&e signs we see in 
the form of earthquakes, floods, drought, fires, tornadoes; 
along with wars and corruption. 

If we do not Correct and Change these things, we are all 
going to suffer, there is no way we will be able to help 
each other after this. The World problems, ind the 
Destruction of Mother Earth will be so terrible, there may 
be nothing left on this Earth. We do not want to see this 

We hope that by bringing these Warnings to the attention 
of the people of this land, and around the World, that we 
will understand the Seriousness of this moment, that we 
may be able to help one another, and to help bring about a 
better way of Life. 

-Hopi Traditional Leaders included: Dan Evehema, 
Martin Gashweseoma, Manuel Hoyungowa; assisted by 
spokesman Thomas Banyacya. 

Hopis' Ancient Knowledge and Prophecies are warning 
through many signs, that we have entered a dangerous 
period in our lives. Mankind must return to Peaceful ways, 
and halt the Destruction of Mother Earth, or are we going 
to destroy ourselves. All the Stages of Hopi prophecy 
have come to pass, except for the last, the purification. 
The intensity of this purification will depend of how 
humanity collaborates with Creation. 

We must Correct and Changes our ways, go back to the 
Spiritual ways, and take care of Mother Earth. If we do 
not; we are going to face terrible destruction by Nature, 
wars will come like powerful winds, bringing Purification 


Recent Hopi History: Preface to Hopi Elder Dan Evehema's Message To Mankind 

A visitor to Hopiland in the mid- 1800s would have found a culture which - despite 300 years of cruel Spanish 
interference - still conducted a largely intact ceremonial cycle. However, the actions by the United States 
government which was just beginning to assert itself in the affairs of the Hopi would prove to be a catastrophe 
of unimaginably greater scale. For the last 120 years, the traditional culture of the Hopi has been under almost 
constant assauDthe effect has been devastating: the number of Hopi living traditional lifestyles today is down 
to almost none. Many ceremonies can no longer be performed, due to a lack of initiated Hopi. The story of how 
this occurred is one of which no U.S. citizen can be proud. It is a story of cultural genocide. 

The information presented below may help you understand Grandfather Evehema's plea for help which follows 

(page 42). I have found that the tiny amount of information presented on Hopiland by the media does not, 

contain the point of view of the Traditional People. As you read the following, keep in mind the words of 
Grandfather Katchongva: 

"People everywhere must give Hopi their most serious consideration, our prophecies, our teachings, and 
our ceremonial duties, for if Hopi fails, it will trigger the destruction of the world and all mankind. I 
have spoken through the mouth of the Creator. May the Great Spirit guide you on the right path." 

Beginning in the late 1800s, and ending only in 1971 by an Executive Order of President Nixon, the U.S. 
government pursued a policy of "Forced Acculturation" in which Indian children of all tribes were forcibly taken 
from their families and sent to boarding schools sometimes thousands of miles from their homes. The schools I 
have seen are surrounded by tall fences with barbed wire and look and feel more like prison camps than schools 
of any kind. 

In these schools, often run by Evangelical Christian organizations under contract with the Federal Government, 
Indian children were forced to wear western clothing and speak only English. Children caught speakin g their 
own language were punished, usually beaten Their terrifying ordeal often began with the cutting off o i their 
hair, a brutal act of deep symbolic meaning in most Indian cultures. Grandfather Thomas Banyacya said the 
school he was sent to was conducted as a military school, with children beginning their days with a pledge of 
allegiance to the U.S. flag and by being marched to and from meals and classes. The children were often kept 
away from their families and communities for years, and missed all of the rituals and traditional teachings they 
would have experienced at home. (If you doubt this could be true, ask any middle-aged or older Native 
American -but only if you have a strong heart.) The children were taught that the ways of their people were 
"primitive," "shameful" or "idolatry." When they were returned to their communities after eight years or more, 
they found themselves strangers in their own land. The emotional and cultural damage caused by this policy is 
impossible to estimate. As a policy of assimilation, it has been gruesomely efficient: many of the traditional 
ways of life have been lost Even among the Hopi, only a small minority follow traditional lifestyles, 
Grandfather Evehema was one of the very last fully traditional Native Americans in the United States of whom 
I am aware. Native peoples in Canada and Australia were subject to the same assimilation policies. 

In Hopiland, children were sent to schools in Keams Canyon, Tuba City to the west, Phoenix, AZ, California 
and who knows where else. The Hopi initially refused to give up their children, but the Federal Government 
agents sent soldiers to take them forcefully. In a cynical ploy used again and again with many of the Native 
Nations, the U.S. employed members of the rival Navajo tribe as soldiers to capture the Hopis* children. Raids 
were staged after snowfall so soldiers could follow the tracks of children who had run to escape. The U.S. 
government used acts of violence and imprisonment of Hopis who refused to hand over their children to coerce 
cooperation with the will of the Federal Government. In 1895, 19 traditional Hopi men were sent to Alcatraz 
prison. Many others were held in Keams Canyon and Fort Wingate. Under this terrific pressure, a rift 
developed among the Hopi. More and more Hopi agreed to allow their children to be taken. These Hopi were 
termed the "Friendlies" by government agents at offices in Keams Canyon. The Hopis pho stubbornly kept 
their traditional ways and therefore kept the Hopi Covenant with the Creator were termed "Hostiles". 
Eventually evenTewaquaptewa, the Kikmongwi (traditional leader) of the mother village Oraibi, went over to 
the side of the "Friendlies". The tension grew until September 1906, when the "Friendlies" - led by 
Tewaquaptewa -violently forced the "Hostiles" out of Oraibi, with only the clothes on their back. The 
Traditionals, led by Yukioma (Grandfather Dan Katchongva' s father) established the village of Hotevilla, and 
dedicated it as the new shrine for the Hopi Covenant with the Creator. 


Despite the looming hardships of surviving the first winter without food or shelter, the greater trouble came from 
the U.S. government, whichhad not given up the aim of breaking Hopi resistance to the will of the U.S. 
Government. Yukioma and all of the Traditional heads of household were imprisoned at Keams Canyon. Some 
of them were then taken to Fort Wingate, and from there to Florence Penitentiary. Eleven of the younger men 
were sent t® the Carlisle boarding school. In Hotevilla, the women, children and very elderly were left to try to 
survive the harsh desert winter on their own. The men at Keams Canyon were freed about April the following 
year. The men at Florence were kept in prison for a year and a half, leaving their families on their awn for two 
winters. Yukioma was kept prisoner in Keams Canyon for most of the rest of his life for the crime of refusing to 
order his people to abandon their traditional ways. Yukioma' s son Dan Katchongva eventually became 
Kikmongwi and leader of the last remaining traditional Hopi. 

During the 1800s and early 1900s the Hopi were subjected to other brutalities, including several waves of 
deadly smallpox, several extraordinarily brutal debusing incidents in which soldiers stripped Hopi men and 
women and forced them into vats of sheep dip, several land "distribution" and "management" p fans, the 
destruction by government road builders of the beloved cliff-side shrine marking the place where Hopi ancestors 
met Maasau, various Mormon and Mennonite missionary activities, and many, many other horrifying incidents. 

In 1936, after passage in 1934 of the "Indian Reorganization Act", the BIA installed the "Hopi Tribal Council". 
BIA agents conducted an election in which only 755 of the approximately 4500 Hopis voted. Of those that 
voted, 651 were in favor of the provisions which would mean the end of the traditional system of government in 
which each village -headed by the Kikmongwi - was independent. The great majority of Hopi refused to take 
part in the election, seeing it as interference in the traditional system of self-government. (Many of the people 
who voted were not in fact Hopi but descendants of exiles from Pueblos along the Rio Grande in what is now 
New Mexico who fled Spanish reprisals for the Pueblo Revolt of the 1600s. The Hopi allowed them to settle in 
the eastern end of Hopiland.) Based on the results of the vote by a minority of the Hopi, the BIA installed a 
western-style democracy headed entirely by non-traditionals. The federal government has backed the Tribal 
Council ever since, including supplying it with the means and training to create a large paramilitary police force 
known as the Hopi Rangers. I have had the misfortune to see the Rangers in action several times. They are an 
extremely aggressive force which conducts an unrelenting campaign of harassment against the Traditional Hopi 
and Dineh peoples (Dineh, which is pronounced dee-neh', is the traditional name of the Navajo people.) 

In the late 1960s, the Hopi and Navajo Tribal Councils - under pressure from the BIA and US Department of 
the Interior - leased rights to the British Peabody Coal company to strip coal from a 65,000 acre track of land 
north of the villages of Hopi land. It was further agreed that Peabody could construct a slurry pipeline to the 
Mojave Power Plant in southern Nevada (which supplies power to Las Vegas) and pump vwm over a billion 
gallons of water per year out of the limited local aquifer in order to make the slurry. The government and 
Peabody Coal assured the Tribal Councils they would benefit from the proceeds from the sale of the coal. Strip 
mining began in 1970. The traditional leaders of the Hopi (the Kikmongwis) sent a letter to President Nixon 
that year protesting the action. (See page 45.) Almost immediately, Peabody - together with a consortium of 
energy companies, the BIA and U.S. Department of the Interior -began pushing for an expansiondf the mining 
rights into an area occupied by 10,000 Dineh who were living traditional lifestyles. 

On December 22, 1974, President Ford signed Public Law 93-531, the Hopi-Navajo Settlement Act. It was 
billed as an attempt to settle a dispute between the Hopi and Dineh in which the Hopi claimed that the more- 
numerous Dineh4iad illegally settled on Hopi land north of the villages. But the effect of the act was to transfer 
a large portion of Black Mesa which was in the "Hopi/Navajo Joint Use Area" to the Hopi Reservation. After 
passage of the act, the Hopi Tribal council under provisions in PL 93-531 requested that the 10,000 Traditional 
Dineh living in the transferred land be forcibly removed. The 10,000 Dineh were "resettled" into border towns 
such as Winslow, AZ, Gallup, NM and others where no kind of traditional life is possible. It is difficult to 
convey how brutal and devastating this action is to an indigenous person. The Dineh living in these towns now 
experience a high incidence of drug and alcohol abuse, suicide and domestic violence. 

Shortly after the resettlement, the Hopi Tribal Council agreed to expanded mining rights for Peabody Coal to 
further strip-mine sacred Black Mesa. By the mid-1990s, all of the hi'gher springs and wells in the area have 
gone dry due to the extraordinary amount of water pumped by Peabody for the slurry pipeline. Since the area 
is desert, the rate of water replenishment is extremely low. The Traditionals say all water will be gone in 2-7 
years, at which point all6000 Hopi, including Tribal Council members, will be without water. 


Interestingly, the federal government did not remove all Dineh off the area outlined by P.L. 93-531. More than 
60 families of Traditional Dineh were allowed to remain in an area just north of Hotevilla called "Big 
Mountain". Hopi elder Thomas Banyacya called this especially sacred area the "Jerusalem" of Hopiland. In 
August 1996, lawyers representing the Traditional Dineh Grandmothers of Big Mountain succeeded in getting a 
court to temporarily stop the mining. Within a month, Senator John McCain of Arizona (who is Chairman of the 
powerful Senate Commerce Committee and who was Dole's military advisor during the 1996 Presidential 
campaign) sponsored Senate Bill 1973, the 'The Navajo-Hopi Land Dispute Settlement Act of 1996". A 
House/Senate version of this bill was passed and signed into law by President Clinton in October, 1996. 
According to people working with Roberta Blackgoat, the Dineh Grandmother who represents the Traditional 
Dineh of Big Mountain, the law authorizes the removal by force of all of the remaining Dineh off Big Mountain. 
The date for the removal was set for the end of March, 1997. 

A federal lawsuit brought by friends of the traditional Dineh failed, but at least focused some attention on the 
issue. Perhaps in response the Hopi Tribal Council in April 1997 gave the Grandmothers and traditional Dineh 
of Big Mountain the choice to sign a "Lease Agreement" in which they give up claim to the land and which 
grants them permission to stay on the land for 75 years, after which time they will be removed by force. I was 
crestfallen to hear that virtually all of the Dineh signed the Lease Agreement, although this is certainly 
understandable given the alternative was almost certain bloodshed at the hands of Tribal Council and Federal 
Government forces. I certainly am happy the bloodshed was avoided, but I am concerned about the 
consequences of signing away traditional claim to the land. Reportedly only Grandmother Roberta Blackgoat 
and members of a few other families refused to sign. As of June, 1999, a new date for the removal of those who 
did not sign was set for February 1, 2000. This date appears to have teeth in it since BIA officials have 
increased their confiscation of Dineh livestock and brazenly discussed their plans on a local Albuquerque 
newscast, disingenuously claiming the action has nothing to do with Peabody Coal.' At stake is the most holy 
central shrine of the Hopi; land the elders have told us is important to the balance of life on Earth. Here is what 
Grandfather Banyacya told the U.N. in 1992 about Big Mountain 

The Four Comers area of the Hopi is bordered by four sacred mountains. The spiritual center within is a sacred 
site our prophecies say will have special purpose in the future for mankind to survive and now should be left in 
its natural state. All nations must protect this spiritual center. 

A traditional Hopi friend reaffirmed earlier statements by Hopi Traditionals that they believe it is right for 
Dineh to be living on Big Mountain, since Hopi prophecy holds that the Dineh will occupy and protect the land. 
However he did say that the land has been and is Hopi land, and that there were no Dineh living on Big 
mountain when Hotevilla was founded in 1906. Dineh say the land is their ancestral homeland, although 
Roberta Blackgoat has affirmed that the Dineh arrived in the Southwest from the north 500 years ago. I simply 
point out there is little argument between Traditional Hopi and Dineh over the presence of the Dineh on Big 
Mountain. The contest is between Westernized forces; at stake is millions of dollars in coal mining royalties. 
For the Traditional Dineh view of this situation, see page 115. 

Traditional Dineh are not the only targets of the Hopi Tribal Council and their Rangers. The Traditional Hopi 
have also been subject to an increasingly brutal campaign of repression. In February 1997, Rangers forced their 
way into the home of a Traditional Elder of Hotevilla and removed non-Hopi visitors. The Elders say the Tribal 
Council does not want any outside witnesses to its activities. 

The Tribal Council has in recent years been installing utilities in the traditional village of Hotevilla. This has 
been done over the strenuous objections of the Elders, who point out that these things were foreseen and 
explicitly forbidden by prophecy. They are a direct violation of the Hopi Covenant with the Creator. In 
December of 1995, sewer lines were installed during Soyal, the most sacred time of the year, and the time when 
the underworld spirits are closest to the surface. Traditional law forbids digging anywhere in Hopiland during 
Soyal. - 

1999 began with two sad events for the traditional Hopi. In January, the eldest traditional elder Dan Evehema 
"put on his cloud mask" and joined his ancestors. On February 6th, Grandfather Thomas Banyacya, the last of 
four Hopi chosen in 1948 to carry prophecy to the world, followed Grandfather Evehema to the Spirit World. 
Grandfather Banyacya' s passing had been anticipated for some time due to cancer, but I think Grandfather 

7 Peabody Holding Company was bought in 1998 by Lehman Merchant Banking Partners II for $2.3 billion. 


Evehema caught everyone by surprise. This despite his advanced age, which was anywhere from 105 to 108 

years, depending on the source. 

There is much more to this sad situation. Again, for a more complete picture, read "Hotevilla". However I do 
not know how you will get updated information. The national media has ignored countless pleas {©accurately 
cover events in Hopiland. A nd now the H opi Rangers are physically removing potential witnesses. '"ff" it' is your 
way, please pray for the strength and protection of the traditional H opi and D ineh and sacred Big Mountain. 
Also please pray for healing and unity among all Hopi. Since Hopiland is a microcosm of the whoieworld, we 
are praying for ourselves. " 

Hopi Elder Dan Evehema's Message To Mankind 

Posted on the i nternet late i n 19% at: hopi/ It now can be found on the 

"Hopi Information Network": 

Until the speaking of Hopi traditionals on the Art Bell Talk radio show in June, 1998, (see page 46) 
this was the most recent expression of Hopi Prophecy. It came from Grandfather Dan Evehema, 
who was the eldest Elder of the Greasewood Clan in Hotevilla before his passing to Spirit in 
January 1999. He was one of the last remaining fully traditional Hopi. He was the co-author with 
Thomas Mails of the book Hotevilla. A portion of the following message was originally delivered 
by Grandfather David Monongye on September 6, 1976 to Hopi and Bahanna friends at a ceremony 
marking the 70th anniversary of the founding of Hotevilla. That address appeared in an issue of 
the newsletter Techqua Ikachi ("Land and Life"), which was published clandestinely by the 
Traditional Elders in Hotevilla 45 times between 1975 and 1986. (See page 29.) This message 
contains an overview of Hopi Prophecy and a cry for help. From what I have seen with my own 
eyes in Hopiland, the very few remaining Traditional Hopi are in urgent need of help. They have 
been under increasing pressure from the non-traditional Hopi Tribal Council, and things in the 
past several years have gone from very bad to even worse. For details, see "Recent Hopi History" 

page 39. 


I am very glad to have this time to send a message to 
you. We are celebrating a time in our history which is 
both filled with joy and sadness. I am very glad to have 
this opportunity to share these feelings with you because 
we know many of you are having the same troubles. 

We Hopi believe that the human race has passed 
through three different worlds and life ways since the 
beginning. At the end of each prior world, human life has 
been purified or punished by the Great Spirit "Massauu" 
due mainly to corruption, greed and turning away from the 
Great Spirits teachings. The last great destruction was 
the flood which destroyed all but a few faithful ones 
who asked and received a permission from the Great 
Spirit to live with Him in this new land. The Great 
Spirit said, "It is up to you, if you are willing to live my 
poor, humble and simple life way. It is hard but if you 
agree to live according to my teachings and instructions, if 
you never lose faith in the life I shall give you, you may 
come and live with me." The Hopi and all who were 
saved from the great flood made a sacred covenant with 
the Great Spirit at that time. We Hopi made an oath 

that we will never turn away from Him. For us the 
Creator's laws never change or break down. 

To the Hopi the Great Spirit is all powerful. He 
appeared to the first people as a man and. talked with 
them in the beginning of this creation world: He taught us 
how to live, to worship, where to go and what food to 
carry, gave us seeds to plant and harvest. He gave us a set 
of sacred stone tablets into which He breathed all 
teachings in order to safeguard his land and life. In these 
stone tablets were made, instructions and prophecies and 
warnings. This was done with the help of a Spider 
woman and Her two grandsons. They were wise and 
powerful helpers of the Great Spirit. 

Before the Great Spirit went into hiding, He and 
Spider woman put before the leaders of the different 
groups of people many colors and sizes of com for them to 
choose their food in this world. The Hopi was the last to 
pick and then chose their food in this world. The Hopi 
then chose the smallest ear of Corn. Then Massauu said, 
"You have shown me you are wise and humble. For this 
reason you will be called Hopi (people of peace) and I 
will place in your authority all land and life to guard, 
protect and hold trust for Me until I return to you in later 
days for I am the First and the Last." 


This why when a Hopi is ordained into the higher 
religious order, the earth and all living things are-placed 
upon his hands. He becomes a parent to all life on earth. 
He is entitled to advise and correct his children in 
whatever peaceful way he can. So we can never give up 
knowing that our message of peace will reach our 
children. Then it is together with the other spiritual 
leaders the destiny of our future childrenis placed. We 
are instructed to hold this world in balance within the 
land and the many universes with special prayers and 
ritual which continue to this day. 

It was to the Spider woman's two grandsons the 
sacred stone tablets were given. These two brothers were 
then instructed to carry them to a place the Great Spirit 
had instructed them. The older brother was to go 
immediately to the east; to the rising sun and upon 
reaching his destination was instructed to immediately 
start to look for his younger brother who shall remain in 
the land erf the Great Spirit The older brother's mission 
when he returned was to help his younger brother (Hopi) 
bring about peace, brotherhood and everlasting life on his 

Hopi, the younger brother, was instructed to cover all 
land and mark it well with footprints and sacred 
markings to claim this land for the Creator and peace on 
earth. We established our ceremonials and sacred shrines 
to hold this world in balance in accordance with our first 
promise to the Creator. This is how our migration story 
goes, until we meet the Creator at Old Oribe (place that 
solidifies) over 1000 years ago. It was at that meeting 
when he gave to us these prophecies to give to you now at 
this closingof the Fourth World of destruction and the 
beginning of the Fifth World of peace. He gave us many 
prophecies to, pass on to you and all have come to pass. 
This is how we know the timing is now to reveal the last 
warnings and instructions to mankind. 

We were told to settle permanently here in Hopi land 
where we met the Great Spirit and wait for Older 
Brother who went east to return to us. When he returns to 
this land he will place his stone tablets side by side to 
show all the world that they are our true brothers. When 
the road in the sky has been fulfilled and when the 
inventing of something, in Hopi means, gourd of ashes, a 
gourd that when drops upon the earth will boil 
everything within a large space and nothing will grow 
for a very long time. When the leaders turned to evil 
ways instead of the Great Spirit we were told there 
would be many ways this life may be destroyed, if 
humankind does not heed our prophecy and return to ones 
original spiritual instructions. We were told of three 
helpers who were commissioned by the Great Spirit to 
help Hopi bring about the peaceful life on earth would 
appear to helpus and we should not change our homes, our 
ceremonials, our hair, because the true helpers might not 
recognize us as the true Hopi. So we have been waiting all 
these years. 

It is known that our True White Brother, when he 
comes, will be all powerful and will wear a red cap or red 
cloak. He will be large in population, belong to no religion 

but his very own. He will bring with him the sacred stone 
tablets. With him there will be two great ones both very 
wise and powerful. One will have a symbol or sign of 
swastika which represents purity and is Female, a 
producer of life. The third one or the second one of the two 
helpers to our True White Brother will have a sign of a 
symbol of the sun. He, too, will be many people and very 
wise and powerful. We have in our sacred Kachina 
ceremonies a gourd rattle which is still in use today with 
these symbols of these powerful helpers of our True 

It is also prophesied that if these three fail to fulfill 
their mission then the one from the west will eome like a 
big storm. He will be many, in numbers and unmerciful. 
When he comes he will cover the land like the red ants 
and over take this land in one day. If the three helpers 
chosen by the Creator fulfill their sacred mission and 
even if there are only one, two or three of the true Hopi 
remaining holding fast to the last ancient teaching and 
instructions the Great Spirit, Massauu will appear before 
all and our world will be saved. The three will lay out a 
new life plan which leads to everlasting life and peace. 
The earth will become new as it was from the beginning. 
Flowers will bloom again, wild games will return to 
barren lands and there will be abundance of food for all. 
Those who are saved will share everything equally and 
they all will recognize Great Spirit and speak one 

We are now faced with great problems, not only here 
but throughout the land. Ancient cultures are being 
annihilated. Our people's lands are being taken from 
them, leaving them no place to call their own. Why is 
this happening? It is happening because many have given 
up or manipulated their original spiritual teachings. The 
way of life which the Great Spirit has given to all its 
people of the world, whatever your original instructions 
are not being honored. It is because of this great sickness 
called greed, which infects every land and country that 
simple people are losing what they have kept for 
thousands of years. 

Now we are at the very end of our trail. Many people 
no longer recognize the true path of the Great Spirit. 
They have, in fact, no respect for the Great Spirit or for 
our precious Mother Earth, who gives us all life. 

We are instructed in our ancient prophecy that this 
would occur. We were told that someone would try togo up 
to the moon: that they would bring something back from 
the moon; and that after that, nature would show signs of 
losing its balance. Now we see that coming about. All over 
the world there are now many signs that nature is no 
longer in balance. Floods, drought, earthquakes, and great 
storms are occurring and causing much suffering. We do not 
want this to occur in our country and we pray to the Great 
Spirit to save us from such things. But there are now signs 
that this very same thing might happen very soon on our 
own land. 

Now we must look upon each other as brothers and 
sisters. There is no more time for divisions between 
people. Today I call upon all of us,from right here at 


home, Hotevilk, where we too are guilty of gossiping 
and causing divisions even among our own families; out to 
the entire world where thievery, war and lying goes on 
every day, These divisions will not be our salvation. 
Wars only bring more wars never peace. Only by joining 
together in a Spiritual Peace with love in our hearts for 
one another, love in our hearts for the Great Spirit and 
Mother Earth, shall we be saved from the terrible 
Purification Day which is just ahead. 

There are many of you in this world who are honest 
people. We know you spiritually for we are the "Men's 
Society Grandfathers" who have been charged to pray for 
you and all life on earth never forgetting anything or any 
one in our ceremonials. Our prayer is to have a good 
happy life, plenty of soft gentle rain for abundant crops. 
We pray for balance on earth to live in peace and leave a 
beautiful world to the children yet to come. We know you 
have good hearts but good hearts are not enough to help 
us out with these great problems. In the past some of you 
have tried to help us Hopis, and we will always be 
thankful for your efforts. But now we need your help in 
the worst way. We want the people of the world to know 
the truth of our situation. 

This land which people call the Land of the Freedom 
celebrates many days reminding people of the world of 
these things. Yet in well over 200 years the original 
Americans have not seen a free day. We are suffering the 
final insult. Our people are now losing the one thing 
which give life and meaning of life—our ceremonial land, 
which is being taken away from us. Hotevilla is the last 
holy consecrated, undisturbed Traditional Native 
American sacred shrine to the Creator. As the prophecy 
says, this sacred shrine must keep its spiritual pathways 
open. This village is the spiritual vortex for the Hopi to 
guide the many awakening Native Americans and other 
true hearts home to their own unique culture. Hotevilla 
was established by the last remaining spiritual Elders to 
maintain peace and balance on this continent from the tip 
of South America up to Alaska. Many of our friends say 
Hotevilla is a sacred shrine, a national and world 
treasure and must be preserved. We need your help., 

Where is the freedom which you all fight for and 
sacrifice your children for? Is it only the Indian people 
who have lost or are all Americans losing the very thing 
which you originally came here to find? We don't share 
the freedom of the press because what gets into the 
papers is what the government wants people to believe, 
not what is really happening. We have no freedom of 
speech, because we are persecuted by our own people for 
speaking our beliefs. 

We are at the final stages now and there is a last 
force that is about to take away our remaining homeland. 

We are still being denied many things including the'right 
to be Hopis and to make our living in accordance with our 
religious teachings. The Hopi leaders have warned 
leaders in the White House and the leaders in the Glass 
House but they do not listen;So as our prophecy says then 
it must be up to the people with good pure hearts that 
will not be afraid to help us to fulfill our destiny in peace 
for this world. We-now stand at a cross road whether to 
lead ourselves in everlasting life or total destruction. We 
believe that human beings' spiritual power through 
prayer is so strong it decides life on earth. 

So many people have-come to Hopiland to meet with 
us. Some of you we have met on your lands. Many times 
people have asked how they can help us. -Now I hope and 
pray that your help will come. If you have a way to 
spread the truth, through the newspapers, radio, books, 
through meeting with powerful people, tell the truth! 
Tell them what you know to be true. Tell them what you 
have seen here; what you have heard us say; what you 
have seen with your own eyes. In this way, if we do fall, 
let it be said that we tried, right up to the end,' to hold 
fast to the path of peace as we were originally instructed 
to do by the Great Spirit. Should you really succeed, we 
will all realize our mistakes of the past and return to the 
true path-living in harmony as brothers and sisters, 
sharing our mother, the earth with all other living 
creatures. In this way we could bring about a new world: A 
world which would be led by the Great Spirit and our 
mother will provide plenty and happiness for all. 

God bless you, each one of you and know our prayers 
for peace meet yours as the sun rises and sets. May the 
Great Spirit guide you safely into the path of love, peace 
freedom and God on this Earth Mother. May'the holy 
ancestors of love and light keep you safe in your land and 
homes. Pray for God to give you something important to 
do in this great work which lies ahead of us all to bring 
peace on earth. We the Hopi still hold the sacred stone 
tablets and now await the coming of our True White 
Brother and others seriously ready to work for the 
Creator's peace on earth. 

Be well, my children, and think good thoughts of 
peace and togetherness. Peace for all life on earth and 
peace with one another in our homes, families and 
countries. We are not so different in the Creator's eyes. 
The same great Father Sun shines his love on each of us 
daily just as Mother Earth prepares the sustenance for our 
table, do they not? We are one after all. 

Chief Dan Evehenta, (105) Spiritual leader, Eldest Elder 
Greeswood / Roadrunner Clan Society Father / Snake 
Priest / Kachina Father. 

From Hotevilla, Arizona, Hopi Sovereign Nation. 


Letter to President Nixon protesting the Strip-mining of Black Mesa 

In 1970 the Peabody Coal Company, a British firm, began stripping coal from 65,000 acres it leased 
from the Navajo and Hopi tribes. Company officials declared that this mining would not damage 
Indian lands and in fact would improve the lives of many Navajos and Hopis. In disagreement 
with this action a group of Hopi wrote the following letter to President Nixon: 

Dear Mr. President: 

We, the true and traditional religious leaders, recognized 
as such by the Hopi People, maintain full authority over 
all land and life contained within the Western 
Hemisphere. We are granted our stewardship by virtue 
of our instruction as to the meaning of Nature, Peace, and 
Harmony as spoken to our People by Him, know to us as 
Massau'u, the Great Spirit; who long ago provided for us 
the sacred stone tablets which we preserve to this day. 
For many generations before the coming of the white man, 
for many generations before the coming of the Navajo, the 
Hopi People have lived in the sacred place known to you 
as the Southwest and known to us to be the spiritual 
center of our continent. Those of us of the Hopi Nation 
who have followed the path of the Great Spirit without 
compromise have a message which we are committed, 
through our prophecy, to convey to you. 

The white man, through his insensitivity to the way of 
Nature, has desecrated the face of Mother Earth. The 
white man's advanced technological capacity has 
occurred as a result of his lack of regard for the spiritual 
path and for the way of all living things. The white 
man's desire for material possessions and power has 
blinded him to the pain he has caused Mother Earth by 
his quest for what he calls natural resources. And the 
path of the Great Spirit has become difficult to see by 
almost all men, even by many Indians who have chosen 
instead to follow the path of the white man. . . . 

Today the sacred lands where the Hopi live are being 
desecrated by men who seek coal and water from our soil 
that they may create more power for the white man's 
cities. This must not be allowed to continue for if it does, 
Mother Nature will react in such a way that almost all 
men will suffer the end of life as they now know it. The 
Great Spirit said not to allow this to happen even as it 
was prophesied to our ancestors. The Great Spirit said 
not to take from the Earth - not to destroy living things. 
The Great Spirit, Massau'u, said that man was to live in 
Harmony and maintain a good clean land for all children 
to come. All Hopi People and other Indian Brothers are 
standing on this religious principle and the Traditional 
Spiritual Unity Movement today is endeavoring to 
reawaken the spiritual nature in Indian people 
throughout this land. Your government has almost 
destroyed our basic religion which actually is a way of 
life for all our people in this land of the Great Spirit. We 
feel that to survive the coming Purification Day, we must 

return to the basic religious principles and to meet 
together on this basis as leaders of our people. 

Today almost all the prophecies have come to pass. 
Great roads like rivers pass across the landscape; man 
talks to man through the cobwebs of telephone lines; man 
travels along the roads in the sky in his airplanes; two 
great wars have been waged by those bearing the 
swastika or the rising sun; man is tampering with the 
Moon and the stars. Most men have strayed from the 
path shown us by the Great Spirit. For Massau'u alone is 
great enough to portray the way back to Him. 

It is said by the Great Spirit that if a gourd of ashes is 
dropped upon the Earth, that many men will die and that 
the end of this way of life is near at hand. We interpret 
this as the dropping of atomic bombs on Hiroshima and 
Nagasaki. We do not want to see this happen to any 
place or any nation again, but instead we should turn all 
this energy for peaceful uses, not for war. 

We, the religious leaders and rightful spokesmen for the 
Hopi Independent Nation, have been instructed by the 
Great Spirit to express the invitation to the President of 
the United States and all spiritual leaders everywhere 
to meet with us and discuss the welfare of mankind so 
that Peace, Unity, and Brotherhood will become part of 
all men everywhere. 


(signed) Thomas Banyacya, for 
Hopi Traditional Village Leaders: 
Mrs. Mina Lansa, Oraibi 
Claude Kawangyawma, Shungopavy 
Starlie Lomayaktewa, Mushongnovi 
Dan Katchongva, Hotevilla 


Transcript of Hopi Elders on Art Bell Talk, June 16, 1998 

In June of 1998 radio talk show host Art Bell announced that three "Hopi Elders" had contacted 
him, asking for an opportunity to come on the air. Bell said they told him that "what fhey were 
seeing was so close they no longer had any choice." On hearing this my first thought was that it 
was very unlikely any of the true traditional Hopi would even consent to speak on the Art Bell 
show, much less ask to come on the air. Nonetheless I listened, on the off-chance Hopi 
traditionals did speak on the air. 

I only needed to hear the very beginning of the interview to realize I was listening to authentic 
Hopi traditionals from the village of Hotevilla. I was astounded that they wouid speak through 
such a channel, and I began listening intently for what urgent purpose would lead them to do such 
a thing. As I listened, I became aware of two messages. One was directed at Bell's audience: an 
opportunity to hear Hopi prophecy, perhaps for the first time. As I listened, I began to feel strongly 
that there was a second message, unspoken, meant for those friends of the Hopi who had ears to 
hear: "Its very close now. Be sure you are ready." 

The following transcript was retrieved from Art Bell's web site: www.artbell .com/index, html lf 
you have access to a computer with "Real Audio" software you can listen to the interview over 
the internet. Instructions can be found on Bell's web site. The Hopi asked not to be identified, 
which is a first, so far as I know. Although I recognized the voices of the two Hopi men, I won't 
identify them in deference to their wishes. Please keep in mind that the traditionals are a besieged 
minority even among their own people. If it is your way, please pray for their strength, health and 

GFl=Grandfather l, GF2=Grandfather 2, 
GM ^Grandmother, GW«Robert Ghost Wolf 

AB: Good morning, everybody. I'm Art Bell and if we get, 
our phones hooked up right, and we've just had a 
disconnect problem, we are going to, in this half hour, 
have two Hopi Elders on the program. We've never tried 
this before. Unfortunately, we just got a disconnect and 
we're getting a busy signal trying to get back through. So, 
bear with us. We will have all this connected shortly. 
We DO have Robert Ghost Wolf on the line from, I 
believe, one of the Dakotas. We'll find out about that in 
a moment and he'll give us kind of a preamble to what's 
going to happen. 

AB: Here we go. This has never been tried on national 
radio before, so anything may happen here, folks. I have 
no idea. First, we are going to go to Robert Ghost Wolf, 
who is out somewhere in the Dakotas. Where ARE you, 

GW: I'm in the Black Hills. 

AB: Black Hills. Of North Dakota? 

GW: South Dakota. I'm here with the family. It's Pow- 
Wow time. We're just all here together, and I'm going to 
be talking to some other Elders up here, possibly, about 
getting together with us. 

AB: Would you explain to us?..uh, we are about to hear 
two Hopi Eiders. We are not going to give their real 
names on the air. We are going to call them 
"Grandfather 1", "Grandfather 2", and "Grandmother 
Hopi." Why are we doing this? 

GW: There has already been a lot of controversy about 
these Elders stepping out and speaking like this, to the 
world, and they have had some threats made against 
them already, so we are taking precautions to make sure 
that they're safe. I hope the people can understand this. 
And, I also hope that people understand that these 
people are not professional speakers or lecturers. We're 
going to do the best we can TO make this run smoothly, as 
soon as we get the phone lines hooked up again. 

AB: All right. I think we ARE hooked up. Anyway, that 
is the explanation. There HAVE been threats. 

GW: It's very dangerous for something like this to 
happen and it's very unusual for Elders to come out and 
speak like this. The thing is, we've hit a, point, in our 
progression through these changes, where it's important 
to get the news out. It's important for the children of the 
world. It's important for all of us to hear what they 
have been trying to say, now, for many, many years 

AB: All right. Let's see if we can get the hook-up going 
here. I believe we're going to Phoenix, Arizona and let's 
see if we have Grandfather 2 on the line with us. Hello? 


GF2: Hello! 

AB: Yes, hello there. 

GF2: Hi! 

AB: I hear you just fine. 

GF2: OK. 

AB: Thank you for coming on the air tonight You are 
going to give us information, Grandfather 2, and also 
translate for us? that correct? 

GF2: Yes. 

AB: OK. I think that my first question?..if I may ask the 
first question?..and Robert, you're welcome to ask one any 
time you'd like. I would like to ask Grandfather 1 why 
he has come forward in public at this time? 

GF2: {Asks GF1 in Hopi language, then translates.} 

GF1: (Answers in Hopi language.} It is our time to bring 
forth the message into the world. It has been taught to us 
by our Elders, from way back. That is why I have chosen 
to step forward and bring out the message today. There 
are people out there who are leading two lives?..who are 
there to stop us from putting forth the message, but it is 
the Elders, that taught us the wisdom, that are telling us 
to do this now for you and the rest of the world. 

AB: With regard to what may be changing, Earth 
changes, is the time now very short? 

GF2: {Asks, then translates.) It is time for the end times 
here, that was prophesied and through the dreams that 
were given to us also. Through those dreams, we are 
learning that we are getting very close to the end times. 

AB: Might we ask how old Grandfather 1 is? His age? 

GF2: (Asks?} Seventy-five. 75 years old. 

AB: 75 years old. And, how old are the prophecies that 
we are talking about now? 

GF2: (Asks?} He doesn't know exactly what the age of 
these teachings are. He says they were given to them 
before Christ It is mainly by word of mouth that it has 
been handed down. 

AB: How does Grandfather feel about the accuracy of the 
word that has been handed down? Many people dispute 
the Bible and whether or not IT is accurate. With regard 
to Hopi prophecy, how does HE feel about the accuracy 
of the prophecy? 

GF2: (Asks?) From the time when Yukioma was the 
chief, he had been carrying this message. But mainly the 
message had been carried forth by word of mouth. The 
accuracy had to deal with how well each individual 

that was given the opportunity to maintain the exactness 
of the prophecies. They were all given this prophecy, so 
they all had to meet at least once or twice a year, in the 
Kivas, where they would actually sit down and go back 
through that. One person would talk about the 
prophecies, and if he ever so much as added something to 
it or left something out then the rest of the group would 
know that part of the prophecies was missing. So, they 
would tell him, "Well, you didn't say this one here," or 
"You added this to it." So, that is how this was kept 
alive through word of mouth and everyone had to 
remember just what those prophecies were about. 

AB: Is Grandfather, or are you and others now having 
many dreams indicating that indeed these are the end 
times beginning to unfold? 

GF2: (Asks?} Yes, I have dreamed about these things and 
that's how a lot of them are coming about and they are 

AB: Uh, Robert? Help me out here? 

GW: He would probably be willing to share any of his 
visions of what he see coming in the immediate future. 

GF2: r can't hear you, Robert 

AB: OK, the question is, would Grandfather care to share 
any specific details of the dreams that he has had about 
what may be coming soon? 

GF2: {Asks?] It wasn't exactly through the dreams. The 
dreams were part of the teachings that he knows and 
having to understand the exactness of the prophecies 
themselves. He had to go out and do a lot of prayers. And 
then, he would go and do this and was doing this for a 
whole year. Within a year's time, he had kind of lost 
interest in the giving of the prophecies to him, because 
he hadn't received anything. So, he decided to quit for 
awhile. Finally, within a few months, he decided to go 
back to his prayers and he would go out and pray. 
Within, four year's time, he started receiving a lot of 
information. So, that is how most of his information was 
received?. .through asking?.. prayer. 

AB: Could we please ask why he has decided to share it 
with the rest of the world? This is something that has 
not been done before, so why has he decided to share this 
with us? 

GF2: {Asks?} Through the Elder's teachings and wishes. 
The Elders wanted to let this become public at a time 
when we were close to the end^imes. So, 'he had decided 
to take this upon himself to let go of these things, in 
hopes that there would be a number of people that would 
understand and realize what is going on and start 
praying. We ARE very close to it and we are, right now, 
going through hard times. He wants to set some people 
aside?..their lives?. .so that some lives may be spared. 


AB: That was going to be my next question, Grandfather, 
and that is, if you would ask Grandfather 1 whether 
prayer, whether becoming spiritual of nature, can or will 
change any of what is coming? 

GF2: (Asks?} It's not a matter of quick change. If you 
wanted to change now and change your life around and do 
your prayers, it will help a little in the alleviation of 
much terrible outcome from the cataclysms. There is a lot 
in store for all of us and the intensity of this will be a lot 
less if we can all settle down and behave and not be in 
the way of the actions we have right n0W?.,like we are 
all being corrupt. That has to be taken care of. We have 
to keep ourselves from being corrupted by anything from 
the outside. 

AB: All right. We are going to stop for a moment, now, so 
everybody relax. Thank you very much. It is a great 
honor, indeed, to have Grandfathers 1 and 2 with us, and 
Robert Ghost Wolf in the Black Hills. We're talking 
about Hopi prophecy, and when we come back, we'll try 
to press for some details as best we can. I'm Art Bell'. This 
is "Coast-to-Coast AM." 

AB: What you're hearing, now, as far as I know, has 
never been done on national radio, before. So, listen very 
carefully. Let's go back to the Black Hills and see if 
Robert Ghost Wolf is still here. Are you there, Robert? 

GW: We're still here. 

AB: Okay, good and back to Phoenix, Arizona and 
Grandfather One and Two. Grandfather Two, are you 

G2: Yes. 

AB: What we would like to do, if it's possible, is to ask 
Grandfather One if he can give us any details of what is 
going to happen, here on Earth, with this prophecy. 
What is coming? Any specific details at all? 

Grandfathers One and Two talk back and forth in the 
Hopi language. 

G2: Actually, there are a few that he thinks are 
important things that will be coming up pretty shortly. 
There' s one thing for sure that we are going to COme upon 
is that World War III is. will take place.. ..and 
starvation is definitely a part of this thing, where we 
will hit starvation. The weather change, itself, it's 
erratic, right now, and it's not what it should be. This 
weather climate, itself, it's actually taking care of the 
crops already in a way that we're losing it. That's part 
of.. .you know...„leading us into starvation because the 
crops will not produce, 

GW: Do they know that you were just able to plant the 
corn up in Hopi land? Just a few days ago, like a week or 
so ago because of the weather? 

G2: Yes. People have just started to do those things and 
it comes up but the winds are drying them up and the 
weather has been erratic, like I said, and it's been very 
cold. It's been. know, actually. ...they get frost 
bitten. It's kind of like a frost bitten effect on it that it 
burns it up. 

AB: Yes. Yes, we are having the same thing here in 
Nevada. A kind of a frost bite. You are exactly right. We 
are having the same thing, here, with the things that 
we have planted in the ground, in Nevada. As though 
they were frost bitten but, I think, affected by the winds, 
as well. 

G2: Yes. 

AB: Now, these are three things: weather change, mass 
starvation and the third world war. Would you please 
ask Grandfather if the weather changes are the 

beginning of these changes if what we have seen now, 

with the weather, is the beginning and, of course, we're 
going to want to ask how soon these other changes, he 
thinks, will happen. 

Grandfathers One and Two talk back and forth in the 
Hopi Tongue. 

G2: Yes, these are the signs of, you know, the changes and 
that also part of it is, you know, right now we're having 
problems with crickets which 'is a part of these 
prophecies where they would come in hoards and they 
will destroy the crops, also, and that is happening, also. 

GW: You're having that in Nevada, aren't you? 

AB: Yes, we are. In Southern Nevada we are having that 
and, apparently, throughout, large portions of the 

Southwest we are having that yes, indeed. So then, 

these weather changes are the beginning? 

G2: Yes. 

AB: When does Grandfather think the very serious parts 
of the prophecies, another world war and mass 

starvation when will these begin to manifest? How 

far away from these are we? 

Grandfathers One and Two talk back and forth in the 
Hopi Tongue. 

G2: Well, it's been said that there is no exact time and 

date for these things events...ito take place but the 

year 2000 is a I would say that is a close 

approximation of the time that all of this will start to 
take place. The teaching fronVthe Elders was that they 
talked about that everything will happen at once but, 
when they say these things, they put it in a form that, 
you know, they say it's going to all happen at once but 
it's not exactness of happening at once. It will happen but 
they will, you know, fall pretty much short from the 
other, following, it's like a domino effect. This is, you 


know, when one thing happens then the other will fall 
into place. But, you know, it will be in a short time from 
one another so this is what Grandfather was talking 

GW: Are we talking within the next two years? 

Bell: Well, he seemed to say. the year 2000. I guess 
this would be a first question.. ..if there is a way to 
phrase this. Is the weather change, that we now have, 
the first domino? 

Grandfathers One and Two talk back and forth in the 
Hopi Tongue. 

G2: It's been known that this had happened a long time 
ago but, in our prior world, it happened before, you know, 
the same things that we had gone through. The 
teachings were that we were not supposed to follow in 
the same pattern and try to keep ourselves from going 
astray from our teachings. These weather patterns that 
we talked about and cataclysms that take place, are not 
really set in order.... in a fashion that any person could 
say that, 'Okay, the winds are going to do it this year 
and the next year will be fires and the following year 
will be earthquakes, you know.' Also, he's saying that 
it's not exactly his words that that is the way that it 
will take place but he knows that these are signs and 
they are readily available. All the signs are out there. 
Anyone can see that, that it is taking place and it's only 
going to get bigger. 

AB: Grandfather said 'other worlds' or 'other 
civilizations' and that this has happened before. Now, 
did Grandfather mean by that that men have walked on 
the Earth before and that great catastrophes. the 

one we are now talking about came and wiped them 

out and man started again. Is that what Grandfather 

G2: Yes. 

GW: I have a question, if I may? There's a lot of talk, out 
now, and a lot of theories and a lot of prophecies about 
these changes having dramatic effects on the 

configurations of the land masses that they will be 

tremendous, cataclysmic changes. Does 

Grandfather do the Hopis see this as happening in 

that manner? Will there be very dramatic Earth changes 
and will cause the face of the Earth, as we know it, to 
change dramatically? 

Grandfathers One and Two talk back and forth in the 
Hopi tongue. 

G2: Ah, yes. The Earth changes will take place in such a 
way, you know, that this whole planet, here, will 
become a different type of planet because of the changes 
in itself. It has happened before, as we mentioned 
earlier, that it did happen before that they went 
through these changes and they was taught they we 

weren't supposed to go back to the same routine that we 
had gone through in the past life. That was the 
corruption that we were going through... .what we're 
going through, today. There is so much corruption out 
there. These were the things that led us to these things 
and even animals, insects, all of these things will all 
turn around on us and, you know, they're going to lead us 
to the same things again. 

GW: So, we're repeating history. 

G2: Yes. Even though it can be your own pet, it can turn 
against you. 

AB: The animals will turn against us. Already, I have 

talked to many experts animal experts.. ..who are 

saying that animal attacks, all across North America, 
are increasing many, many fold. So, this could be the 
beginning of that. 

G2: Yes. 

Bell: Alright, we are close to another break but I would 
like to ask Grandfather if there will be any difference in 

the way the people in the cities the great cities of 

America and the World. ...Los Angeles, New York, 

Chicago will feel these changes and the people in 

remote areas like New Mexico, Arizona, Nevada and the 
Dakota where Robert is now? Will there be a big 

G2: In the changes? 

AB: Yes. 

Grandfathers One and Two talk back and forth in the 
Hopi Tongue. 

AB: Alright, I must break in here, Grandfather. We must 
take a break, now. When we come back, we will look for 
the answer to that question. Alright? 

G2: Okay. 

AB: Good morning. I am Art Bell, and if you're joining us 
at this hour, we're involved in the middle of something 
unprecedented on national talk radio, no question about 
that. In the Black Hills of South Dakota, we have 
Robert Ghost Wolf. In the area of Phoenix, Arizona, we 
have Grandfather 1 and Grandfather 2. These are two 
Hopi Elders, and we are asking questions about Earth 
changes. Thus far, we have determined that they are 
close, that the weather-pattern changes ^afe part of it, 
that the weather is due to change a great deal more, 
that there will be starvation and World War III. This is 
Hopi prophecy that you're listening to everybody and in 
addition to that, we've asked about the cities and the 
country, and massive Earth changes. In other words, 
changes of continental locations, and that would also 
appear to be in the offing. We are going to continue to ask 

questions for as long as we're able. I am Art Bell and this 
is "Coast-to-Coast AM," so stand by. 

(Commercials } 

AB: My website is down, so if you're trying to get in it 
will be futile until we get this squared away. First, back 
to Robert Ghost Wolf in the Black Hills of South 
Dakota. For those who have just joined, we are not using 
names other than Grandfather 1 and Grandfather 2, two 
Hopi Elders from the Hopi Sinom. The reason we're not 
using names, again, Uh Robert?.. please. 

GW: There have been many threats to these Elders, who 
are having the courage to come out and speak these 
prophecies to the world, for various reasons. We are 
trying to keep them and their families safe, and also 
keep them from being inundated by harassment from 
people who feel, perhaps, that these messages should 
not be shared with everyone in the world, which is not 
their opinion. This is why they are here now talking to 
us. I just got news that OUR website is down. 

AB: YOUR website is down, too. 

GW: If people want to get more information about these 
prophecies, I have a number that they can call to get the 
books that have at least '200 of these prophecies in them. 
That's 1-800-905-8367. There are operators standing by 
right now, because of what happened to the website. OR 
they can call the Wolf Lodge office in Washington State 
at 1-509-465-1606. 

AB: That's 1-509-465-1606. It's odd that your site and my 
site are both down. I think it's traffic-related. All right, 
now back to Phoenix, Arizona. Grandfather 1, the 
question was, all of these changes including a world 
War?..uh, will there be a different effect in the cities 
than there is in the country? 

GF2: A different effect in the cities? 

AB: Yes. In other words, will there be more trouble in the 
cities?. .in America's large cities or the world's large 
cities?. .with these changes? 

GF2: {Asks GF1?} Yes, in the big cities, it will effect a 
lot. You know, how much corruption there will be within 
the cities. Also, the people themselves have to be aware 
of all of these things that will take place, so they must 
change, too. But, he's not asking anyone to follow him in 
the way he put himself on the path he is on. He is not 
asking anyone to follow him in that. It is up to the 
individual to make that decision for him/herself as to 
which direction they want to go. When you make that 
choice for yourself, what, you want to do with your life, 
you don't blame anybody else for your own actions, for 
what you do. If something happens to you along the way, 
then you are not going to say that you were forced into it. 
These are the things that he had looked into also. 

That's why he's saying that he's not asking anyone to 
follow him in the way he's leading himself. He's only 
giving out advice that this is what they should do. They 
should start changing themselves and going back to the 
old ways of living simple lives, of taking care of 
themselves from the land that is available to them, and 
from the food that they grow. These are the things that 
will help you along the way when you come, to your hard 
times. So, the people must make these decisions for 

AB: All right. There are many that I have interviewed, 
many others who see the future, who say that our Sun is 
beginning to change and that it is causing some of these 
changes here on Earth. Does Grandfather know anything 
about that? 

GF2: [Asks?) From these teachings that were given to 
him, he has understood that the solar axis itself, of the 
Sun, is going to change. The places that normally have 
cold weather will have hot weather. You know, the 
weather itself is going to get even worse. The 
temperatures are going to rise even higher, and that will 
bum up the crops and dry up the Earth, so nothing will be 
able to grow. It is true that the Sun itself is being 
affected by this also. 

AB: In farmer's fields around the world, in many, many 
places in the world,?. .as a matter of fact even tonight, 
for the first time ever in the state of Virginia, there, is a 
very complex crop circle. These are strange formations in 
farmer's crops. Does Grandfather know anything about 
what these may be, and why they happen? 

GF2: (Asks?) He has heard about these. He has seen 
pictures of the crop circles that have been out there. 
These are, in his own mind, teachings also, and they're 
telling us what is becoming of our time and 'where it is 
leading us. He has had a chance to look at a few of them, 
and he does understand what they're trying to put 
through?. .the message in the circle itself. It is telling us 
that we are very close to it and what we need to do in 
order to get ourselves back on track, and the other end of 
it?. .when he says, the other end of it, where you get to 
see all the things happen and live again?.. for a new life 
to start. 

AB: OK. Uh, then this is a good question. We have many 
strange machines that fly in our sky that we call UFOs. 
What do the Hopi have to say regarding these kinds of 
things, that have been seen to fly in the sky, what the 
Hopi may have called, "Star Brothers who have come 
from the heavens?" ' 

GF2: {Asks?) I'd like to add a little to what tie just said. 
This is referring to the question prior to this one. I didn't 
finish it out. He said that the crop circles were put there 
by outside, like the UFO people, but he's not sure just 
who put those crop circles there. But, to get back to the 
question that is the last one here, the teachings from the 


Elders, he said, yes they know about the possibilities of 
other life forms on other planets. The "Old Ones," the 
old people, the "Old Ones" way back had the knowledge 
and know-how of getting around, and they have traveled 
to other planets before and they know how it is out there, 
if there is life on other planets and they DO know that 
there is life on other planets and what planets are not 
livable. But, they don't know the exactness of how they 
will be helping us out or they will be going against us. 
They just know that when we are getting close to the end 
times, we will be visited by people from out there, and 
we're not aware whether they're going to help us or go 
against us. We do know that they have high technology 
to see what is going on. 

AB: We have exactly the same problem. We're trying to 
understand the nature of who these beings are. All right, 
we are at the bottom of the hour, so everybody can relax 
for a few moments. We are being honored with the 
presence of two Hopi Elders, Grandfather 1 who is 
speaking Hopi and Grandfather 2 who is translating for 
us. They're in the Phoenix, Arizona area. In the Black 
Hills of South Dakota, we have Robert Ghost Wolf and 
we are discussing the details?..specific details?..of Hopi 
prophecy, something many did not want done on national 
radio or national anything. I'm Art Bell and this is 
"Coast-to-Coast AM." 


AB: Alright, back now to my guests, Robert Ghost Wolf in 
the Black Hills and Grandfather One and Two, in 
Phoenix, Arizona. Here is, I guess, a hard question but one 
that I should ask. I understand that Native Elders speak 
about prophecy through the tradition of story telling and 
I guess there are stories that relate to something called 
the 'Purifier'. Is there some way that Grandfather could 
explain to us a story about what the 'Purifier' is and, 
perhaps, a little bit of the story. Is that on okay 

Grandfathers One and Two talk back and forth in the 
Hopi Tongue. 

G2: The story about that is that we do know that we did 
have a brother who was set out and he is out there and 
with that brother and, from the Society of the One 
Horned Clan, they made a pact that....from the One 
Homed Clan and the Society and the brother had make 

like a it's a law that the purifying time would come. 

This was already done, it was like it had been already 
organized and it was, you know, established. 

GW: Like a contract 

G2: The stories that there will be come a time that 
whoever is going to come and, you know, to purify the 
people I'm having a hard time,' here. 

AB: I understand. It is hard to translate this. 

G2: Ya. 

GW: Sometimes there are not words that translate to 

AB: I understand. Maybe I could ask this. What is the 
'Purifier'? Is the 'Purifier', is it the Hopi Prophecy or is 
the 'Purifier' something specific? Is it a comet or is it 
something from the heavens or how may we know what 
the 'Purifier 1 is? 

Grandfathers One and Two talk back and forth in the 
Hopi Tongue. 

G2: The 'Purifier' is mentioned is the other brother that 
was sent forth, out to the East, and this was the teaching 
that he had ■ ■ ■ -that he was sent of to the East and he 
would reach the point of origin where the Sun would 
come out from. When he reached that place, then he 
would touch his head to the Earth and he would return 
back to us. When this, you know, time comes that's the 
end of ....the end times....time for a purification time 
when he will return back. He is the one that has 
a way, you know. . ..the weapons or the artillery and he is 
the Big Brother so he would know what to do and how he 
would help us and how we would go about in having to 
make us understand. His job is to make us understand and 
try to get ourselves to behave in the way that we're 
supposed to and, if we don't, then the one from the West 
will come and they are the ones that are going to come 
with much force. He, the 'Purifier', the one that went to 
the East, is supposed to be big enough to take on the ones 
that are coming from the West That is going to become 
like the Third World War. 

AB: Third World War, is the 'Purifier'. Ahight, he has 
talked much. ...Grandfather has talked much about 
corruption. In our cities and in our small towns.....and I do 

not know about your reservations but in our cities and 

small towns, we have, now, many, many stories of 
children going to school and shooting other children and 
teachers and their parents. Things that we cannot seem 
to understand, at all. Does Grandfather have any idea 
why these things seem to be happening in our society? 

GW: We also might want to see if Grandmother might 
like to speak on this subject. 

Grandfathers One and Two talk back and forth in the 
Hopi Tongue. 

G2: You know, in the cities itself, what's going 

on what you mentioned yes. these are part of the 

teachings and the prophesies that, when'we get to these 
end times, you know, we're all going to start going 
corrupt. Even, you know, the children because they don't 
really believe in anything, even what we're trying to 
teach them and what we try to talk to them about. You 
know, they look at you but they have a different opinion 
about these things and they don't believe that. Ifs hard 
to try to teach the young ones and even grown-ups, even 

adults, are in the same situation. Ifs not just the children 
who are in this kind of situation, right now, ifs even the 
adults who are in that kind of situation and, you know, 
there's a lot of corruption in this way, but we do know 
that these things would start to take place in the school 
systems and all over where even young children would 
start to take lives, like that, because it is just a 
corruption of the mind from the way things are going, 
right now. 

Grandfather One speaks to Grandfather Two. 

G2: Even the children will go against their own parents. 
These are the things that have been taught. They're all 
going to start turning against their own parents and 
that's what's happening, that's what you're seeing out 

AB: Yes, we are. Grandfather talked about corruption. Is 
it reasonable to ask this? Could this be happening to us, 
also, because we have reached a fantastic level of 
technology and have changed from spiritual to 
materialistic human beings, where our technological 
knowledge exceeds our spiritual wisdom? Can you 
translate that? 

Grandfathers One and Two talk back and forth in the 
Hopi Tongue. 

G2: Yes. He feels that, that is happening, there, that 
we're misleading ourselves from that, from the material 
side of it and walking away from the spiritual sense of 

AB: Has this, also, occurred with the Hopi Nation? It is 
occurring, of course, in this the the 
small towns,.. ..this move to materialism, but has it also 
been occurring within the Hopi Nation? 

G2: Yes, it is happening there, too. Yes. 

AB: Do Grandfather's people believe that it is 
worthwhile stockpiling food and water or are these 
changes going to be so big that is simply, really doesn't 
make much difference, one way or the other? 

Grandfathers One and Two talk back and forth in the 
Hopi Tongue. 

G2: Ya, he does know that it is known that we should, 
you know, stockpile our goods .... our dry goods ..... and its 

been taught from long time way back. That's why we 

should never forget; you know, about farming and how to 
take care of ourselves because you never know when it 
will hit and that's why they teach us these things, as 
young. Also, to answer the end part of your question, it is 
worth doing that. When the time comes, it may not be, 
you know, such a good idea to do that but ifs worth 
trying to do something like that because they say that, 
you know, the time in their limitation is at least a month 
to two months that we will be without food and water so 

we need to store away as much as we can for that amount 
of time. We have different clans who are supposed to 
take care of these situations. About the food items and 
things like that, there are certain clans that do have 
that power and authority over that but the majority of 
the people, out home, they have walked away from 
their teachings and they've walked away from their 

spiritual side of it. They've forgotten that and 1 guess 

I could say that they really haven't forgotten it but 
they've just ignored it and now they will have to suffer 
the consequences. 

AB: Alright, I think that we probably don't have time 
for another translated question before the top of the hour 
so, hold on in Phoenix. We're very honored to-have you 
with us. Robert; is there anything that you can think of 
that we should be asking when we come back? 

GW: I would suggest that we ask Grandmother if she 
would like to speak on some of these matters. 

AB: Alright. 

GW: I think that would be a good thing and, perhaps, we 
could ask her again about the children or what we can do 
for our children and then possibly go into what is meant 
by the emergence of the 5th World and what we're going 

AB: And, also, I guess we might endeavor to ask whether 
Hopi Prophecy tells us anything about what is going to 
happen after the Purification, after the changes. 

GW: What will life be like, then? 

AB: That's right; so that is exactly what we'll do. 
Alright, everybody, I'm Art Bell and I don't think this 
has every been done before and we're trying to do it, 
tonight. You are listening to two Hopi Elders from the 
Sinom, in Arizona. You're listening to Robert Ghost Wolf 
who is in the Black Hills of South Dakota. I'm Art Bell, 
in Pahrump. 

AB: Alright, back now to Robert Ghost Wolf in South 
Dakota, in the Black Hills. Robert, are you there? 

GW: Yes, I'm here. 

AB: Alright, you suggested that we speak with 
Grandmother about the problem with the children. So, 
let us do exactly that and ask Grandmother, if she is 
there, the same question. We have so many children, 
now, that seem to be turning against their 
parents.... turning against their teachers/....and turning 
against other children, in facr| killing them. Some 
people have looked at our children and said that they 

seem like human beings with no soul with no 

spirit... .within them. What is happening to us? 

GM: Okay, I'll try my best Well, nobody teach the 
children, anymore, about the spiritual pathway so 


they're turning against one another. The mothers are so 
busy working, you know, they teach their children at 
home so they're being left out and they no longer get than 
love from a mother like they're supposed to. Its really 
sad to see what is going on out there. 

AB: Do you also believe, as we have heard from 
Grandfather One, that Hopi Prophecy is now telling us 
that the end times are very, very near. 

GM: Yes, uh huh. Yes, that is true. 

AB: Robert, anything? 

GW: Grandmother, what words can we share with some 
of the mothers that are out there watching these 
conditions? There are so many mothers who seem to 
wonder what they can do and how they can help their 
children. Do you have any words that you can share 
with these mothers? 

G M : Well, praying .... first is praying and to go 

through that path with the Creator. We have forgotten 
how to walk that path so they need to get on that path 
to survive. 

AB: Okay, that seems quite clear to me. Alright, then, 
Grandmother, thank you very, very much Thank you for 
coming on. 

GM: Uh huh. 

AB: And I think, now, that we need to go back to 
Grandfather because I want to ask the G randfather....he 
has talked to us much about what is the prophecy of 
what is coming and coming very soon. So, it is a very 
important question, I believe, to pose and the question 
is. . . ..after the purification, after the purifying, after the 
changes, after the war what will the world be like? 

Grandfather One and Grandfather Two converse in the 
Hopi Tongue. 

G2: Well, the outcome of this, after that purifying time, 
the lifestyle will change....more or less. Those people or 
those ones that have been working, you know, with the 
evil or and the dark side are going to be eliminated. Only 
those that are walking on the one path and believing in 
that one and with a good heart, those are the ones that 
are going to continue this and there will be some.... what 
you would say....there might be some people who have 
the minds that are like the scientists that can develop 
things. Right now we are not supposed to be taking the 
minerals out of the Earth for any reason at all, you know. 
Only certain minerals but only for the amount that you 
need, that's what was taught. But other than that; we're 
not supposed to reap the Earth, you know, and tear it up 
like that.. .what we're doing now. Like intermarriage, 
ifs not supposed to be done. Only after purification time 
will intermarriage be possible, you know, that we can 
start to marry other people other walks. This is, you 

know, when the people will come together after 
purification time and all walks, that have been spared, 
will come together and one language will be spoken. 
There will be one law and it has been taught to say that, 
you know, some people say that ifs gonna be their 
language or ifs going to be the Hopi language that's 
going to be spoken but this is, you know, something that is 
not very known as to what language will be spoken but 
there will be one language that will be spoken. 
Togetherness is what will come about where we're going 
to come back to what was once before. What Adam and 
Eve came upon was, you know, was the Garden of Eden 
where everything will be flourishing, even, you know, 
the flowers and the vegetation. Everything will be back 
to normal but from thenceforth we are allowed to do 
these things and we can take the minerals out of the 
Earth, to use for a purpose, and not to really destroy it, 

Grandfather One comments 

G2: And all the.. ..he mentioned, also, which I forgot to 

mention was the altars and the shrines, of the 

different societies, will be eliminated and all those will 
be, you know, have to be put away because they will no 
longer have power and authority over anything so these 
will be eliminated. 

AB: Will there be a single power or a single authority or 
a single law or will everybody simply understand, inside 
themselves, that we are now one? There are many who 
talk, in our world, about a single world government...., a 
single world ruler. Is that what Grandfather is speaking 

G2: Yes, but not in the fashion that we understand it, 

now what they're talking about....the New World 

Order. Bee, thafs more or less in a dictatorial form but 
this is done in a way, you know, where freedom is an 

AB: Alright. Grandfather spoke about World War III. I 
would like to be clear about this. Does he see men killing 

men humans killing humans or does he just see 

explosions and fire? Is that what he calls World War 

Grandfathers One and Two talk back and forth in the 
Hopi Tongue. 

G2: What you had mentioned about which one is, you 
know, the one thafs going to be...he said that the taking 
of lives, you know, this is what will tak? place because 
it will be like an elimination ofgood from the bad. He 
mentioned about Hitler, you know, that Hitler had done 
a lot.. ..done away with a lot of people, too, and when 
that took place, he said that many of the people 
were.. ..many of the Hopi had realized this and they 
were glad that this took place because it was a teaching 
that took place. It was trying to teach the people that 


this is what is going to happen, see, so look at this as 
more or less as a warning that this will take place, 

AB: A warning of a Holocaust. 

G2: Yes. So, there will be lives lost. A lot of lives will be 

AB: Does Grandfather understand how some lives will be 
saved while other lives will be spared with so much fire 
and war? I guess the question is, will it be like an Anti- 
Christ which some people think will arise, soon.... in our 
world, an Anti-Christ. I don't know if the Hopi have any 
similar prophecy regarding one who will come, like 
Hitler, again. 

Grandfathers One and Two converse in the Hopi Tongue. 

AB: Grandfather, I'm sorry, I must interrupt. Please 
apologize for me. We are on a break, now. If he could 
finish the answer and we will get the answer when we 
come back. Would that be alright? 

G2: Okay. 

AB: Okay, thank you. Breaking right here. This is Coast 
to Coast with Art Bell. 

AB: Alright, we are back now with our guests and we had 
asked a question about the 'Purifier'. ...about what we 
call the Anti-Christ and whether the Hopi have or 
understand there to be such a being, coming. Do you have 
that answer, now, Grandfather Two? 

G2: Yes. He mentioned that, yes, the Anti-Christ, that 
there is, you know, that he is coming again but there 
have been a lot of people that have walked away from 

that from the teachings and walked away from their 

spiritual path. They went and decided to do something 
else, you know, rather than having to walk that and he 
will come in again and he is the one that is going to set us 
straight, again, on this thing here. 

Grandfather One speaks to Grandfather Two in Hopi. 

G2: The teachings are that the Creator, itself, what we 
talked about. ...the Christ..'s the same thing. What 
life that we're supposed to lead, we've strayed away 
from it what he....we told him that we would follow 
him in the same way and, if we walk away from these 
teachings then, he was the one that was living that and 
walking that. Then he gave us a choice to do that, also, 
and if we disregard everything that was taught to us and 
we walked away from it. He will come back in and step 
in and take it over again back for himself because he had 
mentioned that he was the first and he will be the last. 
So, this is what will happen. 

AB: Alright, I have a question. People are sending me 
faxes and this is a fax I have received. "Given that we 
are in the end times, and that there will be much 

turmoil, violence, death and destruction.... is there 
anything that we, the living, can do to prepare our souls 
for the long, long path that we will all walk down after 
our physical lives end?" 

Grandfathers One and Two confer in the Hopi language. 

G2: Ya, our teachings that were given to us, we've 
strayed away from it and how we are supposed to, you 
know, alleviate a lot of some of these things and it's 
going to be too late for us to try to turn around and walk 
that spiritual path because we are taught that we are 
supposed to be on that path from way back. We should 
have been changing ourselves quite a number of years 
back because it doesn't take over night for a person to 
change .... to walk a path .... the chose path. Also, it 
doesn't take over night for the Creator to believe in you. 
He has to look at you, you know, your heart is the thing 
that has to change and it's not going to change over 
night, These are the things that are very hard to change 
on a person and so right now we look at it that it is 
already too late to start changing. 

AB: Okay, I think that is very clear too late. May I 

ask about the kachinas. What are the kachinas and 
what do they mean to us, today? 

Grandfathers One and Two talk back and forth in the 
Hopi Tongue. 

G2: These spirits that we talk about, are in a sense, the 
teachings but we can't go into detail of who they 

are what they are. I mean, you know, because only an 

initiated person should know about the knowledge of 
these but the only thing we can say is that they are 
spirits and that they are out there and they have their 
own home. Throughout the years, our elders of the 
different villages, you know, have been working with 
the spirits and making the prayer feathers for them and 
asking for their power to come in and bring in the rain for 
the crops because we don't have any way of irrigation our 
fields. We live in a desert area. This is a chosen area 
because the Hopi had been know to survive in an arid 
place. Hopi has been know that they would strive and 
survive, even in a desert place where there is no water 
really available for those kinds of things. So, they ask, 
through prayer, to ask their crops to survive and this is a 
strong sense of spirituality of the Hopi. 

AB: And it is to these kachinas that you pray? 

G2: Yes. They come in the form of clouds. 

AB: Would you ask Grandfather, this. Earlier we asked 
him about the Sun and he said the Sun would shift on its 
axis. There are many who think these Earth changes 

that are so imminent, now so soon will mean that 

the Earth will also change on its axis in response to what 
the Sun does. Now, the question is, is there anything in 
Hopi prophecy about changes in the pattern of the stars 


because that is what we would see after an axis change 
here on Earth? Would the stars look different? 

Grandfathers One and Two converse. 

G2: Yes, he believes that the axis of the Earth itself will 

change, also shift.. ..and that will cause a lot of Earth 

changes, itself, also. About the stars that you mentioned, 
there have been a lot of stories about these things and 
they pertain to a lot of what happened with the stars, 
too. He says he doesn't know exactly but ifs true that a 
lot of what happened with the stars and different 
things, .the patterns .... are true and now they talk about 
these things as just like stories and like fairy tale stores 
but most of them are true. He doesn't know exactly what 
will take place out there, again, if that should every 

AB: Alright. Would you ask Grandfather to give us some 
few things that we should all watch and look for to 

happen in the next say 18 months or year and a 


Grandfathers One and Two confer. 

G2: Okay, he says that these earthquakes are imminent 
but there is no real date as to when these will take place. 
That big earthquake that was supposed to hit California 
had been altered, in a way, by the Tibetans who had 

heard about that and they did a lot of prayers there and 
they helped in altering the intensity of the earthquake 
that took place in California. That is, you know, 
something that we should look for is a large earthquake 
that would take place. Ifs going to be real big. Ifs going 
to be devastating. 

AB: Alright, we are running out of time and I would like 
to say it has been a very, very great honor and you will 
need to translate once we're off, for me, to have you and 
to have Grandfather One and Grandmother on the 
program, this morning. I would hope that; someday, if 
we have the time, that we could do this, again. It has 
been a very great honor and this message has gone out to 
many, many millions of people and we will all hope that 
the message is heard and that 

somebody individually many somebodies will 

begin to make changes. We will pray for this. I want to 
thank you for being on the air with me, this morning. So, 
after we're off, will you translate all that for 
G randfather? 

G2: Okay. 

AB: Again for all your help, I want to thank you so very, 
very much. 

G2: Okay, thank you again for having us on your show. 


Statement by Martin Gashweseoma in Maniwaki, Quebec November 29, 1998 

This is a statement given by Hopi Traditional Elder Martin Gashweseoma in Maniwaki, Quebec on 
Sunday, November 29, 1998 during ceremonies honoring Anishnabe Elder William Commanda. 
The speech was video-taped by the request of Grandfather Commanda, and it is with his 
permission that the following transcript was made. This statement was made on the second day of 
ceremonies, and followed a presentation of the Wampum Belts by Grandfather Commanda. 
Arvol Looking Horse spoke following Grandfather Gashweseoma. 

Grandfather Gashweseoma's statement was made in Hopi and was translated by his son-in-law 
Emery Holmes. Unfortunately, the sound quality of the recording is very poor, and some portions 
of Emery's translation are unintelligible. These sections are shown in parentheses (---). 
Sometimes a word is shown in parenthesis indicating it is possible - but not certain - to be the 
word Emery used. Words or phrases that were emphasized are shown in italics. 

The audience consisted of about three hundred people, at least half of whom were residents of 
Grandfather's home reserve: Kitigen Zibi Anishnabeg. 

We all started out as one people at the beginning. Even 
you who are sitting among all the rest of you out there 
(and here). Right now we are ail different from one 
another because of our language, because of our dress 
clothes, because of our hair. But that don't make no 
difference, because we came from one at the beginning. 
That's where we were all given our different dress codes, 
our different hair styles, our foods, what we are to live 
with. This was all given to us. So we all have different 
foods that we live with. The people up north here live 
with the salmon, and the caribou. Down south we live 
with the com, the vegetables. Very seldom do we go out 
and kill a four legged. Most of our food supplies, com, 
beans, you know, the different vegetables. But these were 
all given to each one of us; we were given these things at 
the beginning. 

So don't lose faith in your teachings, what you've 
learned, daily, and from what your eiders teach you. 
Don't lose faith in these things because we are still going 
further into this future which is not very much left of it. 
We are very close to it. That is the teachings that are 
going to be your basic tools, necessities so you can go into 
the next millennium. 

We've all made our commitments with the 
Creator at the beginning. What the Creator had, what 
he worked with, how he lived his life. This was one of 
the things that he gave to us. He gave us this when he 
said that we were able to live under the same ample 
rules. They were very ample There was no 
complications then, because all he had was his planting 
stick, and his- and these seeds. And we did make a 
commitment there that we would abide by these rules, 
laws of the Creator. But (with all that ignorance and 
greed) that we have, we've walked away from these 
teachings. We were never really given the full right to 

the land. We were never really given this, because the 
Creator told us that we had other plans. We had other 
things on our minds. And he never chose anyone to be the 
leader. He said at the beginning that there are too many 
already out there who wish to be the leader. So now 
with this- with these (too many) people out there (when 
we say) there are too many chiefs, not enough Indians. 
That's what was already known by the Creator. So we 
have walked away from these teachings. We didn't 
abide by those things. We walked away. 

So look back on your past Look back at your cultures (and 
its) visions. Look back and realize for yourselves where 
you went wrong, what you can repair. And listen to your 
elders, what they teach you. And if you don't know it ask 

What we went through in the past, (there is so) much 
that our elders have gone through. Through depression. 
(They lived) hard times. And what lies ahead in the 
future for all of us is even more worse. And if you think 
that these are just slogans, well you better start praying 
that you don't live to see it. 

There are actually two paths that we are- that are in 
front of us. But there is also another, which is the third. 
We consider this third one a choice. The two paths: one is 
a path for all evil and all those that walk that evil way 
- they walk this path. And there is a true path: the 
path of honesty, the path of humbleness. The path that 
the Creator gives to all of us, that we are supposed to 
follow. The third path is for those that don't know 
which way to go. That are lost. Because they see some 
things on the evil path, which are deceptions. They pull 
you away from the true path. The true path, the humble 
path, the simple path. That simple path is a hard road. 
Its a rugged road. Its not so much as a path that is 


walkable. You have to (go through) a lot. A lot of hard 
time, a lot of insults. Places where you think it isn't 
possible to cross. But there is always a possibility when 
you believe in the Creator. (The other) path, with lies 

and deception, is a smooth path. ( 

out there.) The one in the middle you (can't) make a 
choice there. And that is not even a path, because you 
don't know which way to go. And at the end, you will not 
be (accepted either) because that path is only going to 
lead you to the other path, the smooth path. Because 
your heart, and your mind, and your soul, is undecided. 
And we can't pull you to that true path, the humble path, 

the simple path. We can't force you ( ). That's a 

choice that you have to make by yourselves. That's a 
choice that should have been made a long time ago. 

As I have said earlier, this land is not really rightfully 
ours-yet. At the beginning (when we made that) 
agreement with the Creator. So now, there is a lot of 
work being done (up there,) a lot of things that are being 
worked on. Many things are being pushed on to the native 
people. They say that they are not living the right way. 
It's like their sewers that are pushed on you. They say 
they're living unsanitary lives. And the electricity, also 
coming into your villages. That is destroying you. These 
are- are some of the things that are pushed upon us. And 
we have been fighting these things for some time, at our 
own home (we've been trying to fight.) Because we don't 
want these accommodations coming in. Because the 
government has its own way of taking over land. And once 
this line get in, it becomes a network. And (when that — 
-) network (fully covers) the whole village - the area 
where you are living - it becomes like a rug. And that rug 
can be pulled out from underneath you. 

Like I said, all these things - our beliefs - we try to fight 
for these things. And from way back, everything that 
was being forced upon us, we tried to resist. But many of us 
were dragged around - literally speaking, We were 

around because we didn't want to go to school. They 
dragged us there. 

That is what I have gone through. I ( ) live 

this kind of life. I was dragged around, too. And that's 
one of my reasons -because of my beliefs - that I did not 
want my children to go to school either. I did not want 

them to be (educated ), So they took them from 

us too. And I have learned a little - very little - of the 
English language. So I can speak fluently with you if I 
need to. 

So with that, I .never had a job. I never had a paying job 
anywhere in the white man's world. Like any 
employment of any kind, anywhere. The only 
employment was my own. I employed myself in my fields 
which was taught to us in our way to survive. I raised 
sheep. I herded sheep to provide the meat for my family. 

So we really haven't seen what lies in- in the future for 
us; what lies at the end there. But from what the elders 
talk about, they say we're going to see starvation at the 

end. So I (want ). (I want all you people) to 

store food away, get ready, because it's coming. 

So don't waste your food. Even if it's- if you had it for 
lunch or for dinner, reboil it. You can have it the next day 
again. It will never go stale on you if you keep boiling it. 

So store your food away. Bury it because that's what we 
were taught. In a safe place, where it's easily accessible. 
But don't let anybody know where you buried it. That's 
how bad it is going to get. Even your neighbors. Even your 
friends. Because this is something you're (keeping) for 
yourself and your family: how to survive. It will 
become that bad. Because the elders have seen this 
happen before. They stole from (each other). And if you 
find somebody stealing your food because you let 
somebody else know, you are not going to survive. A lot is 
at stake (here ). 

Again, I would like to (emphasize) the point to put the 
food away, not waste it. We'll go through - what the 
elders say - about two months, two moons, of this stage 
where we will not even be able to go outside of our own 
homes. We're going to get stuck in there. You're going to 
have to find a way of getting to that food that you have 
stored away. But do it in a way when nobody else is 

There is a lot that is still in store for us. We don't mean to 
be scaring you, or anything, but that is the way it is. 
That's how it is. There is much that will happen. What 
you're seeing is only the 

forefront of the storm. You're seeing volcanic activity. 
You're seeing some flooding. You have witnessed through 
the window - what you call the television - what 
happened down in South America, down in Mexico (— 
). You've seen many people go. This is only the forefront 
of the storm. They're going to get bigger. They will 
intensify. Last year - of this - what you have seen - is 
only a warning sign. It was telling you to get ready - 
when you had the big freeze - you know what you all 
went through. 8 

So all of these are warnings. And what will appear 
before you are signs that are going to wake you up - open 
your eyes. They he before you. Every step you take, and 
every move you make, it's going to be a sign there. Read 
the signs. Learn to read those things. They're out there. 

* This is a reference to the severe Ice Storm which struck Canada 
early in 1998. All over Canada utilities, services and 
transportation were shut down for weeks. Residents of Maniwaki 
reported that their food stores were without stock for three 


So if by chance any- anybody out there will absorb this - 
fully » into their hearts, into their mind, into their soul, 

we'll be forever grateful to you because you are ( 


I used to never believe what the elders talked about when 
I was young. They talked about all of these things. All 
the things that are happening now. They used to talk 
about these things. They said that there will come a day 
when these will start to happen. But from way back, it 
wasn't this bad. They didn't go through those things 
from the start. And all of a sudden, things start to 
change. And now that I am seeing many of the things 
that the elders talked about, I believe in my heart that it 
is true what was taught to me. So I stand here before you 
teaching the same things that's been (taught to me). The 
same things that were told to me by my elders and by my 

As you all may be aware, there are- there are many 
places throughout the world that you see writings on the 
walls. The petroglyphs. These were put there from way 
back because our people were told to leave the signs 
behind. To leave some of the prophecies behind, so that 
they will be there as proof and evidence of what we went 
through, and where we are headed. And the elders used 
to talkabout that, that some day the rock will speak. 
And that is exactly what these petroglyphs are doing. If 

a person knows what that writing is about, ( 

) speaking to you, because you can interpret the story 

of the wall, if you are able to. 

We have listened to the elders a lot - from way back - 
what they talked about. What lies in the future. But 

many of us are afraid ( ), We have fear in our 

hearts. But we have to set aside these fears, in order that 
we can move on forward. Because we have to look at our 
younger generations that are yet to come. They may not 
see it-they may not see all of it. We may not even see 
some of (the elements) that are supposed to come in 
because we are so close to that time. 

All these teachings that we do, that we share, with 

people all (over) - all the elders ( ) have great 

teachings, not just us. (But other) elders - like William - 
and other elders. That go out of their way to do this 
where they could be doing something else with 
themselves, productive, being productive. But they go out 
of their way to go out, to give hope, to (serve) the peace 
and to (spread) their religions, their knowledge. That 
whosoever out there has the heart and the courage will 
answer their prayer and help (us get)- and help the rest 

of the world by (taking a ) out into the next 


All these teachings that we are talking about here today. 
I'm speaking also to the gentleman who is video-taping 
this - if you have intentions of selling this, you have to 
think twice. Don't make profit from this. Because these 

were the teachings from the elders. Prophecy is not to be 
sold. It is like the land. We do not sell that land. 
Because it is still not rightfully ours. We are keepers, we 
are caretakers. We are watching this land for the 

Creator. That was ( — ) we made with the 

Creator. Let us leave it that way. 

Like I said, this land isn't for sale. The prophecies aren't 

for sale. (We didn't come — — ). What we 

(made ~~~ ~~~ ) as one people. And the elders know 

(me-- _) that one day, we would become greedy. We're 
going to have to have some loose change in our pockets. 
Because we have become so attached to the face value of 
that metal, that little piece of paper with these numbers 
on it. But soon that little paper is going to phase out. It 
will become obsolete. 

And again I will say, if there is someone out there who 
will take all of this into consideration - all the words, 
all the (many things) that have been received. And your 
heart is in the right place. That person will take us into 
the next millennium, because that person will have the 
pure heart. That's what it's going to take. One that has 
not been infected with greed or anything else like that. 
The elders talked about this. They said that there is 
going to be someone -it could be anybody, any walk It 
doesn't necessarily have to be a Hopi. It can be anybody. 
It can even be a child. It can even be an infant. An infant 

is the best one because that's so pure. ( — -— — - 

). They're innocent. 

Like I said earlier, the path, the wide path, the smooth 
path - there is too much out there that's pulling us (— • 

)_ But we were taught not to go to that. But 

we (have fallen). We fell down by going to that side. So 
it's very bleak; it's very hard to see just where we are 
(getting ourselves right now). But just remember, try to 

keep your heart the way you want to (— )'. Because 

it is your own heart - what it's telling you. Follow your 
own heart. That's ( to do the right thing). 

We went through this - same things - in the prior world. 
The world before this one. And the people in that world 
went through the same things - what is happening with 
us here again. And we were told not to fall again back 
into the same trend. Not to make the same mistakes. But 
we have fallen, because of the strong pull of the other 

So with these teachings that we have left to you, take 
care of your lives, take care of your house. In the same 
way that I do. I go out and make my prayers almost every 
morning. And do the same. Make your prayers. When I 
make my prayers, it is not only for myself, but all my 
friends that I have come to know. Those that have 
become very close with (us). And there are many out 
there. So I want you all to do your prayers. Ask for 
forgiveness, ask for (good health). Ask that you see the 


light at the end of the tunnel. For (we [he?]) will be the 
light wherever (we [he?]) goes. 

This is not my mind, not my thinking. This is not my 
words. These are the words of the elders from way back. 
I am only speaking for them. What was spoken to them 

before their time. And I ( — ) also again 

emphasize to you to (get out) and do your prayers. 

I would like to take this time to thank you again for 
allowing us to speak to you. And (— just a little bit — 
- to tell you) that yes there is that time of purification. 
But we all know that there is life after death. We will 
be reincarnated. In our beliefs, the woman has four 
reincarnations. The man has two. So make good use of it, 
men. (The audience laughs at this aside by Emery) 

Again I would like to express my thanks to all of you for 
giving us the time. There is so much to talk about. We 

could sit up here all day and all night ( ). 

But there are others that need to speak also. We'll give 
them this time. Thank you again. 

Emery concludes with remarks of his own: 

And thank you (again) for letting me speak in front of you 
for myself. And I would like to thank my Father-in-law 
for giving me the honor of being his interpreter and, you 

know, giving me the wisdom that I ( know) and 

the knowledge. Because before I met him and his 

daughter, his family, I guess I was ( — ). 

I didn't (know anything). I was not so (cool), you know. 
There was nothing up there. {Emery points to his head.} 
There was an empty shell up there. (Pretty much, you 
know.) But now, I feel there is something in there, a little 
bit. When I shake my head, it rattles. {Laughter} Maybe 
it has something in there. At least it rattles, you know. 
So I would like to, you know, express my thanks to my 
Father-in-law for allowing me to do this for him. Urn. I 

know ("" I learned). But I'm grateful (--- 

"~ """ — ) because it gives me an opportunity to (see) 
all of you. And also to speak to- speak to you from my 
heart. And I don't even understand what I'm talking 
about, really, you know, otherwise (I — — — — ). 
But, ah, this was taught that we were supposed to be the 
minds, the heart, the tongue, the eyes for our elders. Not 
to go against them. Not to go against their wishes. 
Because many of the elders did not want those things 
because of their beliefs. What they believe (in), what 
they fought for. We need to let them see that. So if there 
is anybody out there who is young like me, fight for them! 

The Essence of Hopi Prophecy 

Following is an excellent overview of Hopi Prophecy by Tom Tarbet. Tom spent many years 
studying with Hopi Elders, including Dan Katchongva, beg-inning in the early 1960s. Grandfather 
David Monongye, editor of the traditional newsletter Techqua Ikachi even quoted from the 
following and attributed it to Grandfather Dan Katchongva. I found this on the Internet. 



This condensed version of the Hopi Prophecy is shared 
through the work of Tom Tarbet as taken from the 
original given way by DANAGYUMTEWA. 


As caretakers of life, we affect the balance of nature 
to such a degree that our actions determine whether the 
great cycles of nature bring prosperity or disaster. Our 
present world is the unfoldment of a pattern we set in 

Our divergence from the natural balance is traced to a 
point preceding the existence of our present physical form. 
Once we were able to appear and disappear at will, but 
through our own arrogance we took our powers as 
instruments of creation for granted, and neglected the plan 
of the Creator. As a consequence we became confined to our 
physical form, dominated by a continual struggle between 
our left and right sides, the left being wise and the right 
being clever and powerful but unwise, forgetful of our 
original purpose. 


This suicidal split was to govern the entire course of 
our history through world after world. As life resources 
diminish in keeping with the cycles of nature, we would 
try to better our situation through our own inventions, 
believing that any mistakes could be corrected through 
further inventions. Through our cleverness, most of us 
would lose sight of our original purpose, become involved 
in a world of our own design, and ultimately oppose the 
order of the universe itself, becoming the mindless enemy 
of the few who would still hold the key to survival. 

In several previous worlds the majority have 
advanced their technology in this way, even beyond 
what we know today. The consequent violations against 
nature and fellow humans caused severe imbalances 
which were resolved in the form of war, social 
disintegration and natural catastrophe. 

As each world reached the brink of annihilation, 
there remained a small minority who had managed to 
live in nearly complete accord with the infinite plan, as 

implied in the name, Hopi. Toward the final stages they 
would encounter signs of disintegration within, as well as 
enticing offers and severe threats from without, aimed 
toward forcing them to join the rest of the world. 


Our common ancestors were among the small group 
who miraculously emerged from the last world as it 
reached its destruction, although they too were tainted 
with corruption. The seeds of the crisis we face today we 
brought with us when we first set foot in this world. 

Upon reaching our present world, the Hopi set out on a 
long migration to meet the Creator in the person of 
Maasaw, the caretaker of this land and all the lives upon 
it. They followed a special pattern however a serious 
omen made a separate journey necessary, in order to 
balance the extreme disorder anticipated for the latter 


A Hopi of light complexion, now called the True 
White Bother, left the group and traveled in the 
direction of the rising sun, taking with him a stone tablet 
which matches a similar tablet held by those who went 
on to meet the Maasaw at a place called Oraibi, where 
the present Hopi villages were established according to 
his instructions. 

The Hopi anticipated the arrival of a race of light- 
skinned people from the east, predicting many of their 
inventions which would serve as signs indicating stages in 
the unfoldment of the pattern of life the Hopi had 
studied from antiquity. 

It was clearly foreseen that the visitors, in their 
cleverness, may have lost sight of their original purpose, 
in which case they would be very dangerous. The Hopi 
were to watch for one who has not left the spiritual path, 
and carries the actual stone tablet. 


Through countless centuries the Hopi have previous 
worlds recalled in their ceremonies, our emergence into 
the present world, and our purpose in coming here. 
Periodically they have renewed their covenant with 
Maasaw to live the simple, humble way of life he laid 
out, and to preserve the balance of nature for the sake of 
all living things. The knowledge of world events has been 


handed down in secret religious societies who keep watch 
as each stage unfolds. 

The leaders watched especially for a series of three- 
world shaking events, to be accompanied by the 
appearance of certain symbols that describe the 
primordial forces that govern all life, from the sprouting 
of a seed to global movements such as weather, 
earthquakes, migrations and wars. 

The gourd rattle is a key symbol. The shaking of the 
gourd rattle in ceremonies means the stirring of life forces. 
On the rattle are drawn the ancient symbols of the 
swastika or meha, showing the spirals of force sprouting 
from a seed in four directions, surrounded by a ring of fire, 
showing the encircling penetration of the warmth of the 
sun, tawa, causing the seed to sprout and grow. 

The first two world-shaking events would involve 
forces portrayed by the swastika and the sun. Out of the 
violence and destruction of the first, the strongest 
elements would emerge with still greater force to produce 
the second event. When these actual symbols appeared, it 
would be clear that this stage of the prophecy was being 


Eventually a "gourd full fox ashes" would be 
invented, which if dropped from the sky, would boil the 
oceans and burn the land, causing nothing to grow for many 
years. This would be a signal for certain Hopis to reveal 
some of their teachings in order to warn the world that 
the third and final event would happen soon, and that it 
could bring an end to all life unless people correct 
themselves and their leaders in time. 

Hopi leaders now believe that the first two events 
were the first and second world wars, and the "gourd full 
fox ashes" was the atomic bomb. After the bombing of 
Hiroshima and Nagasaki, teachings formerly kept secret 
were compared and released to the world. The details 
presented here are part of those teachings. 


The final stage, called the Day of Purification, is 
described as the hatching of a "mystery egg" in which 
the forces of meha and tawa unite with a third force 
symbolized by the color red, culminating in either total 
rebirth or total annihilation — we don't yet know which, 
but the choice is ours. War and natural catastrophe may 
be involved. The degree of violence will be determined by 

the degree fox inequity caused among the peoples of the 
world and in the balance of nature. In this crisis, rich and 
poor will be forced to struggle as equals to survive. 

That it will be very violent is now taken for granted 
among Traditional Hopi, but humans may still lessen the 
violence by correcting their treatment of nature as well as 
each other. Ancient spiritually based communities, such 
as the Hopi, must be preserved, and not forced to abandon 
their way of life or the resources they have vowed to 


The Hopi play a key role in the survival of the 
human race, through their vital communion with the 
unseen forces that hold nature in balance, as an example 
of a practical alternative to the suicidal man-made 
system, and as a fulcrum of world events. The pattern is 
simple: 'The whole world will shake and turn red, and 
turn against those who are hindering the Hopi". The 
man-made system now destroying the Hopi culture is 
deeply involved in similar violations throughout the 
world. The devastating reversal predicted in the 
prophecies is part of the natural order. If those who 
thrive from that system, its money and its laws, can stop 
it from eliminating the Hopi way, then many may be 
enabled to survive the Day of Purification and enter a 
new age of peace. But if no one is left to continue the Hopi 
Way, the hope for such an age is in vain. 

The forces we must face are formidable, but the only 
alternative is annihilation. Yet the man-made system 
cannot be corrected by any means that depends on forcing 
others to do one's will, for that is the source of the 
problem. If people are to correct themselves and their 
leaders, the gulf between the two must be eliminated. To 
accomplish this, one can only rely on the energy of truth 

This approach, which is the foundation of the Hopi 
Way, is the greatest challenge a mortal can face. Few are 
likely to accept it. But once peace is established on this 
basis, and our original way of life is allowed to flourish, 
we will be able to use our inventive capacity wisely, to 
encourage rather than threaten life, and benefit everyone 
rather than enrich a few at the expense of others. Concern 
for all living things will far surpass personal concerns, 
bringing greater happiness than could formerly be 
realized. Then all living things shall enjoy lasting 


Singing the Hopi Song of Purification 

The following is an account of the singing of the Hopi song of Purification, it is told here by Roy 
(Little Sun) Stevens, Roy, who is from Indonesia, is the adopted son of Titus Qomayumptewa, a 
much-loved Elder of Hotevilla who recently passed to the spirit world. One of Titus' duties was 
Keeper of the Song of Purification, which was to be sung only once: 


Tell the world the truth about Creator's Law 

You will need to bridge the gap between worlds and 
cultures "to listen to us. We are ever strong, waiting to 
guide you. 

The great wish of Titus Qomayumptewa, a Hopi Elder, 
was like so many who wish to live freely free and happy 
- that anyone who truly wants to be a Servant of the 
Creator of All • GOD • may attain Individual 
Sovereignty under His law. "Shake the anthill (world). 
Tell the world the truth about Creator's Law," he often 
said. This global ceremony has been inspired by this 
simple Hopi farmer. As we look about our 'anthill' how 
can we deny the need to fulfill this honest desire? 

Titus, one of the Jewels of the few remaining Hopis, had a 
most important spiritual destiny. At the time of the lunar 
eclipse on May 24, 1994, Great Spirit visited Titus in his 
cabin. While the sun was setting, the cabin became filled 
with sparkling lights. The little stars finally settled 
around his head. On that evening a profound message 
came through... 

'THE TIME IS UPON US now to come forth and give of 
our knowledge to those willing to help the energies of 

The path has been constructed of many different energies 
and elements that were placed together lovingly and 
with much hardship at the time. We transformed our 
nation many times because we were learning about our new 
home. We had to change with Earth as she guided us in 
our lifestyles and our foods. We gave ourselves to Creator, 
who gave back with abundance. 

The path is now one of change. We are here in strength to 
help make that change smooth and peaceful, and assure 
that its energies are pure and its meanings are true. There 
have been - and will be again • great times of despair at 
the loss of culture, as those who resist change fight to 
hold on. 

undergo change now and then, which is important, but the 
Hopi Way remains in the land, rocks trees, animals, and 
all features of true creation. They all tell the story of the 

It is not limited to the Hopis either. The chance to change 
is everywhere now. Many avenues of discovery lead to 
the same conclusion. You will need to take time to listen. 

The Hopi culture as it was is gone, but there are many 
wonderful things that can be created from that. Listen to 
the wind for direction, ask the fields for assistance. Feel 
the beating of the Hopi heart in everything you do, 
everything you feel, everything you touch, everything 
you say. You can have the magic we once shared. It is still 
there and always will be. 

Be peaceful and trusting in your endeavors. We fought for 
many years to have peace for our people. We have 
presented ourselves to many who are able to maintain, 
and carry forth into the lives of the people, the peace we 
fought for. The history of our civilization is written in 
the earth, and anyone who gives of themselves to Creator 
can use this knowledge for Earth and her evolution. 

We commend and comfort those who are powerful in their 
work to reunite, and we support and guide those wanting 
to make peaceful changes. There are several in your 
community who are holders of the knowledge. They are 
able to bring forth the message you strive for. They will 
surface at the right time. 

Be not afraid of the future outcome. Focus only on what 
can be achieved right now, the fighting between nations 
will need to stop before order can be restored. 

The beginning of the next phase will come in three cycles 
of the moon. You will have new direction, new focus, and 
new guidance. Be at peace with yourself and listen for our 
calling. The course is changing and the path is widening. 
There is much global concern for the return to purity, and 
the time is upon us to help activate the energy that can 
bring this return. 

You will see changes in the community, the people you 
meet, and in the children. They may be confused at times 
as to why they feel a certain way, and want to know their 
history. Let them experience $iis, for tney will be the 
ones who help bring forth the new Hopi light. 

Be patient, but be strong. Guide and assist those who 
choose to help. KNOW WE ARE WITH YOU!" 

Exactly three moon cycles later, a man in Maine had a 
serious dream. In the vision he went to the underworld 


and heard an old man singing a most sacred, ancient song. 
Half way through singing it, the old man suddenly 
stopped, but Rusty (the dreamer) heard the rest of the 
song. When he woke up he felt a strong desire to find the 
old man and give him the last part of the song. He 
wondered who the old man was. How would he find him? 
Does he even exist? 

Rusty consulted with a seer and was told to find Titus at 
Hopiland. Without hesitation he made the drive west, 
and was guided straight to Titus' farm. Upon arriving, 
Rusty conveyed his dream to Titus and delivered the rest 
of the song. Titus smiled and nodded happily. Indeed, 
four years earlier, at a Hotevilla meeting that was full of 
conflict between the "progressives" and the 
"traditionals", Titus had, at the beginning of the 
meeting, begun to sing. Ail Hopis present became panicked 
and urged Titus to stop singing. It was the long-awaited 
Purification Song that calls upon the Higher Forces, and 
is meant to be sung only once. "Stop singing Titus, it is not 
time yet. Stop, Stop, Stop!" But he didn't heed, and he 
kept on until he was half way through the song. Suddenly 
he stopped. 

On August 22,1994, at the full moon, the Purification Song 
became complete. At almost the same time the long- 
prophesied White Buffalo was born! 


Titus fulfilled his destiny and passed on one month later 
(September 28,1994, on the birth day of Grandmother 
Caroline, Titus' very close clan sister). The next day a 
river of cotton clouds coming from the direction of the 
sacred San Francisco Peaks streamed light over Titus' 

grave, moving toward the East At the same time, with 
the rising sun a small cloud rose over the horizon and 
joined with the oncoming clouds. 

On the fourth day after Titus' departure to the spirit 
world, Rusty had a Stone Lodge Ceremony at his home in 
Maine. He didn't know yet of Titus' passing, but he 
noticed something very strange and powerful happening 
during the ceremony. The gourd rattle given to him by 
Titus suddenly moved over the hot stones and kept 
rattling • and not by any physical hand. It rattled until 
the contents broke out. The next day after the lodge was 
dismantled, three waves of seven hawks each flew over 
the lodge into the southwest direction. 


. ..a special ceremony was held at Titus' cabin. There it 
was decided to use his moccasins in an East/ West Union 
Ceremony. Onemoccasin was to be placed at the 
Mountain, Fuji in Japan. On the day of the completion of 
the prophesied Atlantic/Pacific Cross American Walk, 
confirmation was given that the moccasin found its 
destiny on Mt. Fuji. Now the connection of the "extreme 
West" and "extreme East" must be globally advanced: 
The global participation in this is of great importance. 

The East relates to the ancient past, the West relates to 
the present modem world. Now is the time for the end of 
the great experiment that has encompassed these two 
worlds, and the RETURN must be undertaken. This means 
that the East/West Union is of cardinal importance. It is 
the bringing together of all that has been learned 
throughout history up to this time from both "extremes". 


Birth of the White Buffalo Calf 

Following is an article written about the White Buffalo Calf Prophecy and the birth of the 
prophesied White Buffalo Calf. This comes from the internet web site "Morgana's Observatory" 
(http: / / morgana/ index.htm), an excellent source of a wide variety of 
prophetic material. 

The White Buffalo 

Mirade By Tom Laskin, Isthmus Newspaper, Madison, 

Wl; Nov. 25-Dec. 1,1994 

'To tell the truth, the first time I looked out there, I saw 
a million dollars," says Janesville farmer Dave Heider as 
he watches Miracle, the white buffalo calf held sacred 
by Native Americans, chew contentedly on a mouthful of 

"But once I saw how much this little calf means to so 
many people, I couldn't see charging money for people to 
come and look at her. I mean how can you put a price on 
something that's sacred and holy? You know, if God 
meant for me to be a millionaire, I would have won the 

Notes Dave Heider, "We made the front page of papers 
seven days in a row when O.J. didn't" 

Naturally, an assortment of wealthy collectors and 
modern-hay Bamums have also shown an interest in the 
calf. But the H eiders haven't tried to make money off the 
calf. Dave still drives a truck for the county (he'll go up 
to a 164iour day when the snow begins to fall) and Val 
hasn't quit her janitor job. The couple has gotten into a 
little merchandising, but profits from postcards and T- 
shirts sold at the farm during weekend visiting hours go 
into a trust fund that will be used to maintain the calf and 
pay for such other expenses as the 9,000- volt electric 
fence that guards Miracle and the rest of the H eiders' 13- 
buffalo herd. 

The Heiders knew from contacts in the bison industry that 
their calf was unusual; in fact, the Wisconsin Farmer and 
The Beloit Daily News both did stories about its birth. 
But it was only after the story got wider distribution that 
they learned Miracle was held sacred by buffalo-hunting 
Plains Indians, including the Lakota and the Cheyenne. 

The story hit the news wire on Wednesday, and the first 
Native Americans were here on Thursday," recalls 
Heider. "I think they were Oneida. They came from 
Black River Falls. We were up by the calf with some 
people and these Native Americans had been waiting for 
an hour, an hour and half. They asked our permission to 
see the calf and also pray to it and leave an offering." 

News of the calf spread quickly through the Native 
American community because its birth fulfilled a 2,000- 

year-old prophecy of northern Plains Indians. Joseph 
Chasing Horse, traditional leader of the Lakota nation, 
that 2,000 years ago a young woman who first appeared in 
the shape of a white buffalo gave the Lakotas' ancestors 
a sacred pipe and sacred ceremonies and made them 
guardians of the Black Hills. Before leaving, she also 
promised that one day she would return to purify the 
world, bringing back spiritual balance and harmony; the 
birth of a white buffalo calf would be a sign that her 
return was at hand. 

Owen Mike, who's in line to succeed his 90-year-old 
father, Thomas, as head of the Ho-Chunk (Winnebago) 
buffalo clan, says his people have a slightly different 
interpretation of the white calf's significance. He adds, 
however, that the Ho-Chunk version of the prophecy 
also stresses the return of harmony, both in nature and 
among all peoples. . 

"Its more of a blessing from the Great Spirit;" Mike 
explains. "It's a sign. This white buffalo is showing us 
that everything is going to be okay." 

Despite her enormous spiritual and cultural significance, 
Miracle isn't scientifically important UW-Madison 
geneticist Dr. Richard Sprite, an expert in albinism and 
other pigmentation disorders, disputes news reports that 
the odds of a white buffalo being born are less than one in 
10 million. 

"In humans, the frequency of albinism in most populations 
is about one in 15,000, which turns out to be a pretty handy 
number for buffalo because the estimated number of them 
in the U.S. is something around 150,000. That means, that 
any given time, if the frequency of albinism in buffalo is 
similar to that in humans, there ought to be 10 white 
buffalo out there. And if there's some other way to have a 
white buffalo, there ought to be more." 

So while the American Bison Association says the last 
documented white buffalo died in 1959, Spritz says the 
person who alerted him to Miracle's birth has tracked 
down six living white buffalo. r He also notes that a 
stuffed white buffalo has stood in Harvard's Peabody 
Museum for years. (There's always some question whether 
a white buffalo is actually part cow, and therefore a 
beefalo. Dave Heider says he will allow Miracle's DNA 
to be examined in March, when its time for her to be 
inoculated against various diseases.) 


But even if other white buffalo have been bom in modem 
times, Miracle holds special significance for Native 
Americans. She's female, and the bull that sired her 
died, just as in the prophecy. And, while recent visitors to 
the Heider farm are sometimes disappointed that the 
calf's head has turned brown and its body is now a silvery 
tan, versions of the prophecy state that the white buffalo 
calf would change colors four times, thus signifying the 
colors of the four peoples she would unify: black, red, 
yellow, and white. 

Joseph Chasing Horse, in a phone interview from his 
home in Rapid City, S.D., adds that winter counts 
-which date the telling of the White Buffalo Calf 
Woman story in sacred ceremonies-confirm that this is 
the buffalo calf of the prophecy. 

Moreover, the birth of Miracle on the Heider farm 
coincides with increased economic stability (thanks in 
large part to profits from Indian gaming) and cultural 
rejuvenation among Native Americans. For example, the 
Ho-Chunk (who this month received federal permission 
to restore their original name) have used gaming profits 
to establish Ho-Chunk language programs in their 
summer camp for teenage children and in four new Head 
Start centers. The tribe has also reacquired a tract of land 
that includes sacred sites on the lower Wisconsin River. 

Larry Johns, a member of the Oneida tribe who works to 
preserve Indian mounds and other sacred sites, stresses 
the cultural importance of such recent discoveries as the 
Gottschall Rock Shelter in Iowa County, which includes a 
rock painting from CE 900 that tells a story still told by 
Ho-Chunk elders. 

"My father and grandfather went to Indian schools, and 
they were beaten for speaking their language," says 
Johns, who along with fellow Oneida and representatives 
of other tribes has helped put together the new Native 
American Council of Madison, a group dedicated to 
promoting cultural awareness. They tried to beat the 
Indian out of us. Ifs imperative that we go back to these 
stories and find out what they mean to us -- and who we 

And how does Miracle fit into all of this? Says Johns, 
'There's so little understanding of Native American 
issues and ideas that any opportunity to get people 
interested - even if ifs just coming to see a white buffalo 
calf - is a good thing." 

Johns admits that seeing a key Indian prophecy fulfilled 
at a white couple's farmette on the banks of the Rock 
River at first seemed a bit bizarre. But the Heiders' 
eagerness to accommodate the people who came to pray to 
the calf eased his mind. 

"Initially I was wondering: Why in Janesville?" says 
Johns, who rotates with other Indians in providing 

security for the calf during visiting hours. The place still 
has problems with the KKK. And, you know, ifs just not 
the friendliest of places. Just about anybody else would be 
charging five, 10 bucks." 

Dave Heider was impressed by the beauty of buffalo 
when he and Val got their first good look at a bull a few 
years ago at an exotic animal sale in Michigan. But the 
couple didn't get into buffalo farming because of romantic 
visions erf the Great Plains turned black by enormous bison 

"We got into it more or less for retirement;" Dave 
explains. "Something to fall back on, a little extra 

"And the meat's very low in cholesterol," adds Val, a 
buffalo booster who echoes her husband's pragmatic take 
on buffalo farming. "You know, ifs the only animal that 
doesn't get cancer." 

But the buffalo isn't just a food source for Native 
Americans. Especially for the Plains Indians, it has 
always been a living, breathing sacrament. Unlike the 
soldiers and Wild Westerners who hunted North 
America's 60 million head herd to the brink of extinction 
in the 1890s, the Lakota and other Plains Indians never 
wasted any portion of the buffalo they killed. The 
buffalo provided them with food, shelter, clothing -- all 
the essentials of life. It was also a central part of their 
spiritual lives, and the hunt itself was a ceremony. 

The Ho-Chunk hope to raise a herd on part of the 600- 
acre parcel they've purchased, with profits from their 
three casinos, on the lower Wisconsin River. And, along 
with renewed interest on the part of young people in their 
native languages and sacred ways, the rebirth of the 
buffalo herds is strengthening cultural awareness. 

But building herds is an ongoing process, and Joseph 
Chasing Horse says much more must be done to protect the 
buffalo and their North American habitat: 

"I would like to see something put into place where [the 
buffalo] would be able to regenerate their herds and be 
given more of their aboriginal migrating territory," he 
says. "Since the disappearance of the buffalo migration, 
we have felt the ecological impact that it is having upon 
the land. With the disappearance of the buffalo, there 
are certain medicines that no longer grow, and the Great 
Plains are being turned back into a desert)" 

In recent years, non-Indians have also come to realize the 
profound influence of buffalo on the health of the land. A 
South Dakota ranch manager quoted in the National 
Geographies recent cover story on the American buffalo 
says wider migrations could help solve water- 
management problems because the buffalo's sharp hooves 


break up the soil and improve its ability to hold 

Buffalo can live for nearly 40 years, which means the 
Heiders are likely to form much stronger bonds with the 
Native Americans they've come to know since August. 
And while the number of visitors who still trek to the 
farm to see Miracle has decreased since the weather got 
cold and her winter coat began to darken, Dr. Sprite and 
others say warmer weather may renew her whiteness. 
That second miracle of coloration would undoubtedly 
bring a second wave of attention to the calf and occasion 
more pilgrimages. 

No matter what happens to Miracle in the coming months 
and years, Joseph Chasing Horse says the birth is a sign 
from the Great Spirit and the ensuing age of harmony and 
balance it represents cannot be revoked. That doesn't 
mean that the severe trials Native Americans have 
endured since the arrival of Europeans on these shores are 

over. Indeed, the Lakota nation mounted the longest court 
case in U.S. history in an unsuccessful effort to regain 
control of the Black Hills, the sacred land on which the 
White Buffalo Calf Woman appeared 2,000 years ago. 

Still, despite their ongoing struggles, Native Americans 
are heartened by the appearance of a white buffalo in 
Janesville, and have hope for a harmonious? and 

"Mention that we are praying, many of the medicine 
people, the spiritual leaders, the elders, are praying for 
the world," says Joseph Chasing Horse. "We are praying 
that mankind does wake up and think about the future, 
for we haven't just inherited this earth from our 
ancestors, but we are borrowing it from our unborn 

Copyright 1994, Isthmus Publishing. 


The Story of the White Buffalo Calf Woman 

Following is the story of how White Buffalo Calf Woman brought the pipe to the Lakota and 
sacred ceremonies to the Lakota. It is told by Joseph Chasing Horse who was in the Lakota 
delegation to the UN Cry of the Earth conference in 1993. This comes from the internet web site 
"Morgana's Observatory" (http: / / morgana/ index.htm), an excellent source 
of a wide variety of prophetic material. 

We Lakota people have a prophecy about the white 
buffalo calf. How that prophecy originated was that we 
have a sacred bundle, a sacred peace pipe, that WcIS 
brought to us about 2,000 years ago by what we know as 
the White Buffalo Calf Woman. 

The story goes that she appeared to two warriors at that 
time. These two warriors were out hunting buffalo, 
hunting for food in the sacred Black Hills of South 
Dakota, and they saw a big body coming toward them. 
And they saw that it was a white buffalo calf. As it came 
closer to them, it turned into a beautiful young Indian girl. 

That time one of the warriors thought bad in his mind, 
and so the young girl told him to step forward. And when 
he did step forward, a black cloud came over his body, 
and when the black cloud disappeared, the warrior who 
had bad thoughts was left with no flesh or blood on his 
bones. The other warrior kneeled and began to pray. 

And when he prayed, the white buffalo calf who was 
now an Indian girl told him to go back to his people and 
warn them that in four days she was going to bring a 
sacred bundle. 

So the warrior did as he was told. He went back to his 
people and he gathered all the elders and all the leaders 
and all the people in a circle and told them what she had 
instructed him to do. And sure enough, just as she said she 
would, on the fourth day she came. 

She taught them seven sacred ceremonies. 

One of them was the sweat lodge, or the purification 
ceremony. One of them was the naming ceremony, child 
naming. The third was the healing ceremony. The fourth 
one was the making of relatives or the adoption 
ceremony. The fifth one was the marriage ceremony. The 
sixth was the vision quest. And the seventh was the 
Sundance ceremony, the people' s ceremony for all of the 

She brought us these seven sacred ceremonies and taught 
our people the songs and the traditional ways. She 
instructed our people that as long as we performed these 
ceremonies we would always remain caretakers and 
guardians of sacred land. 

When she was done teaching all our people, she left the 
way she came. She went out of the circle, and as she was 
leaving she turned and told our people that she would 
return one day for the sacred bundle. And she left the 
sacred bundle, which we still have to this very day. 

The sacred bundle is known as the White Buffalo Calf 
Pipe because it was brought by the White Buffalo Calf 
Woman. It is kept in a sacred place (Green Grass) on the 
Cheyenne River Indian reservation in South Dakota. It's 
kept by a man who is known as the keeper of the White 
Buffalo Calf Pipe, ArvoJ Looking Horse. 

They say a cloud came down from the sky, and off of the 
cloud stepped the white buffalo calf. As it rolled onto the 
earth, the calf stood up and became this beautiful young 
woman who was carrying the sacred bundle in her hand. 

As she entered into the circle of the nation, she sang a 
sacred song and took the sacred bundle to the people who 
were there to take of her. She spent four days among our 
people and taught them about the sacred bundle, the 
meaning of it. 

When White Buffalo Calf Woman promised to return 
again, she made some prophecies at that time. 

One of those prophecies was that the birth of a white 
buffalo calf would be a sign that it would be near the time 
when she would return again to purify the world. What 
she meant by that was that she would bring back 
harmony again and balance, spiritually. 

Traditional Story copyright Joseph Chasing Horse, 1995. 


Jewish Prophecy: The birth of the Red Heifer 

Did you know that the Jewish people have a prophecy about the birth of a sacred red cm? Or that 
the prophesied Heifer has been born? There are many remarkable parallels between the Hopi 'and 
Jewish peoples. This connection is between Jewish and Lakota prophecy. I find it very interesting 
that the Red race has a white buffalo while the White race has a red heifer. It seems the colors red 
and white are prominent during this time. In ancient Egypt great significance was placed on the 
uniting of Lower Egypt (representing our lower, corporeal selves and symbolized by the color Red) 
with Upper Egypt (representing our higher, non-corporeal selves and symbolized by the color 

This comes from the internet web site The Temple Mount in Jerusalem" 

(http:/ /www.templemountorg/) which has a great deal of information relating to Jewish attempts 

to build the prophesied Third Temple of Jerusalem. 



The birth of a red heifer (cow) in a farm in the religious 
youth village of Kfar Hasidim (near Haifa) has excited 
sectors in the religious community. A delegation of some 
25 experts, including Rabbis Yisrael Ariel and Yoseph 
Elboim, visited the farm last week to examine the six- 
month old cow, and concluded that it is in fact an 
acceptable red heifer, according to Torah requirements. 
However, the cow must be at least two years old before it 
can be used. Until then, the cow will be carefully watched 
to ensure that nothing occurs to invalidate its status. 
According to Biblical law, the cow's ashes are used for 
purification from certain forms of impurity, and is 
therefore a prerequisite for the renewal of Holy Temple 
service. (Arutz-7 News: Tuesday, March 18,1997) 


The birth of a red heifer in Israel is being hailed by 
religious Jews as a sign from God that work can soon begin 
on building the Third Temple in Jerusalem. A team of 
rabbinical experts last week confirmed that the animal, 
born six months ago on a religious kibbutz near the north 
Israeli port of Haifa, meets the correct Biblical criteria 
for a genuine holy cow. According to the Book of Numbers 
(XIX: 2-7), the animal is needed for an ancient Jewish 
purification ritual. 

"Speak unto the children of Israel that they bring thee a 
red heifer without spot, wherein is no blemish, and upon 
which never came yoke," 

says the fourth book of the Old Testament; also part of 
Jewish holy scripture, the Torah. The heifer will be 
slaughtered and burned, and its ashes made into a liquid 
paste and used in a ceremony which religious Jews believe 

they must undergo before they can enter the old Temple 
site in Jerusalem to start building a new structure. 

Since Herod's Temple was destroyed by the Roman 
emperor Titus in AD 70, no flawless red heifer has been 
bom within the biblical land of Israel, according to 
rabbinical teaching. The birth of the animal, to a black- 
and-white mother and a dun-colored bull, is being hailed 
as a "miracle" by activists who want to rebuild the Third 
Temple and prepare the way for the Jewish messiahs 
entry to Jerusalem. 

The faithful will need to wait until the heifer is at least 
three before it can be used in a ritual sacrifice. That 
would enable religious Jews to start the new millennium 
(a Christian event, but still regarded as portentous) in a 
state of purity. News of the red heifer's appearance, 
however, will not be well received by Muslims. The site 
of the old Jewish temples in the Holy City is now 
occupied by one of Islam's holiest shrines, the Dome of 
the Rock. Jewish extremists want to destroy the Dome and 
the adjoining Al-Aqsa mosque to make way for a new 
temple. In 1985 a group of Jewish terrorists were jailed in 
Israel for planning to destroy the Dome with high 

But Jewish activists say they regard it as their divine 
mission to build a new Temple. "We have been waiting 
2,000 years for a sign from God, and now he has provided 
us with a red heifer," said Yehudah Etzion, the 
ringleader of the Eighties' plot to blow up the Dome, who 
was present at last weeks inspection of the red heifer at 
Kfar Hassidim. There were a couple of little white 
hairs which worried us, but the rabbis are satisfied that 
it is the red heifer referred to in the Bible," said Mr. 
Etzion. (SUNDAY TELEGRAPH (London) 3/16) (Quoted 
ISRAEL ■ ISSUE 237 - 16th March 1997) 


Noted Added from Christian Discussion Group: Of all the 
sacrifices offered under the Law of Moses there was none 
quite like the Red Heifer. In its limitations and 
parallels, the Red Heifer provides valuable insights into 
the redemption which God has provided in Christ Jesus. 
A study of the Red Heifer inevitably leads to a greater 
appreciation of the words of the Apostle Paul. 

It was God Himself who chose to portray aspects of His 
great work of redemption through the Red Heifer. The 
writer to the Hebrews makes this apparent 

"For if the sprinkling of defiled persons with the blood of 
goats and bulls and with the ashes of a heifer sanctifies 
for the purification of the flesh, how much more shall 
the blood of Christ; who through the eternal Spirit 
offered himself without blemish to God, purify your 
conscience from dead works to serve the living God. " ( 
Heb. 9:13,14, RSV). 

The Red Heifer Its significance: 

a) The significance of the sacrifice: The red heifer was a 
sacrifice designed to remove defilement through contact 
with human death. It is significant that the children of 
Israel had suffered the death of 14,700 rebellious 
Israelites by a plague (Num. 16:49 )■ Under hot desert 
conditions the bodies would require immediate burial in 
graves. It was at this time that God gave the instructions 
to Moses and Aaron regarding the red heifer. The 
significance of the red heifer to cleanse from the 
defilement of death came at a most impressive time the 
connection between sin and death could hardly be more 

b) The uniqueness of the sacrifice . In all of the sacrifices 
prescribed by the Mosaic Law, there was none quite like 
the red heifer. Note the following: 

i. It is not listed with the other offerings in Leviticus or 
Exodus, but in the book of Numbers. 

ii. It was a special sin offering. A sin offering was for a sin 
- i. e., a transgression, but the red heifer was a sin offering 
when no transgression had been committed. It was offered 
for contact with the dead whether purposeful or 

iii. It was a sin offerings but it was not offered in the same 
way as the other sin offerings. The animal was 
slaughtered outside the camp, and the blood and the skin 
and the dung were all burned outside the camp. In the 
other sin offerings ( e. g. Lev. 4 ) the animal was slain 
inside the camp, the blood poured out at the base of the 
altar, and then the carcass was removed and burned 
outside the camp. 

iv. It was the only sacrifice which could be used more 
than once. Its ashes were used repeatedly until depleted. 

The instructions regarding the Red Heifer were given 
immediately after the plague in which 14,700 Israelites 
died. The association between sin and death was 
apparent. The nation was to bring the heifer, therefore it 
was a national offering. When the Lord returns, Ezekiel 
39 tells us that it is going to take seven months to bury the 
dead bodies. Thus it would seem that the latter day 
offering of a Red Heifer by the Messiah will be to 
provide cleansing for the nation as they work at cleansing 
their land from all the dead bodies in it. (Thanks to 
Larry Ellison, 

Native Prophecies by Lee Brown, Cherokee 

Following are excerpts from a talk by Lee Brown, Cherokee, at the 1986 Continental Indigenous 
Council at Fairbanks, Alaska. The audience was primarily Native Americans. This comes from 
the internet web site "Morgana's Observatory" 

(http:/ / morgana/ index.htm), an excellent source of a wide variety of 
prophetic material. 

There was the cycle of the mineral, the rock. There was 
the cycle of he plant. And now we are in the cycle of the 
animal coming to the end of that and beginning the cycle 
of the human being. When we get into the cycle of the 
human being, the highest and greatest powers that we 
have will be released to us. They will be released from 
that light or soul that we carry to the mind. But right 
now we're coming to the end of the animal cycle and we 
have investigated ourselves and learned what it is to be 
like an animal on this earth. 

"At the beginning of this cycle of time, long ago, the Great 
Spirit came down and He made an appearance and He 
gathered the peoples of this earth together and He said 
to the human beings, 'I'm going to send you to four 
directions and over time I'm going to change you to four 
colors, but I'm going to give you some teachings, and you 
will call these the Original Teachings; when you come 
back together with each other, you will share these so 
that you can live and have peace on earth, and a great 
civilization will come about' And he said 'During the 
cycle of time, I'm going to give each of you two stone 
tablets. When I give you those stone tablets, don't cast 
those upon the ground. If any of the brothers and sisters of 
the four directions and the four colors cast their tablets on 
the ground, not only will human beings have a hard time, 
but almost the earth itself will die.' 

"And so He gave each of us a responsibility and we call 
that the Guardianship. To the Indian people, the red 
people, He gave the Guardianship of the Earth. We were 
to learn during this cycle of time the teachings of the 
earth, the plants that grow from the earth, the foods 
that you can eat, and the herbs that are healing so that 
when we came back together with the other brothers and 
sisters we could share this knowledge with them. 
Something good was to happen on the earth. 

To the South He gave the yellow race of people the 
Guardianship of the Wind. They were to learn about the 
sky and breathing and how to take that within ourselves 
for spiritual advancement They were to share that with 
us at this time. 

To the West He gave the black race of people the 
Guardianship of the Water. They were to learn the 
teachings of the water, which is the chief of the 
elements, being the most humble and the most powerful. 

The elders have told me that the black people would 
bring the teachings of the water. 

To the North He gave the white race of people the 
Guardianship of the Fire. If you look at the center of 
many of the things they do you will find the fire. They 
say a light bulb is the white man's fire. If you look at the 
center of a car you will find a spark. If you look at the 
center of the airplane and the train you will find the fire. 
The fire consumes, and also moves. This is why it was the 
white brothers and sisters who began to move upon the 
face of the earth and reunite us as a human family. 

"And so a long time passed, and the Great Spirit gave 
each of the four races two stone tablets. Ours are kept at 
the Hopi Reservation in Arizona at Four Comers Area on 
Third Mesa. I talked to people from the black race, and 
their stone tablets are at the foot of Mount Kenya. They 
are kept by the Kukuyu Tribe. I once had the honor of 
presenting a sacred pipe at the Kukuyu Tribe carved from 
the red pipe stone of Mount Kenya. I was at an Indian 
spiritual gathering about 15 years ago. A medicine man 
from South Dakota put a beaded medicine wheel in the 
middle of the gathering. It had the four colors from the 
four directions; he asked the people, 'Where is this 
from?' They said, 'Probably Montana, or South Dakota, 
maybe Saskatchewan.' He said, This is from Kenya.' It 
was beaded just like ours, with the same colors. 

"The stone tablets of the yellow race of people are kept 
by the Tibetans. If you went straight through the Hopi 
Reservation to the other side of the world, you would 
come out in Tibet The Tibetan word for sun is the Hopi 
word for moon, and the Hopi word for sun is the Tibetan 
word for moon. 

"The guardians of the traditions of the people of Europe 
are the Swiss. In Switzerland, they still have a day 
when each family brings out its mask. They still know 
the colors of the families, and they still know the 
symbols, some of them. Each of these fou,r peoples happen 
to be people who live in the mountains. 

"So we went through this cycle of time, and each of the 
four races went to their directions and they learned their 
teachings. It was in Newsweek not long ago that eight out 
of ten foods that people eat on the earth are developed 
here in the western hemisphere because that was our 
Guardianship -- to learn the teachings of the earth and 


the things that grow from the earth. We were given a 
sacred handshake to show, when we came back together 
as brothers and sisters, that we still remembered the 

"It was indicated on the stone tablets that the Hopis had 
that the first brothers and sisters that would come back to 
them would come as turtles across the land. They would 
be human beings, but they would come as turtles. So when 
the time came close, the Hopis were at a special village 
to welcome the turtles that would come across the land. 
They got up in the morning and looked out at the sunrise. 
They looked out across the desert, and they saw the 
Spanish Conquistador-es coming, covered in armor, like 
turtles across the land. So this was them. So they went 
out to the Spanish man, and they extended their hand, 
hoping for the handshake. But into the hand the Spanish 
man dropped a trinket. And so word spread throughout 
North America that there was going to be a hard time, 
that maybe some of the brothers and sisters had forgotten 
the sacredness of all things and all the human beings 
were going to suffer for this on the earth. 

"So tribes began to send people to the mountains to have 
visions to try to figure out how they could survive. At 
that time there were 100,000 cities in the Mississippi 
Valley alone, called the mound civilization: cities built 
on great mounds. Those mounds are still there. If you ever 
go out to Ohio or the Mississippi Valley, they're tourist 
attractions now. There were 100,000 cities of Native 
people, and they were wondering how they could survive. 
They began to try to learn to live off the land because 
they knew a hard time was going to come. They began to 
send people to have visions to see how we could survive 
this time. They were told in the prophecies that we 
should try to remind all the people that would come here 
of the sacredness of all things. If we could do that, then 
there would be peace on earth. But if we did not do that, 
if we had not come together as a human family, the Great 
Spirit would grab the earth with His hand and shake it. 

"And so if you read the treaty negotiations from Red 
Jacket of the Six Nations on the east coast of this land 
clear to Chief Joseph and Chief Seattle on the west coast 
of this land, they all said the same thing. Chief Joseph 
said, T accord you the right, and I hope you accord me the 
right, to live in this land.' Always we were trying to live 
together. But instead of living together, you all know 
there was separation; there was segregation. They 
separated the races: they separated the Indians, and 
they separated the blacks. In the state of Washington it 
was against the law for an Asian to marry a white person 
up until not too long ago. There was separation. 

'The elders on the west coast prophesied that they would 
then begin to build a black ribbon. And on this black 
ribbon there would move a bug. And when you begin to see 
this bug moving on the land, that was the sign for the 
First Shaking of the Earth. The First Shaking of the 

Earth would be so violent that this bug would' be shaken 
off the earth into the air and it would begin to move and 
fly in the air. And by the end of this shaking this bug 
will be in the air around the world. Behind it would be a 
trail of dirt and eventually the whole sky of the entire 
earth would become dirty from these trails of dirt, and 
this would cause many diseases that would get more and 
more complicated. So the bug moving on the land, of course 
it's easy to see now. In 1908 the Model-T Ford was mass 
produced for the first time. So the elders knew' the First 
Shaking of the Earth was about to come about — that was 
the First World War. 

"In the First World War the airplane came into wide 
usage for the first time. That was that bug moving into 
the sky. And so they knew something very important 
would happen. There would be an attempt to make peace 
on earth on the west coast of this land, and so the elders 
began to watch for this. They began to hear that there 
was going to be a League of Nations in San Francisco, so 
the elders gathered in Arizona around 1920 or so, and 
they wrote a letter to Woodrow Wilson. They asked if 
the Indian people could be included in the League of 

"At that time, the United States Supreme Court had held 
that a reservation is a separate and semi- sovereign 
nation, not a part of the United States but protected by it. 
This became a concern because people didn't want the 
reservations to become more and more separate. They 
didn't want them to be considered nations. So they did not 
write back, and the Native people were left out of the 
League of Nations so that circle was incomplete. In the 
League of Nations circle there was a southern door, the 
yellow people; there was a western door, the black 
people; there was a northern door, the white people; but 
the eastern door was not attended. The elders knew that 
peace would not come on the earth until the circle of 
humanity is complete, until all the four colors sat in the 
circle and shared their teachings, then peace would come, 
on earth. 

"So they knew things would happen. Things would speed 
up a little it. There would be a cobweb built around the 
earth, and people would talk across this cobweb. When 
this talking cobweb, the telephone, was built around the 
earth, a sign of life would appear in the east, but it would 
tilt and bring death (the swastika of the Nazis). It would 
come with the sun. But the sun itself would rise one day, 
not in the east but in the west (the rising sun of the 
Japanese Empire). So the elders said when you see the sun 
rising in the west, and you see the sign or life reversed and 
tilted in the east, you know that the Great Death is to 
come upon the earth, and now the Great Spirit will grab 
the earth again in His hand and shake it, and this, 
shaking will be worse than the first. So the sign of life 
reversed and tilted, we call that the Swastika, and the 
rising sun in the west was the Rising Sun of Japan. These 
two symbols are carved in stone in Arizona. When the 


elders saw these two flags, they knew that these were 
the signs that the earth was to be shaken again. 

'The worse misuse of the Guardianship of the fire is 
called the gourd of ashes. They said the gourd of ashes 
will fall from the air. It will make the people like 
blades of grass in the prairie fire, and things will not 
grow for many seasons. I saw on television not too long ago 
that they were talking about the atomic bomb, the gourd 
of ashes. They said it was the best-kept secret in the 
history of the United States. The elders wanted to speak 
about it in 1920. 

'They would have spoken of it and foretold its coming if 
they could have entered into the League of Nations. The 
elders tried to contact President Roosevelt to ask him not 
to use the gourd of ashes because it would have a great 
effect on the earth and eventually cause even greater 
destruction and a Third Shaking of the Earth, the Third 
World War. I'M get to that in a few minutes. 

"So they knew after the Second Shaking of the Earth 
when they saw the gourd of ashes fall from the sky then 
there would be an attempt to make peace on the other 
side of this land. And because the peace attempt on the 
west coast had failed, they would build a special house 
on the east coast of this Turtle Island, and all the nations 
and peoples of the earth would come to this house, and it 
would be called the House of Mica, and it would shine 
like the mica on the desert shines. So the elders began to 
see they were building the United Nations made out of 
glass that reflects like the mica on the desert so they 
knew this was the House of Mica, and all the peoples of 
the earth should go to it. So they met and talked about 
this. They said that in the 1920's they had written and 
they had not been responded to, so they said this time 
we'd better go to the front door of the House of Mica 
because things might get a lot worse. 

"So elders representing a number of tribes drove to New 
York City. When the United Nations opened, they went 
to the front door of the house of Mica and they said these 
words, 'We represent the indigenous people of North 
America, and we wish to address the nations of the 
Earth We're going to give you four days to consider 
whether or not we will be allowed to speak.' 

'They retreated to one of the Six Nations Reserves in 
New York State. The Six Nations Reserves are keepers of 
the Great Law of Peace of the prophet that appeared 
here in North America, Dekanwidah. And this Law of 
Peace is still recited; it takes four days between sunrise 
and noon. Each year an Indian, by memory, must recite it 
about this time of year. Four days later they came back, 
and I believe the nations of the earth heard that the 
Indians had come to the door. And they voted to let the 
Indians in. They wanted to hear what they had to say. 
But the United States is one of five nations of the United 
Nations with a veto power, and still they were concerned 

because this time the Native sovereignty was even 
stronger. And I believe they vetoed the entrance of the 
Native people. 

"So then they knew other things would happen on the 
Earth, and the United Nations would not bring peace on 
earth, but there would be continuing and deepening 
confusion; the little wars would get worse. So they 
retreated to the Six Nations Reserve, and they talked 
about this, and they said the time is really getting close 
now — 1949. They said, 'We're going to divide the United 
States into four sections, and each year we're going to 
have a gathering. We're going to call these the White 
Roots of Peace Gatherings.' They began to have these 
around 1950. And they authorized certain people to speak 
in English for the first time about these prophecies. 

"One that I used to listen to many times, over and over, 
was Thomas Banyacya. He is a Hopi man. He was 
authorized to speak in English about what was on the 
stone tablets, and he has dedicated his life to doing this. 
And they began to tell us at these gatherings, they said, 
'In your lifetime you're going to see things happen.' It was 
strange when they said it in the 1950' s and 1960's, but now 
it seems very clear. But then it was unusual. They said 
You're going to see a time in your lifetime when the 
human beings are going to find the blueprint that makes 
us.' They call that now DNA, deoxyribonucleic acid. 
They said, They're going to cut this blueprint.' They call 
that now genetic splicing. And they said, They're going 
to make new animals upon the earth, and they're going to 
think these are going to help us. And it's going to seem 
like they do help us. But maybe the grandchildren and 
great-grandchildren are going to suffer.' The elders said 
long ago, They will release these things, and they will 
use them.' This is going to be released not too long from 
now. They are making new animals. The elders talked 
about this. They said, 'You will see new animals, and 
even the old animals will come back, animals that people 
thought had disappeared. They will find them here and 
there. They'll begin to reappear.' [This talk was given 
about ten years before scientists announced that they had 
cloned a sheep.] 

'They said, and I know many of you are from tribes that 
also have this prophecy, You're going to see a time when 
the eagle will fly its highest in the night, and it will 
land upon the moon.' Some tribes say eagle will circle the 
moon. Some tribes say the eagle will fly its highest in the 
night. 'And at that time,' they say, 'Many of the Native 
people will be sleeping,' which symbolically means they 
have lost their teachings. There are some tribes that say 
it will be as if they are frozen: they've been through the 
long winter. But they say, 'When the eagle flies its 
highest in the night, that will be the first light of a new 
day. That will be the first thawing of spring.' Of course, 
at the first light of a new day; if you've stayed up all 
night, you notice it's really dark. And the first light 
sneaks up on you. You want to see it change, but it's dark, 

and then pretty soon it's getting light before you know it. 
We're at that time now. The Eagle has landed on the 
moon, 1969. When that spaceship landed, they sent back 
the message, The Eagle has landed.' Traditionally, 
Native people from clear up in the Inuit region have 
shared with us this prophecy, clear down to the 
Quechuas in South America. They shared with us that 
they have this prophecy. When they heard those first 
words, The Eagle has landed,' they knew that was the 
start of a new time and a new power for Native people. 
There was absolutely nothing strong before us now. We 
may do anything we wish. 

"In 1776 when the United States Government printed the 
dollar, in one claw [of the eagle], if you've ever noticed, 
there is an olive branch. They said that represented 
peace. The Indian elders shared with me in South Dakota 
that to them that represents the enslavement of black 
people. In the prophecies of the Six Nations people they 
say there will be two great uprisings by black people to 
free themselves. We've seen one about 1964. There will be 
a second, more violent one to come. I'll get back to what 
that means in a minute. In the other claw is 13 arrows. 
The founding fathers of the United States said that 
represents the 13 States. But the elders say that 
represents the enslavement of the Native people. When 
the Eagle landed on the moon, they decided to print a 
special silver dollar to commemorate that. I don't know 
how many of you noticed it. The original design showed 
the spaceship landing on the moon, but at the last minute 
it was changed to an actual eagle. And in the eagle's 
claws is the olive branch, but the arrows are gone. The 
elders said, That's our prophecy — we have been 
released.' There was one more uprising coming for the 
black race of people, and then they will be released, and 
this is also going to have an effect on Native people, a 
good effect. There's a whole new set of prophecies from 
the Iroquois people about that, but I won't have time to go 
into that this morning. 

"But we're in that time now. We're between the first 
light of a new day and the sunrise. The sunrise is about to 
come, and when it comes up everyone is going to see it. But 
you know how it is in the village: there are a few people 
that get up early, and there are some that sleep until 
noon. They said when that Eagle lands on the moon, the 
powers will begin to come back to us. As an alcoholic 
person, I feel that one of our greatest diseases is 
alcoholism. Within seven days of the time of the Eagle 
landing on the moon, the first Native alcoholism program 
was started on an Apache reservation in Arizona. Within 
seven days of the time the Eagle landed on the moon, the 
Freedom of Indian Religion Act was introduced into the 
United States Congress. Eventually it was passed in 
November of 1978, signed by President Carter, making the 
song that Kevin [Kevin Locke, a famous Indian Baha'i 
who spends his time traveling around the world sharing 
the North American Indian culture through dance and 
music] sang now legal to sing in every state of the United 

States. At one time, singing a song or doing a sweat was 
punishable by going to jail for 10 years and/or a $10,000 
fine. This was changed in 1978; the legislation had been 
introduced in 1969, less than seven days after the Eagle 
landed on the moon. These are the physical 
manifestations of the spiritual prophecies that we have. 

"So he said at this time you're going to see that things 
will speed up, that people on the earth will move faster 
and faster. Grandchildren will not have time for 
grandparents. Parents will not have time for children. It 
will seem like time is going faster and faster. The elders 
advised us that, as things speed up, you yourself should 
slow down. The faster things go, the slower you go. 
Because there's going to come a time when the earth is 
going to be shaken a third time. The Great Spirit has 
shaken the earth two times: the First and Second World 
Wars to remind us that we are a human family, to remind 
us that we should have greeted each other as brothers 
and sisters. We had a chance after each shaking to come 
together in a circle that would have brought peace on 
earth, but we missed that. 

'Tonight they were talking on the news about the sign for 
the Third Shaking of the Earth. They said they're going 
to build what the elders called the house in the sky. In 
the 1950' s they talked about this: they will build a house 
and throw it in the sky. When you see people living in 
the sky on a permanent basis, you will know the Great 
Spirit is about to grab the earth, this time not with one 
hand, but with both hands. Many of you of Native 
background may have heard The spirits will warn you 
twice, but the third time you stand alone.' We've had two 
warnings, the first two World Wars, but now we stand 
alone in the third one. When this house is in the sky, the 
Great Spirit is going to shake the Earth a third time, and 
whoever dropped that gourd of ashes, upon them it is 
going to drop. They say at that time there will be 
villages in this land so great that when you stand in the 
villages you will not be able to see out, and in the 
prophecies these are called villages of stone, or prairies 
of stone. And they said the stone will grow up from the 
ground, and you will not be able to see beyond the village. 
At the center of each and every one of these villages will 
be Native people, and they will walk as hollow shells 
upon a prairie of stone. They said hollow shells, which 
means they will have lost any of their traditional 
understandings; they will be empty within. They said 
that, after the Eagle lands on the moon, some of these 
people will begin to leave these prairies of stone and 
come home and take up some of the old ways and begin to 
make themselves reborn, because it's a new day. But many 
will not. And they said there's going to come a time when 
in the morning the sun is going to rise, and this village of 
stone will be there, and in the evening there would just be 
steam coming from the ground. They will be as steam. And 
in the center of many of those villages of stone, when they 
turn to steam, the Native people will turn to steam also 
because they never woke up and left the village. And this 


used to bother me when I was a young man I used to ask 
the elders, 'Isn't there anything we can do?' And they 
said, well, its just that way that if a person does not 
have the spiritual eyes to see, ifs very hard to show 
them. Or if they don't have the ears to hear, ifs very 
hard to speak with them. We wish that we could go get 
them all but we can't. Ifs just that some are not going to 
wake up. But some will wake up. 

"And so they say there's going to be the Third Shaking of 
the Earth. Ifs not going to be a good thing to see, but we 
will survive it We will survive it. And when we survive 
it, then there's going to be another attempt to make a 
circle of the human beings on the earth. And this time the 
Native people will not have to petition to join but will be 
invited to enter the circle because they say the attitude 
toward us will have changed by then, and people will let 
us into the circle, and all the four colors of the four 

directions will share their wisdom, and there will be a 
peace on earth. This is coming close. A lot of times when I 
share this message of the prophecies, people say, 'Can't 
we change it? Could we stop it?' The answer is yes. 

The prophecies are always either/or. We' could have 
come together way back there in 1565, and we could have 
had a great civilization, but we didn't. Always along the 
path of these prophecies, we could have come together. 
We still could. If we could stop the racial and religious 
disharmony, we would not have to go through this third 
shaking. The elders say the chance of that is pretty slim. 
It seems to me like ifs pretty slim, too. But they say what 
we can do is we can cushion it. The word we use is cushion. 
We can cushion it so it won't be quite as bad. How do we 
do this? We do this by sharing the teaching that will 
reunite us. 


Tuscarora Prophecy by Mad Bear 

On October 11, 1969, Mad Bear, of the Tuscarora Nation, shared the following prophecy of theHo- 
de-no-sau-ne (People of the Long House- the Six Nations Iroquois Confederacy) in the village of 
Hotevilla, Hopiland. 

I bring greetings from the Six Nations Iroquois 
Confederacy as a spokesman of the Tuscarora, Onondaga, 
Cayuga, Mohawk, Oneida and Seneca Nations. I bring 
greetings from the Confederacy Chiefs to the Chiefs of 
Hopi and to all the other people that are here today, 
from the Clan Mothers of our Six Nations to the Clan 
Mothers that are here, from the young people who are 
starting to stand up for land and life and truth to the 
young people here who are standing up for land and life 
and truth, and also from the little children that walk on 
Mother Earth to the little children here that walk on 
Mother Earth. I bring these greetings to tell you that this 
movement that is now circling this continent from North 
America, Central America and South America will never 
stop and is one that will unite all Indians. This has been 
prophesied by our people a long time ago when the Son of 
the Great Spirit came down with the law of the Great 
Peace. His name was Deganawida. He gave us this great 
law that one day we'll rule not only this great continent, 
but the world. 

We call ourselves Ho-de-no-sau-ne, People of the 
Longhouse, meaning we are all brothers. We don't care if 
it's Hopi, Navajo, Paiute or whatever nation. We're all 
brothers. The Creator made us. Some day in this great 
life-plan that the Creator has given us we will all be one 
again. We all started from here, in Hopi country. Our 
laws were given after the Flood. We came out and went 
out over the land. And one day, our prophecy tells us, this 
land will be purified again and be returned back to our 
people for the evercoming generations of our children, 
their children and their children's children who are not 
yet born. 

Time is short. This country is in great danger. The very 
foundations of the white man's government is 
collapsing-fast. Not only here, but in Canada. Not only 
in Canada, but around the world. A new light, a new 
vision is coming out now. It is up to our people to bring this 
out so that every people will understand that we still 
follow the ways of the Great Spirit. We have a very 
important job to fulfill. Do not ever abandon the sacred 
way of life. Do not ever abandon your traditions and 
instructions of the Great Spirit, because times are 
changing. According to our prophecy we're now in a new 
year where this purification is taking place. There will 
be earthquakes, there will be famine. There will be 
poisoning of the city waters-people wouldn't even be able 
to flush their toilets or cook their meals. There will be 
running and panic. They will be coming to wherever 
Indians are gathered. That is when the Indian has to 

stand up on his two feet and be a man as the Creator had 
asked us in the beginning. 

Every human being was created by the Great Spirit, and 
we can't hold malice in our hearts toward anyone. This is 
our way of life, this is our religion. The Great Spirit 
made the black man, the white man, the yellow man, the 
red man. If we were to condemn and beat these people or 
keep them away, we would, be going against the Creator, 
because he created them. He created the birds, the trees, 
the flowers. He gave us the air we all breathe. And 
when these people come together in this great unity that 
is fast becoming a reality, it will be as brilliant as a 
rainbow after a gentle shower. This is the way we will 
come together-in peace. The governments of the world 
that are collapsing are those that have been blinded by 
the material things. The white man's money is going to 
fall very soon. So, the only way to survive, to save 
yourself, is to call upon the Great Spirit, to bring Him into 
your hearts. Only then can we become brothers and really 
mean it. Then a new world will become real before our 

In our prophecies, which is very long, it tells that one day 
a great white serpent would come upon the land, and he 
would be choking the life's breath out of the Indian. We 
would almost be dead. And, suddenly he would release 
us, when he saw a great red serpent stirring, coming down 
from the North upon the land. As this red serpent closes 
in, the white serpent would become bewildered, and he 
would drop the Indian to the ground, almost like a 
helpless child. Then a black serpent would come upon the 
land, fast, to meet these other people that were here. A 
great fight would ensue, and a war against the prestige of 
this great white serpent would begin. The white serpent 
would be brought down. Many great battles would take 
place, violences. The white serpent would become split. 
His right hand would be fighting his left hand. The 
white man would be fighting the white man, and the 
black man would be fighting the white man. And, then in 
the confusion the red serpent would sweep over the land. 
Deganawida told us, "Watch out for these times. Get 
away from this fight. But, renew your faith back to the 
Great Spirit." He said that the battle wduld be so 
violent that the mountains would split, the rivers would 
boil, and the fish would turn up on their bellies. The air 
would be poisoned. There would be nothing to eat. Great 
things would happen. Confusion. Disaster. Famine. 
And, in the prophecies of our people it tells about white 
people, the white serpent, who will realize that his 
government is collapsing. He will send his young people 


and his children out to meet with the Indians to try to net 
protection, spiritual guidance, to try to get help. We were 
not to refuse this help. But, before we could give any help 
or unity to anybody, we must first find peace and unity 
within our own hearts, within our own souls. 

There is a-great answer that is going to come from Hopi, 
because this is the place where even my people came 
from, where all Indian people came from. A long time ago 
it is told that Tha-ronda-na-waga, who was that Holder 
of the Heavens as it's interpreted in our way, guided my 
people across the mountains to the East, across the great 
river, the Mississippi, across the plains to the place 
where it appeared that the Great Spirit had placed his 
hand upon the ground. There my people were supposed to 
gather. We were given different instructions, every 
nation was given different instructions. Many went 

North, South and to the West. And they that have kept 
these instructions are beginning to stand. My people went 
out there to a place in New York where the Finger Lakes 
are. If you were in a plane, and you looked down there, it 
would look like the hand of the Great Spirit was on the 
ground. That's where the Ho-de-no-sau-ne, the People of 
the Longhouse, got their message. This is the message I'm 
bringing to not only the Indian people but to the people of 
the world. So, it is important that we look back to the 
prophecies, back to the instructions, that we remove any 
hate and ill feelings that we might have for our brothers 
and sisters, remove it and be at peace again, so that our 
minds could be clear and we could see the great path. So, 
as we meet this day, I want us to join hands and be friends, 
to have peace and to remember the instructions that were 
brought down to us by the Great Spirit. 


The Seven Fires Prophecy of the Algonquin 

Following is a short telling of the Seven Fires Prophecy of Anishnabe (the Algonquin Peoples). 
The prophecy is encoded on a "Wampum Belt' - a belt sewn with thousands of tiny, polished, 
cylindrical purple and white shell beads. The contemporary keeper of this belt is Chief William 
Commanda of Kitigen Zibi Anishnabeg Reserve in Maniwaki, Quebec. According to,-G randfather 
Commanda, the full Seven Fires Prophecy takes several days to tell, and has many elements. As 
you read this, keep in mind we are now in the time of the Seventh Fire. 

Non-traditional people often have a difficult time comprehending Native prophecies. At times, 
the prophecies seem to blur the distinction between a physical and spiritual event, or even 
between a spiritual concept and an actual person. I gradually have begun to appreciate the 
connectedness of all things inherent in Native teachings. Could everything be a microcosm or 
macrocosm of all other thines? 


Seven prophets came to Anishnabe. They came at a time 
when the people were living a full and peaceful life on 
the North Eastern coast of North America These 
prophets left the people with seven predictions of what 
the future would bring. Each of the prophecies was called 
a fire and each fire referred to a particular era of time 
that would come in the future. Thus, the teachings of the 
seven prophets are now called the "Seven Fires". 

The first prophet said to the people, "In the time of the 
First Fire, the Anishnabe nation will rise up and follow 
the sacred shell of the Midewiwin Lodge. The 
Midewiwin Lodge will serve as a rallying point for the 
people and its traditional ways will be the source of much 
strength. The Sacred Megis will lead the Way to the 
chosen ground of the Anishnabe. You are to look for a 
turtle shaped island that is linked to the purification of 
the earth. You will find such an island at the beginning 
and at the end of your journey. There will be seven 
stopping places along the way. You will know the chosen 
ground has been reached when you come to a land where 
food grows on Water. If yOU do not move you will be 

The second prophet told the people, "You will know the 
Second Fire because at this time the nation will be 
camped by a large body of water. In this time the 
direction of the Sacred Shell will be lost. The Midewiwin 
will diminish in strength, a boy will be born to point the 
way back to the traditional ways. He will show the 
direction to the stepping stones to the future of the 
Anishnabe people. 

The third prophet said to the people. "In the Third Fire, 
the Anishnabe will find the path to their chosen ground, 
a land in the west to which they must move their 
families. This will be the land where food grows on 

The Fourth Fire was originally given to the people by two 
prophets. They come as one. They told of the coming of 
the Light Skinned race. One of the prophets said, "You 
will know the future of our people by the face the Light 
Skinned race wears. If they come wearing the face of 
brotherhood then there will come a time of wonderful 
change for generations to come. They will bring new 
knowledge and articles that can be joined with the 
knowledge of this country, in this way, two nations will 
join to make a mighty nation. This new nation will be 
joined by two more so that four will form the mightiest 
nation of all. You will know the face of the brotherhood 
if the light skinned race comes carrying no weapons. If 
they come bearing only their knowledge and a hand 

The other prophet said," Beware if the Light Skinned 
race comes wearing the face of death. You must be careful 
because the face of brotherhood and the face of death 
look very much alike. If they come carrying a 
weapon. ..beware. If they come in suffering... They could 
fool you. Their hearts may be filled with greed for the 
riches of this land. If they are indeed your brothers, let 
them prove it. Do not accept them in total trust. You shall 
know that the face they wear is one of death if the rivers 
run with poison and the fish become unfit to eat. You 
shall know them by these many things." 

The Fifth Prophet said, "In the time of the Fifth Fire 
there will come a time of great struggle that will grip the 
lives of all Native people. At the warning of this Fire 
there will come among the people one who holds a 
promise of great joy and salvation. If the people accept 
this promise of a new way and abandon the old teachings, 
then the struggle of the Fifth Fire will be with the 
people for many generations. The promise that comes will 
prove to be a false promise. All those who accept this 
promise will cause the near destruction of the people." 


The prophet of the Sixth Fire said, "In the time of the 
Sixth' Fire it will be evident that the promise of the 
Fifth Fire came in a false way. Those deceived by this 
promise will take their children away from the 
teachings of the Elders, grandsons and granddaughters 
will turn against the Elders. In this way, the Elders will 
lose their reason for living... they will lose their purpose 
in life. At this time a new sickness will come among the 
people. The balance of many people will be disturbed. 
The cup of life will almost be spilled. The cup of life will 
almost become the cup of grief." 

At the time of these predictions, many people scoffed at 
the prophets. They then had medicines to keep away 
sickness. They were then healthy and happy as a people. 
These were the people who chose to stay behind in the 
great migration of the Anishnabe. These people were the 
first to have contact with the Light Skinned race. They 
would suffer the most. 

When the Fifth Fire came, to pass, a great struggle did 
indeed grip the lives of all Native people. The Light 
Skinned race launched a military attack on the Indian 
people through-out the country aimed at taking away 
their land and their independence as a free and sovereign 
people. It is now felt that the false promise that came at 
the end of the Fifth Fire was the materials and riches 
embodied in the way of life of the light skinned race. 
Those who abandoned the ancient ways and accepted this 
new promise were a big factor in causing the near 
destruction of the Native people of this land. 

When the Sixth Fire came to be, the words of the prophet 
rang true as the children were taken away from the 
teachings of the Elders. The boarding school era of 
"civilizing" Indian Children had begun. The Indian 
language and religion were taken from the children. The 
people started dying at an early age... they had lost 
their will to live and their purpose in living. 

In the confusing times of the Sixth Fire, it is said that a 
group of visionaries came among the Anishnabe. They 
gathered all the priests of the Midewiwin Lodge. They 
told the priests that the Midewiwin Way was in danger 
of being destroyed. They gathered all the sacred bundles. 
They gathered all the scrolls that recorded the 
ceremonies. All these things were placed in a hollowed 
out log from the ironwood tree. Men were lowered over a 
cliff by long ropes. They dug a hole in the cliff and buried 
the log where no one could find it. Thus the teachings of 
the Elders were hidden out of sight but not out of memory. 
It was said that when the time came that the Indian 
people could practice their religion without fear that a 
little boy would dream where the Ironwood log, full of 
the Sacred Bundles and Scrolls were buried. He would 
lead his people to the place. 

The Seventh Prophet that came to the people long ago 
was said to be different from the other prophets. He was 

young and had a strange light in his eyes. He said, " In 
the time of the Seventh Fire, New People will emerge. 
They will retrace their steps to find what was left by the 
trail. Their steps will take them to the Elders who they 
will ask to guide them on their journey: But-many of the 
Elders will have fallen asleep. They will awaken to this 
new time with nothing to offer. Some of thgElders will be 
silent out of fear. Some of the Elders will be silent because 
no one will ask anything of them. The New People will 
have to be careful in how they approach the Elders. The 
task of the New People will not be easy. 

If the New People will remain strong in their Quest, the 
Water Drum of the Midewiwin Lodge will again sound its 
voice. There will be a Rebirth of the Anishnabe Nation 
and a rekindling of old flames. The Sacred Fire will 
again be lit. 

It is at this time that the Light Skinned race will be 
given a choice between two roads. If they choose the right 
road, then the Seventh Fire will light the Eighth and 
final Fire, an eternal Fire of peace, love, brotherhood and 
sisterhood. If the light skinned race makes the wrong 
choice of roads, then the destruction which they brought 
with them in coming to this country will come back at 
them and cause much suffering and death to all the 
Earth's people. 

Traditional Mide people from other Nations have 
interpreted the two roads that face the Light Skinned 
race as the road to technology and the other to 
spiritualism. They feel that the road to technology 
represents a continuation of Head-Long rush to 
technological development. This is the road that has led 
to modern society, to a damaged and seared Earth. Could 
it be that the road to technology represents a rush to 
destruction? The road to Spirituality represents the 
slower path that Traditional Native People have 
traveled and are now seeking again. The Earth is not 
scorched on this trail. The grass is still growing there. 

The prophet of the Fourth Fire spoke of a time when "two 
Nations will join to make a Mighty Nation". He was 
speaking of the coming of the Light Skinned race and the 
face of brotherhood that the Light Skinned Brother could 
be wearing. It is obvious from the history of this country 
that this was not the face worn by the Light Skinned race 
as a whole. That the Mighty Nation spoken of in the 
Fourth Fire has never been formed. 

If the Natural People of the Earth could, just wear the 
face of brotherhood, we might'be able to deliver our 
society from the road to destruction. Could we make the 
two roads that today represents two clashing world views 
come together to form a mighty Nation? Could a Nation 
be formed that is guided by respect for all living things? 
Are we the New People of the Seventh Fire? 



The story of the prophets and their teachings was later 
symbolically encoded in the design of the Wampum Belt; 
made of rawhide and Wampum sea shell beads woven 
together with leather strips. This Wampum Belt has 
been handed down among the Algonquin for hundreds of 
years, generation to generation. 

Grandfather William Commanda, of the Maniwaki 
Reserve in Quebec, Canada, is the contemporary keeper of 
this wampum belt 

The Seven Fires," he has explained, "represent times in 
the life of the people." It is a long story, but in particular 
the seventh prophet who spoke to the people long ago 
offered a message of importance to today. "In the time of 
the Seventh Fire," he said, "new people will emerge. 
They will retrace their steps to find what was left by the 
trail long ago. Their steps will take them to the Elders, 
who they will ask to guide them on their journey. ..If the 
new people remain strong in their quest, the Sacred Fire 
will again be lit. It is at this time that the people will be 
given a choice between two roads." 

Traditional Elders of Indian nations have interpreted the 
two roads that lie before all people as the road to 
materialism, and the road to spirituality. 

"We feel that a headlong rush to technological 
development without consideration of the Earth or future 
generations is the road that has led modem society to a 
damaged and seared Earth," Grandfather Commanda has 
said. This road leads to destruction. ..However, if people 
choose the right road, the road of respect and 
spirituality, then the Seventh Fire will light an Eighth 
and final fire, an eternal fire of peace, spirituality, love, 
brotherhood, and sisterhood." 

Grandfather Commanda, and other Traditional Spiritual 
Elders believe that we have entered the time of the 
Seventh Fire now, and that we have an opportunity to 
take action to kindle the potential Eighth Fire. 

As he has explained it, "The other road, the road of 
spirituality, represents a slower path that Traditional 
Native People have traveled and are now seeking again. 
The Earth is not scorched on this trail. The grass is still 
growing there...Could a nation be formed that is guided 
by respect for all living things?" 


"Prophecies of the Q'ero Incan Shamans 

Following is an article by Brad Berg from the January/February 1997 issue of the internet version 
http: / / 

January/February 1997 


by Brad Berg 

The light of idealism gleamed in his eyes as Dr. Alberto 
Villoldo described how ,an earthquake in 1949 underneath 
a monastery near Cuzco, Peru, had rent the ground 
asunder, exposing an ancient Incan temple of gold. This 
fulfilled a sign that the prophecies of Mosoq, the "time to 
come", were now to be snared with the modem world. Dr. 
Villoldo, a psychologist and medicinal anthropologist, 
has lived among and trained with the Q'ero shamans and 
has played a key role in bringing their ritual and 
prophecy to the awareness of the modem world. 

The Q'ero are the last of the Incas -- a tribe of 600 who 
sought refuge at altitudes above 14,000 feet in order to 
escape the conquering conquistadors. For 500 years the 
Q'ero elders have preserved a sacred prophecy of a great 
change, or qachacuti, in which the world would be 
turned right-side-up, harmony and order would be 
restored, and chaos and disorder ended. 
The Q'ero had lived in their villages high in the Andes 
in virtual solitude from the world until their "discovery" 
in 1949. In that year, Oscar Nunez del Prado, an 
anthropologist, was at a festival in Paucartambo, in a 
valley on the eastern slopes of the Andes in southern Peru, 
when he met two Indians speaking fluent Quecha, the 
language of the Incas. The first Western expedition to the 
Q'ero villages then occurred in 1955. 

Four years later, at the annual Feast of The Return of the 
Pleiades taking place in the Andes, the gathering of 
70,000 pilgrims from South America (many of them 
shamans) were awed and the crowd parted to let the 
Q'ero, unannounced and wearing the Incan emblem of the 
sun, make their way forward to the mountain top to make 
known that the time of the prophecies was at hand. They 
were welcomed by the assembly and told: "We've been 
waiting for you for 500 years." 

Recently, Q'ero elders journeyed to North America in 
fulfillment of their prophecies. In November 1996, a 
small group of Q'ero, including the tribal leader and the 
head shaman, visited several cities in the US, including 
New York, where they performed a private ceremony at 
the Cathedral of St. John the Divine. The shaman ic 
ritual had not been performed for 500 years. But in the 

very home of those who symbolized the former conquerors 
of their Incan ancestors they shared their ritual and 
knowledge, not only with interested Westerners who were 
learning their ways, but also with the Dean of the great 
cathedral, thereby symbolically and spiritually linking 
the two continents of North and South America. 

According to ancient prophecy, this is the time of the 
great gathering called the _mastay_, and reintegration 
of the peoples of the four directions. The Q'ero are 
releasing their teachings to the West, in preparation for 
the day the Eagle of the North and the Condor of the 
South (the Americas) fly together again. They believe 
that _munay_, love and compassion, will be the guiding 
force of this great gathering of the peoples. 

The new caretakers of the Earth will come from the 
West, and those that have made the greatest impact on 
Mother Earth now have the moral responsibility to 
remake their relationship with Her, after remaking 
themselves," said Don Antonio Morales, a master Q'ero 
shaman. The prophecy holds that North America will 
supply the physical strength, or body; Europe will supply 
the mental aspect, or head; and the heart will be 
supplied by South America. 

Signs fulfilled 

When the Spanish conquered the Incas 500 years ago, the 
last pachacuti, or great change, occurred. The Q'ero have 
been waiting ever since for the next pachacuti, when 
things that were turned upside down would be set right 
and order would emerge out of chaos. For the past five 
centuries they preserved their sacred knowledge, and 
finally, in recent years, the signs were fulfilled that the 
great time of change was at hand: the high mountain 
lagoons have dried, the condor is nearly extinct and the 
discovery of the Golden Temple has occurred, following 
the earthquake in 1949 which represented the wrath of 
the sun. 

The prophecies are optimistic. They refer to the end of 
time as we know it -- the death of a way of thinking and 
a way of being, the end of a way of relating to nature and 
to the earth. In the coming years, the Incas expect us to 
emerge into a golden age, a golden millennium of peace. 
The prophecies also speak of tumultuous changes 
happening in the earth, and in our psyche, redefining our 
relationships and spirituality. 


The next pachacuti, or great change, has already begun 
and it promises the emergence of a new human after this 
period of turmoil. The chaos and upheaval characteristic 
of this period will last another four years, according to 
the Q'ero. The paradigm of European civilization will 
continue to collapse and the way of the Earth people will 
return. Even more importantly, the shamanic elders speak 
about a tear in the fabric of time itself. This presents an 
opportunity for us to describe ourselves not as who we 
have been in the past, both personally and collectively, 
but as who we are becoming. 

Pachacuti also refers to a great Incan leader who lived in 
the late 1300s. He is said to have built Machu Picchu, and 
was the architect of an empire the size of the United 
States. For the Incas, Pachacuti is a spiritual prototype •* 
a Master, a luminous one who stepped outside of time. He 
was a messiah, but not in the Christian sense of the only 
son of God, beyond the reach of humanity. Rather he is 
viewed as a symbol and promise of who we all might 
become. He embodies the essence of the prophecies of the 
pachacuti, as Pacha means 'earth, or 'time', and cuti 
means "to set things right." His name also means 
"transformer of the earth." 

The prophecies' of the pachacuti are known throughout 
the Andes. There are those who believe the prophecies 
refer to the return of the leader Pachacuti to defeat those 
who took the Incas' land. But according to Dr. Villoldo, 
the return of Pachacuti is taking place on the collective 
level. "It's not the return of a single individual who 
embodies what we're becoming, but a process of emergence 
available to all peoples." 

The Star Rites 

The Q'ero have served as the caretakers of the rites and 
prophecies of their Inca ancestors. The prophecies are of 
no use unless one has the keys, the rites of passage. The 
Star Rites, or, _Mosoq Karpay- (The Rites of the Time To 
Come), are crucial to the practical growth described in 
the prophecies. Following the _despachos_ (ritualistic 
offerings of mesa, or medicine bundles) at the recent 
ceremony in New York City, and after a medicine 
cleansing by the wives of the shamans, the shamans 
administered the Mosoq Karpay to the individuals 
present, transmitting the energies originating with the 
ancestors of their lineage. 

The transmission of the Mosoq Karpay is the ceremony 
representing the end of one's relationship to time. It is a 
process of the heart. This process of Becoming is 
considered more important than the prophecies 

themselves, The Karpay, (rites) plant the seed of 
knowledge, the seed of Pachacuti, in the luminous body of 
the recipient. It is up to each person to water and tend the 
seed so that it can grow and blossom. The rites are a 
transmission of potential; one must then make oneself 
available to destiny. 

The Karpays connect the person to an ancient lineage of 
knowledge and power that cannot be accessed by the 
individual — it can only be summoned by a tribe. 
Ultimately, this power can provide the impetus for one to 
leap into the body of an Inca, a Luminous One. (In this 
sense, the Inca referred to is the Self-realized man). That 
person is connected directly to the stars, the Incan Sun of 


According to Dr. Villoldo, the Incas believe that we must 
die to the old models of spirituality and go through the 
rites of self-renewal, becoming midwives of a new kind of 

'These pathways, paths of the shaman, the individual 
who walks with beauty and grace in the world, are 
available to all of us today. We need to de-mystify them 
and learn to honor and respect our Mother, the earth, and 
our Father, the sun, and the heavens «• and to learn from 
everything and everyone around us, and to seize those 
instances of power so that we may take a quantum leap 
into who we are becoming, all of us together. 

'The Q'ero believe that the doorways between the 
worlds are opening again •* holes in time that we can step 
through and beyond, where we can explore our human 
capabilities. Regaining our luminous nature is a 
possibility today for all who dare to take the leap." 

The Andean shamans have no Christ or Buddha to 
follow. Rather, they say: "Follow your own footsteps. 
Learn from the rivers, the trees and the rocks. Honor the 
Christ, the Buddha, your brothers and sisters. Honor the 
Earth Mother and the Great Spirit. Honor yourself and 
all of creation." 

"Look with the eyes of your soul and engage the 
essential" is the teaching of the Q'ero. 

For additional information, contact Four Winds Society in 
the US at 610-294-1036. For additional source material 
see -Wildfire- magazine, Volume 7, Number 4, Fall 19% 
issue , 


Message of Our Lady of Fatima 

In January of 1997, two friends from the Sunbow 5 Walk for the Earth and I visited a traditional 
couple at their home in Hotevilla, Third Mesa, Hopi. At one point, the husband said: "Here. This 
is the same as our prophecy." He handed us the following version of the Message of Our Lady of 
Fatima. Since then, I have run across warnings of Three Days of Darkness" from many other 
Native and non-Native sources. My heart tells me this information will be crucial: 


The Church has finally given permission to awaken 
people with the messages of Fatima, as they were given 

by Virgin Mary when she appeared to three children on 
October 13, 1917. The apparition of the Blessed Virgin 
Mary in Fatima has been approved by the Church. One of 
the children, sister Lucia, a nun, is still living in Portugal. 

Sister Lucia gave the prophecy of our Lady of Fatima to 
Pope Pious XII. When the Pope read the prophecy, he 
did not want to reveal it to the world and was anguished 
by it. The Pope took note of the message and put it out of 
his reach, so that it was not read again while he was 
still alive. After the death of Pope Pious XII the Vatican 
was unwilling to reveal the message because they were 
fearful of the shock that this could cause humanity and of 
the consequences this revelation would bring. After the 
death of Pope John XXIII the Vatican reminded the new 
Pope, Paul VI, of the message. Between 1963 and 1964 
Pope Paul VI read the message and was astonished by its 
contents; so, he decided he would reveal to the world only 
a small portion of it. He did this because the time was 
short and because our Lady of Fatima gave Lucia-even 
another message: 

"Go, my daughter, and tell the world those things that 
will be forthcoming between I960 and 2000. Man is not 
keeping the commandments God has given him. The 
devil is conquering the world, and he is making people 
hate one another. Powerful weapons are being 
manufactured which can destroy the world in a few 
minutes. Half of humanity will be destroyed. Hard 
times are upon the church. Perversity will thrive among 
men, and the devil will plant seeds so that nobody will 
get along, and people will lose their faith. The war will 
come back to Rome and there will be fighting among the 
religious orders. The weak and the wicked will all fall 
down. God will send us cold weather, smoke, water, hail, 
fire, rain and unbearable climatic conditions. Winters 
will be extremely cold and earthquakes will destroy 
human life little by little, and will also destroy all those 
materialistic lives. Millions will lose their lives in a 
DIE. Those who survive will wish to be dead. We cannot 
imagine a planet such as this, but definitely God will 
punish those who do not accept Him. Those who believe 
in Him and are faithful to His Word will survive and 
will live only because of their trust in Him. I am calling 

everyone so that you come back to my Son. Lord, help the 
weak ones and all those who will not surrender to You, for 
whatever suffering they may have because of their 

Father Agustino of Rome, who is in Fatima, Portugal, 
says that Pope Paul VI gave him permission to see sister 
Lucia. His own words after talking to her were the 
following: "She saw me with much sadness" and said; 
"Father, our Lady is not happy because nobody was 
interested in her prophecy given to us in 1917. Faithful 
people are following their own paths and are not 
interested in this message from heaven. The unfaithful 
walk upon wide paths that lead to destruction. Believe 
me, Father, punishment is at hand and many souls will be 
destroyed. Entire nations will disappear from the face of 
the earth. On the other hand, if people get back to 
praying and to doing the Lord's work the world will be 
saved and many will not die. The time has come for all 
the world to start praying and doing penance. Let people 
pass on this message to their families, friends, and to the 
whole world. The last days before this catastrophe are 
near. Because of this catastrophe people will return to 
the Catholic Church. England, Russia, China, 
Protestants and Jews will all praise and believe in God, in 
our Lord Jesus Christ, and the Blessed Virgin Mary. Many 
will say that they are waiting 'for the message of 
repentance and prayer to come from the Pope and from the 
Bishops themselves. I am telling you today just as the 
Mother of God said to us, start praying and do penance 
now! Pray for the conversions of the world since the time 
left is very short." 


People will be speaking everywhere of reconstructing 
peace and truth, but our punishment will come as well. 
One man of a prominent position will be assassinated. 
This will bring war and revolution; and this will be a 
very cold war. A very strong army will go to Europe and 
will start an atomic war. It will destroy everything. 
Darkness will descend upon earth for 72 hours (3 days), 
and only one third of humanity will survive the 72 hours 
of darkness, and will live a new life. These people will 
be the new children of God. 

A huge earthquake will shake the planet for 8 hours on a 
very cold night, 10 minutes before midnight. This will be 
the third sign that God is the Ring of the earth. The 


faithful and those who make the FATIMA prophecy 
known at this time need not be afraid. 


Kneel down and pray to the Lord for His MERCY! Do not 
go outside or let anyone enter your home. Only the 
faithful will not be in the hand of the devil and will 
survive the catastrophe. I give you these signs so that 
you may be prepared and survive. The signs are the 
following: (1) It will be a very cold night; (2) The wind 
will blow as never before for a very short time; and (3) 
The earth will begin to tremble. 

Close all the windows in your houses, and do not speak to 
anyone except to those in your home. Do not look outside. 
Do not be curious and look outside, because this is the rage 
because other light sources will not work during "the 
three days of darkness". 

Kneel down before the Cross, pray the Holy Rosary and 
after each Hail Mary say the following prayer: 

Oh! My God, forgive our sins, 

save us from the flames of hell, 

take all souls to heaven, 

especially those who need most of Thy mercy. 

Mary, protect us, 

Jesus and Mary we love Thee, 

save us and save the world. 

The Rosary is the secret of the Immaculate Heart of 
Mary. The Blessed Virgin Mary repeated the following 
three times: "I hope that all believers go to mass during 
the first Fridays and Saturdays of each month. Go to 
confession because that will help save the world from 
destruction." I remind you again, that all those who pray 
the Rosary everyday will be protected by heaven and by 
the Blessed Virgin Mary. During the time of punishment 
and at the hour of their death, under the protection of her 
Maternal Heart they will die peacefully and enter the 
other world with God. 

The wind will bring gas that will cover the entire planet. 
Water and everything that enters in contact with this 
poisonous gas will be contaminated. DO NOT USE ANY 
third night the earth will stop trembling you may go 
outside. The sun will shine. 

Those who listen to this and do not believe will die. 
Angels will come from heaven and will bless the earth at 
the right time. Let's all survive this catastrophe. All of 
us must start praying and doing penance NOW! 
Humanity must pray for a place in heaven which the 
fallen angels (demons) left behind. God will not allow 
these things to happen if we obey His call to prayer and 
total conversion. "LET HUMANITY KNOW THIS AND 

Please pray three Hail Marys NOW! Amen. 

Note that the Hopi version of this prophecy says that The Earth will shake and turn red and turn 
against those who are hindering the Hopi. To all these people Purification Day will come. Humble 
people will run to him in search of a new world, and the equality that has been denied them. He 
will come unmercifully. His people will cover the Earth like red ants. We must not go outside to 
watch. We must stay in our houses. He will come and gather the wicked people who are hindering 
the red people who were here first. He will be looking for someone whom he will recognize by his 
way of life, or by his head (the special Hopi haircut) or by the shape of his village and his 
dwellings. He is the only one who will purify us." - from a talk by Grandfather Dan Katchongva 
on January 29, 1970. (See page 19) 


Mother Shipton's Prophecy 

Here is a prophecy of "Mother Shipton" which was published by Nexus Magazine. There is some 
question as to the authenticity of this prophecy, so you will have to check with your inner 
knowing. For me, it includes spine-tingling parallels with Hopi and other prophecies. 

The best review of Mother Shipton's prophecies I have seen was done by Tom Kay in his recent 
book "When the Comet Runs". I met Tom while he was signing books at the "Gateway to the 
Future" conference at the Association for Research and Enlightenment in February, 1997. Anyone 
who begins to write a book about a comet a full year before the comet is "discovered" certainly has 
my attention! I highly recommend Tom's book. He covers many excellent prophetic sources of 
which I was not aware, and does an excellent job relating them to each other. 


Published in Nexus Magazine, Volume 2, Number 24 (February-March 1995) 

PO Box 30, Mapleton Qld 4560 Australia, email: 

http ://www . peg . ape . org/- nexu s/ 

Telephone: +61 (0)74 429 280; Fax: +61 (0)74 429 381 

This rare collection of Mother Shipton's prophecies was sent to us by a NEXUS reader who told us that, thirty years ago, 
she painstakingly transcribed them and managed to smuggle them out of the Mitchell Library, Sydney (now the State 
Library of New South Wales). The originals were kept in a locked room, along with many other volumes of prophetic 
writings deemed unsuitable for viewing by the general public. To our knowledge, this particular translation has never 
been made available to the public before appearing in NEXUS Magazine. While NEXUS published these transcriptions 
in an earlier issue (Vol. 2, #3), we thought them worthy of repeating for the benefit of our newer readers, particularly in 
light of recent world events. Mother Shipton reputedly was born Ursula Sontheil in 1488 in Norfolk, England, and died in 
1561. She exhibited prophetic and psychic abilities from an early age. At 24, married to Toby Shipton, she eventually 
became known as Mother Shipton. Many of her visions came true within her own lifetime and in subsequent centuries. 
These rare verses from Mother Shipton seem to have prophetic indications for our times, but of course are open to 

And now 3 word, in uncouth rhyme 
Of what whall be in future time 

Then upside down the world shall be 
And gold found at the root of tree 
All England's sons that plough the land 
Shall oft be seen with Book in hand 
The poor shall now great wisdom know 
Great houses stand in far-flung vale 
All covered o'er with snow and hail 

A carriage without horse will go 
Disaster fill the world with woe. 
In London, Primrose Hill shall be 
In centre hold a Bishop's See 

Around the world men's thoughts will fly 
Quick as the twinkling of an eye. 
And water shall great wonders do 
How strange. And yet it shall come true. 

Through towering hills proud men shall ride 
No horse or ass move by his side. 
Beneath the water, men shall walk 

Shall ride, shall sleep, shall even talk. 
And in the air men shall be seen 
In white and black and even green 

A great man then, shall come and go 
For prophecy declares it so. 

In water, iron, then shall float 
As easy as a wooden boat 
Gold shall be seen in stream and stone 
In land that is yet unknown. 

And England shall admit a Jew 
You think this strange, but it is true 
The Jew that once was held in scorn 
Shall of a Christian then be born. 

A house of glass shall come to pass 
In England. But Alas, alas 
A war will follow with the work 
Where dwells the Pagan and the Turk 

These states will lock in fiercest 
And seek to take each others life. 



When North shall thus divide the south 
And Eagle build in Lions mouth 
Then tax and blood and cruel war 
Shall come to every humble door. 

Three times shall lovely sunny France 
Be led to play a bloody dance 
Before the people shall be free 
Three tyrant rulers shall she see. 

Three rulers in succession be 
Each springs from different dynasty. 
Then when the fiercest strife is done 
England and France shall be as one. 

The British olive shall next then twine 
In marriage with a German vine. 
Men walk beneath and over streams 
Fulfilled shall be their wondrous dreams. 

For in those wondrous far off days 
The women shall adopt a craze 
To dress like men, and trousers wear 
And to cut off their locks of hair 
They'll ride astride with brazen brow 
As witches do on broomstick now. 

And roaring monsters with man atop 
Does seem to eat the verdant crop 
And men shall fly as birds do now 
And give away the horse and plough. 

There'll be a sign for all to see 
Be sure that it will certain be. 
Then love shall die and marriage cease 
And nations wane as babes decrease 

And wives shall fondle cats and dogs 
And men live much the same as hogs. 

In nineteen hundred and twenty six 
Build houses light of straw and sticks. 
For then shall mighty wars be planned 
And fire and sword shall sweep the land. 

When pictures seem alive with movements free 
When boats like fishes swim beneath the sea, 
When men like birds shall scour the sky 
Then half the world, deep drenched in blood shall die. 

For those who live the century through 
In fear and trembling this shall do. 
Flee to the mountains and the dens 
To bog and forest and wild fens. 

For storms will rage and oceans roar 
When Gabriel stands on sea and shore 
And as he blows his wondrous horn 
Old worlds die and new be born. 

A fiery dragon will cross the sky 
Six times before this earth shall die 
Mankind will tremble and frightened be 
for the sixth heralds in this prophecy. 

For seven days and seven nights 
Man will watch this awesome sight. 
The tides will rise beyond their ken 
To bite away the shores and then 
The mountains will begin to roar 
And earthquakes split the plain to shore. 

And flooding waters, rushing in 
Will flood the lands with such a din 
That mankind cowers in muddy fen 
And snarls about his fellow men. 

He bares his teeth and fights and kins 
And secrets food in secret hills 
And ugly in his fear, he lies 
To kill marauders, thieves and spies. 

Man flees in terror from the floods 

And kills, and rapes and lies in blood 

And spilling blood by mankind's hands 

Will stain and bitter many lands 

And when the dragon's tail is gone, 
Man forgets, and smiles, and carries on 
To apply himself - too late, too late 
For mankind has earned deserved fate. 

His masked smile - his false grandeur, 
Will serve the Gods their anger stir. 
And they will send the Dragon back 
To light the sky • his tail will crack 
Upon the earth and rend the earth 
And man shall flee, King, Lord, and serf. 

But slowly they are routed out 
To seek diminishing water spout 
And men will die of thirst before 
The oceans rise to mount the shore. 

And lands will crack and rend anew 
You think it strange. It will come true. 

And in some far off distant! and 
Some men . oh such a tiny band 
Will have to leave their solid mount , 
And span the earth, those few to count, 
Who survives this (unreadable) and then 
Begin the human race again. 

But not on land already there 
But on ocean beds, stark, dry and bare 
Not every soul on Earth will die 
As the Dragons tail goes sweeping by. 


Not every land on earth will sink 
But these will wallow in stench and stink 
Of rotting bodies of beast and man 
Of vegetation crisped on land. 

But the land that rises from the sea 
Will be dry and clean and soft and free 
Of mankind's dirt and therefore be 
The source of man's new dynasty. 

And those that live will ever fear 
The dragons tail for many year 
But time erases memory 
You think it strange, But it will be. 

And before the race is built anew 
A silver serpent comes to view 
And spew out men of like unknown 
To mingle with the earth now grown 
Cold from its heat and these men can 
Enlighten the minds of future man. 

To intermingle and show them how 
To live and love and thus endow 
The children with the second sight 
A natural thing so that they might 
Grow graceful, humble and when they do 
The Golden Age will start anew. 

The dragons tail is but a sign 

For mankind's fall and man's decline. 

And before this prophecy is done 

I shall be burned at the stake, at. one 

My body singed and my soul set free 

You think I utter blasphemy 

You're wrong. These things have come to me 

This prophecy will come to be. 

These verses were on the outer wrapping of the scrolls: 

I know I go - 1 know I'm free 
I know that this will come to be. . 
Secreted this - for this will be 
Found by later dynasty 

A dairy maid, a bonny lass 
Shall kick this tone as she does pass 
And five generations she shall breed 
Before one male child does learn to read. 

This is then held year by year 

Till an iron monster trembling fear 
eats parchment, words and quill and ink 
And mankind is given time to think. 

And only when this comes to be 
Will mankind read this prophecy 
But one mans sweets another's bane 
So I shall not have burned in vain. 

This section was kept apart from the other and it appears 
to have been written together yet was in a separate jar: 

The signs will be there for all to read 
When man shall do most heinous deed 
Man will ruin kinder lives 
By taking them as to their wives. 

And murder foul and brutal deed 
When man will only think of greed. 
And man shall walk as if asleep 
He does not look - he may not peep 
And iron men the tail shall do 
And iron cart and carriage too. 

The kings shall false promise make 
And talk just for tal king's sake 
And nations plan horrific war 
The like as never seen before 
And taxes rise and lively down 
And nations wear perpetual frown. 

Yet greater sign there be to see 

As man nears latter century 

Three sleeping mountains gather breath 

And spew out mud, and ice and death. 

And earthquakes swallow town and town, 

In lands as yet to me unknown. 

And Christian one fights Christian two 

And nations sigh, yet nothing do 

And yellow men great power gain 

From mighty bear with whom they've lain. 

These mighty tyrants will fail to do 
They fail to split the world in two. 
But from their acts a danger bred 
An ague - leaving many dead. 
And physics find no remedy 
For this is worse than leprosy. 

Oh many signs for all to see / 

The truth of this true prophesy. 


The Visions of Dannion Brinkley 

In September of 1975, then 25 year old Dannion Brinkley was struck by lightning while talking on 
the phone. Efforts by doctors in the hospital to revive his electrocuted body failed, and he died. As 
his wife and best friend grieved over his body, Dannion had what has come to be known as a 
"near-death experience". He found himself traveling through a tunnel toward a bright light, 
where he was met by a "Being of Light'. As happens to many NDE experiences, Dannion then 
had a "life review" in which he experienced all of the significant events of his life, from the 
perspectives of the people with whom he had interacted. As he had killed many people in 
Vietnam, the life review was an excruciating experience. He felt every nuance of the horrible 
results of his actions on the people he killed and their families. Despite an overwhelming sense of 
shame for his actions, Dannion felt nothing but love from the Being of Light. 

Dannion then was shown 12 "boxes" in which unfolded disturbing visions of events on earth. He 
realized he was seeing events that had not yet occurred. As the visions ended, Dannion said he 
"had the amazing realization that these Beings were desperately trying to help us, not because we 
were such good guys, but because without us advancing spiritually here on earth, they could not 
become successful in their world." "You humans are truly the heroes," a Being told him. 'Those 
who go to earth are heroes and heroines, because you are doing something that no other spiritual 
beings have the courage to do. You have gone to earth to co-create with God." 

After receiving his visions and instructions from the Beings of Light Dannion found himself 
staring at his body, covered by a sheet in a hallway, as two orderlies approached to take it to the 
morgue. He entered his body, putting himself in full possession of its pain, and managed to blow 
on the sheets to alert the orderlies. He had been dead for 28 minutes. 

After much physical rehabilitation (serious health problems have remained with him to the 
present) Dannion wrote down 117 events he witnessed in the boxes. By 1993, 95 of them had 
occurred. As you might well imagine, Dannion returned from his experience a changed man. He 
has spent the last 20 years in all manner of service to his fellow human beings, working especially 
in Hospices with those close to death. In 1994, his first book "Saved by the Light" was published. 
His second book, "At Peace in the Light', was published the following year. Both are available as 
Harper paperbacks and are truly excellent and well worth reading. It is interesting to note one of 
the final messages Dannion received: "Without words, he told me that everything I had just seen 
was in the future, but not necessarily cast in stone. The flow of human events can be changed, but 
first people have to know what they are,' said the Being." As you read, it will be apparent that 
most of the early visions came to pass as foreseen. But it seems some of the later events might 
possibly have been changed. It offers hope that we can have an impact. 

Following is a short encapsulation of the visions Dannion received. For a more complete version, 
read "Saved bv the Lieht." 

Dannion Brinkley's Visions of the Future "spiritual hollowness" as Americans lost faith in 

America and what it stood for, and lost love for God. He 

BOXES ONE THROUGH THREE: saw the results of a "spiritual depravity" manifesting as 

Visions of a demoralized country "people rioting and looting because they wanted more 

material goods than they had, kids shooting other kids 

Boxes one and two showed the mood of America in the with high-powered rifles, criminals stealing cars, young 

aftermath of the war in Southeast Asia. Dannion saw men firing on other young men from the windows of cars." 

MIAs in slave labor camps in the jungles of North 

Vietnam, saw America failing into enormous debt, saw a 


Box three showed the Seal of the President of the United 
States, with the initials "RR". He could tell the man 
was an actor, and he saw cartoons of him as a cowboy. 
For years following this vision, Dannion assumed Robert 
Redford would become president (!) 


Strife and hatred in the holy lands 

Boxes four and five were scenes from the Middle East, 
showing how in this area strife would reach a boiling 
point. Dannion saw two agreements taking place. In the 
first, Israelis and Arabs were agreeing to something, but 
Dannion couldn't make it out. (This was likely the 
agreement between Israel and Egypt to return the Sinai 

In the second agreement, "men were shaking hands and 
there was much talk about a new country. Then I saw a 
collage of images: the River Jordan, a settlement from 
Israel that was spreading into Jordan, and a map on 
which the country of Jordan was changing color." As he 
watched this puzzling collage unfold, Dannion heard a 
Being speak telepathic ally and say that the country of 
Jordan would exist no more. 

'This agreement was nothing more than a front by the 
Israelis to create a police force composed of Israelis and 
Arabs. This was a very harsh police force, cruel and 
unyielding. I saw them wearing blue-and-silver uniforms 
and having a tight grip on the people of this region. So 
tight was their grip, in fact, that world leaders became 
highly critical of Israel. Many collaborators on both 
sides kept an eye on their own people and reported their 
activities to this police force." 

"I could see Israel becoming isolated from the rest of the 
world. As things worsened, there were images of Israel 
preparing for war against other countries, including 
Russia and a Chinese-and-Arab consortium. Jerusalem 
was somehow at the eye of this conflict." Dannion could 
see that some incident in that holy city had served to 
trigger this war. 

The visions revealed Israel as being spiritually hollow, 
a nation of strong government but weak morals. Image 
after image came of Israelis reacting with hatred toward 
Palestinians and other Arabs. 

The fifth box showed oil being used as a weapon to 
control the international economy. Dannion saw Mecca 
and the Saudi people. A telepathic voice told him oil 
production was being cut off to destroy America' s 
economy. The price of oil was going up and up, an d Saudi 
Arabia was making an alliance with Syria and China. 
"I could see Arab and Oriental people shaking hands and 
making deals. As these images came to me, I could sense 
money being given by the Saudis to Asian countries like 
North Korea, all in the hopes of destabilizing the 

economy of the Asian region. I wondered where this 
alliance began and I was able to see a closeup of Syrians 
and Chinese signing papers and shaking hands in a 
building that I knew was in Syria. The date that came to 

me was 1992." 

"Another date came to me-1993-and with it came images 
of Syrian and Chinese scientists working in laboratories 
to develop a missile that could deliver chemical and 
biological weapons." 


Visions of nuclear destruction 

"Number six was terrifying. I was drawn into the box and 
found myself in a cool, forested area beside a river. Next 
to the river was a massive cement structure, square and 
foreboding. I was fearful and didn't know why. 
Suddenly the earth shook and the top of this cement 
structure exploded. I knew it was a nuclear explosion and 
could sense hundreds of people dying around me as it took 
place. The year 1986 was given to me through telepathy, 
as was the word "wormwood". 

"It wasn't until a decade later, when the Chernobyl 
nuclear plant exploded near Kiev in the Soviet Union, 
that I was able to associate these pictures with an event. 
It was then that I made another connection between the 
vision in this box and the nuclear disaster in the USSR. 
The word Chernobyl means "wormwood" in Russian." 

Dannion went on to see the collapse of the Soviet Union, 
brought on in part by the nuclear accident. He saw the 
formation of a "Mafia" that came out of Georgia and 
operated with impunity out of a city he took to be 
Moscow. Eventually the Mafia grew to be a power that 
was a competition to the government. 

"I felt no joy as I watched the Soviet Union collapse. 
Although Soviet-style communism was dying right 
before my eyes, the Being of Light was saying that this 
was a cautious moment instead of a glorious one. 'Watch 
the Soviet Union,' he said. 'How the Russian people go, 
so goes the world. What happens to Russia is the basis 
for everything that will happen to the economy of the 
free world.'" 


The environmental religion 

'The seventh box held powerful images of environmental 
destruction. I could see areas ef the world radiating 
energy, glowing like a radium watch face in the dark. 
Telepathically I could hear voices speaking of the need 
to clean up the environment. These voices came out of 
Russia at first, but then the accents changed and I could 
tell that they were emanating from South America, 
probably from Uruguay or Paraguay. I saw the speaker 
from Russia as he talked with zealabout our need to 


heal the environment. People rallied around him 
quickly, and he soon became so powerful that he was 
elected one of the leaders of the United Nations. I saw 
this Russian riding on a white horse, and I knew that his 
rise would come before the year 2000." 

China battles Russia 

"In boxes eight and nine were visions of China's growing 
anger toward the Soviet Union. The main battle was 
over a railroad, which the Chinese took in heavy 
fighting. They then pushed deep into the Soviet Union, 
cutting the country in half and taking over the oil fields 
of Siberia." 


Economic earthquakes, Desert Storm 

"Boxes ten and eleven came in rapid succession. They 
revealed scenes of the economic collapse of the world. In 
general terms, these visions showed a world in horrible 
turmoil by the turn of the century, one that resulted in a 
new world order that was truly one of feudalism and 
strife. The voice that accompanied the visions told me 
that this would take place in the nineties and would be 
the beginning of an economic strife that would lead to the 
bankruptcy of America by the year 2000." 

"But the end of America as a world power came as visions 
of two horrendous earthquakes in which buildings were 
swaying and toppling over like a child's wooden blocks. 
I knew that these quakes happened sometime before the 
end of the century, but I couldn't tell where they took 
place. I do remember seeing a large body of water that 
was probably a river." 

The cost of rebuilding these destroyed cities would be 
the final straw for our government; now so financially 
broken that it would hardly be able to keep itself alive. 
The voice in the vision told me that it would be this way 
while the images from the box showed Americans 
starving and lined up for food." 

"At the tail end of box ten came images of warfare in the 
desert, a massive show of military might I saw armies 
racing toward one another in the desert; with great 
clouds of dust billowing from the treads of tanks as they 
crossed the barren ground. There was cannon fire and 
explosions that looked like lightning. The earth shook 
and then there was silence. Like a bird, I flew over acres 
of destroyed army equipment. As I left the box, the date 
1990 came into my head. That was the year of Desert 


Middle East turmoil, war in the Balkans, famine 

"Box eleven began with Iran and Iraq in possession of 
nuclear and chemical weapons. Included in this arsenal 
was a submarine loaded with nuclear missiles. The year, 
said a'voice in the vision, was 1993. I saw this submarine 
powering through the waters of the Middle East, piloted 
by people I knew to be Iranians. I could tell that their 
purpose was to stop the shipping of oil from the Middle 
East. They were so praiseful of God in their speech that 
I had the sense that this was some kind of religious 

The missiles that occupied the desert of the Middle 
East were equipped with chemical warheads. I don't 
know where they were aimed, but I do know that there 
was worldwide fear of the intentions of the Arab nations 
that had them." 

"Chemical warfare played a role in a horrible vision of 
terrorism that takes place in France before 2000. It begins 
when the French publish a book that infuriates the Arab 
world. I don't know the title of this book, but the result 
of its publication is a chemical attack by Arabs on a city 
in France. A chemical is put into the water supply, and 
thousands drink it and die before it can be eliminated." 

Another vision shows Egypt would collapse as a 
democracy in 1997 and be taken over by religious fanatics. 

The final visions from box eleven were like many 
images we now see of Sarajevo: modern cities crumbling 
beneath the weight of warfare, their inhabitants 
fighting one another for reasons ranging from racism to 
religious conflict. I saw many towns worldwide where 
desperate citizens were eating their own dead. In one 
such scene, Europeans in a hilly region of the world were 
weeping as they cooked human meat. In rapid succession 
I saw people of all five races eating their fellow 

Technology and virus 

The twelfth box addressed an important event in the 
distant future, the decade of the nineties when many of 
the great changes would take place. (Remember these 
visions occurred in 1975.) In this box I watched as a 
biological engineer from the Middle East found a way to 
alter DNA and create a biological virus that would be 
used in the manufacture of computer chips. This 
discovery allowed for huge strides in science and 
technology. Japan, China, and other countries of the 
Pacific Rim experienced boom times as a result of this 
discovery and became powers of incredible magnitude. 
Computer chips produced from this process found their 
way into virtually every form of technology, from cars 
and airplanes to vacuum cleaners and blenders." 

"Before the turn of the century, this man was among the 
richest in the world, so rich that he had a stranglehold 

on the world economy. Still the world welcomed him, 
since the computer chips he had designed somehow put 
the world on an even keel. Gradually he succumbed to 
his own power. He began to think of himself as a deity 
and insisted on greater control of the world. With that 
extra control, he began to rule the world. His method of 
rule was unique. Everyone in the world was mandated by 
law to have one of his computer chips inserted 
underneath his or her skin. This chip contained all of an 
individual's personal information. People who refused 
to have chips implanted in their bodies roamed as 
outcasts. They could not be employed and were denied 
government services." 


"At the very end came a thirteenth vision. I don't know 
where it came from. I didn't see a Being of Light bring it 
forward in a box, nor did I see one take it away. This 
vision was in many ways the most important of all 
because it summed up everything I had seen in the twelve 
boxes. Through telepathy I could hear a Being say, 'If 
you follow what you have been taught and keep living 
the same way you have lived the last thirty years, all 
of this will surely be upon you. If you change, you can 
avoid the coming war.'" 

"Scenes from a horrible world war accompanied this 
message. As the visions appeared on the screen, the 
Being told me that the years 1994 through 19% were 
critical ones in determining whether this war would 
break out. 'If you follow this dogma, the world by the 
year 2004 will not be the same one you now know,' said 
the Being. 'But it can still be changed and you can help 
change it.'" 

"Scenes from World War III came to life before me. I was 
in a hundred places at once, from deserts to forests, and 
saw a world filled with fighting and chaos. Somehow it 
was clear that this final war, an Armageddon if you 
will, was caused by fear. In one of the most puzzling 
visions of all, I saw an army of women in black robes and 
veils marching through a European city." 

"The fear these people are feeling is an unnecessary one,' 
said the Being of Light. 'But it is a fear so great that 
humans will give up all freedoms in the name of safety.':' 

"I also saw scenes that were not of war, including many 
visions of natural disasters. In parts of the world that 
had once been fertile with wheat and corn, I saw parched 
desert and furrowed fields that farmers had given up on. 
In Other parts of the world, torrential rainstorms had 
gouged out the earth, eating away topsoil and creating 
rivers of thick, dark mud." 

"People were starving in this vision. They were begging 
for food on the streets, holding out bowls and cups and 
even their hands in hopes that someone or something 

would offer them a scrap to eat. In some of the pictures, 
people had given up or were too weak to beg and were 
curled on the ground waiting for the gift of death." 

"I saw civil wars breaking out in Central ahd South 
America and the rise of socialist governments in all of 
these countries before the year 2000. As these wars 
intensified, millions of refugees streamed across the U.S. 
border, looking for a new life in North America. Nothing 
we did could stop these immigrants. They were driven by 
fear of death and loss of confidence in God. I saw 
millions of people streaming north out of El Salvador and 
Nicaragua, and more millions crossing the Rio Grande 
into Texas. There were so many of them that we had to 
line the border with troops and force them back across 
the river. The Mexican economy was broken by these 
refugees and collapsed under the strain." 

"As these visions ended, I had the amazing realization 
that these Beings were desperately trying to help us, not 
because we were such good guys, but because without us 
advancing spiritually here on earth, they could not 
become successful in their world. 'You humans are truly 
the heroes,' a Being told me. Those who go to earth are 
heroes and heroines, because you are doing something 
that no other spiritual beings have the courage to do. 
You have gone to earth to co-create with God.' Without 
words, he told me that everything I had just seen was in 
the future, but not necessarily cast in stone. 'The flow of 
human events can be changed, but first people have to 
know what they are,' said the Being. He communicated 
to me again their belief that humans were great, 
powerful, and mighty spiritual Beings. 'We here see 
everyone who goes to the earth as great adventurers,' he 
said. 'You had the courage to go and expand your life and 
take your place in the great adventure that God created 
known as the world. Humans are mighty spiritual 
beings. All they need to realize is that love is treating 
others the way they themselves want to be treated.'" 


Edgar Cayce 

Edgar Cayce, (pronounced Casey) 1877-1945, was perhaps the best-documented psychic of all time. I was 
introduced to his work by a fellow Sunbow 5 walker, and was astounded by what I read: the information given 
by Mr. Cayce while in a hypnotic state agrees very remarkably with the information given by the Hopi 
themselves. My investigation of his life story revealed a very humble and Godly man; one of deep Christian 
faith whose beliefs were challenged and ultimately transformed by the extraordinary information that came 

Born March 18,1877 near Hopkinsville, Kentucky, young Edgar (who early on received the nickname "Old 
Man") grew up on his family's farm. He spent much time with his Grandfather, the County's dowser. After his 
Grandfather's death in an accident, Edgar reported visits and talks with him in the barn. His mother didn't try 
to dispute these reports, but encouraged him not to speak of them too widely. At an early age, Edgar 
discovered a passion for reading the Bible He decided to read the Bible once through for every year of his life, 
which he continued until his death in 1945. 

One evening, after spending the day reading the Bible in his favorite sunny spot in the woods, Edgar was 
visited by a luminous Spirit Being, who told him his prayers had been heard. The "Angelic Lady," as Edgar 
described the being, asked him what he wished for. Edgar replied To be helpful to others, and especially to 
children when they are sick." The Angel told him his wish had been granted. 

In 1901, when he was 24, Cayce lost his voice and could scarcely speak above a whisper. Doctors were 
unable to help him, and the condition persisted for an entire year. Finally, with the visit of a noted New York 
Hypnotist, Edgar agreed to a session of hypnosis. While in a hypnotic state, Cayce startled everyone by 
speaking in a normal voice and giving a diagnosis of his own problem. He suggested a treatment which worked 
and his normal voice was restored. 

A short while later, a local doctor who was present at Cayce's hypnosis se&on made a re uest which 
changed Cayce's life forever. He asked Cayce to allow himself to be hypnotized again to see i #ie ability to 
diagnosis illness would work for a very ill young girl who was a patient of the doctor's. Reluctantly, Cayce 
agreed, and to his astonishment, the doctor told him on awakening that he had delivered an accurate diagnosis 
using correct medical terminology, and had suggested an unconventional treatment. Cayce, who remembered 
nothing of what he had said, insisted he knew nothing of medicine or treatments, and was horrified by the 
prospect that what he had suggested might harm the little girl. But the doctor assured him that nothing he had 
suggested would hurt, and he went on to apply the treatments recommended by Cayce. To the delight of the 
girl's parents and of the doctor, the little girl made a full recovery from a serious and long illness which the 
doctor had previously been unable to cure. 

Cayce was deeply troubled by this event. His fundamentalist Christian mind viewed psychic ability in a 
dim light, and he was afraid it might be the work of the Devil. His mother was a very positive influence during 
this time, reminding him of the visit by the Angel, and of his wish. She encouraged him to pray that only God's 
Will be done through him, and to have faith. 

The doctor made repeated requests for Cayce's help with other difficult cases, and very reluctantly Cayce 
agreed to allow himself to be hypnotized again and again. Each time the results were the same: accurate 
diagnosis, unconventional suggested treatments, and very positive results when the treatments were followed. 

Cayce received his first national publicity when Wesley H. Ketchum, a local doctor who had been working 
with him, delivered a paper on Cayce's strange ability to a medical convention. On October 9, 1910, a New 
York Times article on Ketchum's presentation brought Cayce publicity and a flood of requests for healing. 

His work with Ketchum ended, and Cayce, who was now living in Selma, Alabama, hired Gladys Davis, a 
local stenographer, to help with the requests for readings. Davis continued to work with Cayce for the rest of 
his life, anid after his death she went on to index the readings under more than 10,000 subjects. 

In 1923, the work of his readings took an unexpected turn when an Ohio man who was interested in 
metaphysical subjects asked for information on any previous life he may have had. Information on several 
Drevious lives was given, in the same matter-of-fact way that physical health information had been given. Thus 
Degan an entirely new line of work for Cayce, in which information was given on past lives, forgotten periods of 
luman history, on the origin and destiny of souls, and humanity's relationship with God. Muchtof this new 
information-especially on reincarnation-was outside of Cayce's beliefs, and he struggled mightily before fully 
accepting this and the other extraordinary information which came forward. 

There are many books and other excellent sources of information on Cayce's work, and much is available 
from the organization he founded, The Association for Research and Enlightenment (A.R.E.), in Virginia Beach, 
VA. Among resources to be found there are the original transcripts of Cayce's readings, one of the largest 
libraries of metaphysical literature in the world, and Search for God study groups, which can be found all around 
the world. You can reach the A.R.E. at 1-800-333-4499 or visit their internet site: http:/ /\ww.are-cay 


In selecting the following excerpts, I am indebted to one "compiler" in particular, b. Ernest Frejer, for his 
excellent collation of excerpts from Cayce's readings grouped under 264 subjects in The Edgar Cayce Companion, 
1995, A.R.E. Press. 

In the following transcripts, words that were emphasized by Cayce are shown in bold. Also, sections I find 
particularly relevant to the subject of this document are shown in bold in their entirety. The initials "EC" 
indicate Edgar Cayce, "GC" is Gertrude Cayce, his wife, who was often the "conductor" of the reading, though 
his son Hugh Lynn ("HLC") often took that role toward the end of Cayce's life. "GD" is Gladys Davis, the 
stenographer who transcribed the more than 14,000 readings Cayce gave in his lifetime. According to the 
readings, all were souls who had associated with one another in many previous lifetimes and who entered this 
time for a definite purpose. 

Each reading received a number. A number such as 349-4 indicates the fourth reading for entity 349. In 
some cases where the reading refers to the "present time," the date of the reading follows the reading number. 
There were readings given on specific topics, such as the 364 Atlantis series, 262 Study Group series or the 281 
series for the Prayer Healing group. However most of the readings were given to individuals, and it should be 
kept in mind that the information given was tailored specifically for the person receiving it. In particular, most 
of the people requesting readings were Christians, and thus such information was given as would be familiar 
and meaningful to them. However the readings made clear that no person or religion has a monopoly on the 
approach to God. (One woman who asked whether she should associate with the A.R.E. received this 
response: 'This is identified with the Christian forces. Hold fast to the basic principles in that phase of same. 
There may be help there, but not as identified with same. This is the identification • the Christ-like principle!") 
You may find as I have that most of the information given through Mr. Cayce is universal in nature, and may be 
of interest to any seeker. 

what is needed most in the earth today? That the 
sons of men be warned that the day of the Lord is near at 

hand, and that those who have been and are unfaithful 
must meet themselves in those things which come to pass 
in their experience. 51482 5/29/44 


In the beginning God created the heavens and the 
earth. How? The mind of God moved, and matter, form, 
came into being. 262-78 

Spirit is life; the Mind is the builder; the Physical is 
the result 349-4 

All souls were created in the beginning, and are 
finding their way back to whence they came. 3744-5 

In the beginning, all souls that were as portions of the 
thought of God were given the opportunity for expression, 
as to be companions for that Creative Force - or God. 


The entity was ever a part of the U niversal 

Consciousness, but was given the will. ..that it might be 
individual, knowing itself to be itself and yet one with 
the Creative Forces. 2524-1 

(Q) The first problem concerns the reason for creation. 
Should this be given as God's desire to experience 
Himself, God's desire for companionship, God's desire for 
expression, or in some other way? 

(A) God's desire for companionship and expression. 

(Q) The second problem concerns that which is 
variously called evil, darkness, negation, sin. Should it 

be said that this condition existed as a necessary element 
of creation, and the soul, given free will, found itself with 
the power to indulge in it, or lose itself in it? Or should it 
be said that this is a condition created by the activity of 
the soul itself? Should it be described, in either case, as a 
state of consciousness, a gradual lack of awareness of self 
and self's relation to God? 

(A) It is the free will and its losing itself in its 
relationship to God. 

(Q) The third problem has to do with the fall of 
man. Should this be described as something which was 
inevitable in the destiny of souls, or something which 
God did not desire, but which He did not prevent once He 
had given free will? The problem here is to reconcile the 
omniscience of God and His knowledge of all things with 
the free will of the soul and the soul's fall from grace. 

(A) He did not prevent, once having given free will. 
For, He made the individual entities or souls in the 
beginning. For, the beginnings of sin, of course, were in 
seeking expression of themselves outside of the plan or 
the way in which God had expressed same. Thus it was 
the individual, see? 

Having given free will, then-though having the 
foreknowledge, though being omnipotent and 
omnipresent, -it is only when the soul that is a portion of 
God chooses that God knows the end thereof. 

(Q) The fourth problem concerns man's tenancy on 
earth. Was it originally intended that souls remain out of 
earthly forms, and were the rllces originated as a 
necessity resulting from error? 

(A) The earth and its manifestations were only the 
expression of God and not necessarily as a place of tenancy 
for the souls of men, until man was created-to meet the 
needs of existing conditions. 


(Q) The fifth problem concerns an explanation of the 
Life Readings. From a study of these it seems that there 
is a trend downward, from early incarnations, toward 
greater earthliness and less mentality. Then there is a 
swing upward, accompanied by suffering, patience, and 
understanding. Is this the normal pattern, which results 
in virtue and oneness with God obtained by free will and 

(A) This is correct. It is the pattern as it is set in 
Him. 5749-14 

(Q) Define sin and original sin, or what was original 
sin? Please explain. 

(A) It may be defined in one word, . disobedience! 

In the beginning, the perfect man was given all the 
attributes of the Father-God, in ideal environments 
prepared by God for man's material manifestation. Let's 
draw the comparisons of man made perfect through 
experience, and man willfully being disobedient: 

In the first we find man listening to those influences 
which were at variance to God's way. Then in the 
temple, even at twelve, we find the perfect man seeking, 
asking, and answering questions as to man's relationship 
to God. 262-125 

Error or separation began before there appeared what 
we know as the earth, the heavens; or before space was 
manifested. 262-115 


(Q) May we assume that the term "entangle" means a 
soul's participation and immersion in a form or system of 
creative expression which was not necessarily intended 
for such participation and immersion, as the earth? 

(A) To be sure, there are those consciousnesses or 
awarenesses that have not participated in nor been a part 
of earth's physical consciousness; as the angels, the 
archangels, the masters to whom there has been 
attainment, and to those influences that have prepared 
the way. 

Remember, as given, the earth is that speck, that 
part of creation where souls projected themselves into 
matter, and thus brought that conscious awareness of 
themselves entertaining the ability of creating without 
those forces of the spirit of truth. 5755-2 

There lived in this land of Atlantis one Arnilius, who 
had first notedthat of the separations of the beings as 
inhabited that portion of the earth's sphere or plane of 
those peoples into male and female as separate entities, 
or individuals. As to their forms in the physical sense, 
these were much rather of the nature of thought forms, or 
able to push out of themselves in that direction in which 
its development took shape in thought-much in the way 
and manner as the amoeba would in the waters of a 
stagnant bay, or lake, in the present. As these took form, 
by the gratifying of their own desire for that as builded 
or added to the material conditions, they became 

hardened or set-much in the form of the existent human 
body of the day, with that of color as partook of its 
surroundings much in the manner as the chameleon in the 
present. 364-3 

These, then, are the manners in which the entities, 
those bongs, those souls, in the beginning partook of, or 
developed. Some brought about monstrosities, as those of 
its (that entity's) association by its projection with its 
association with beasts of various characters. Hence 
those of the Styx, satyr, and the like; those of the sea, or 
mermaid; those of the unicorn and those of the various 
forms-these projections of what? The abilities in the 
psychic forces (psychic meaning, then, of the mental and 
the soul...) 

Hence the greater development of that called occult, 
or psychic forces, during the Atiantean period-and the 
use of same, and the abuse of same-was during its first 
thousand years... 

Hence we have that which has been given through 
many of the sources of information, or the channels for 
individuals-and in those, these, the entity-as a voice 
upon waters, or as the wind that moved among the reeds 
and harkened, or again as when the morning stars sang 
together and the sons of God beheld the coming of man 
into his own, through the various realms as were brought 
by the magnifying of, or the deteriorating of, the use of 
those forces and powers as manifested themselves in a 
material area, or those that partook of carnal to the 
gratification of that that brought about its continual 
hardening and less ability to harkert back through that 
from which it came, and partaking more and more oft h a t 
upon which it became an eater of. 36410 

The entity was in the Atiantean land and in those 
periods before Adam was in the earth. The entity was 
among those who were then "thought projections", and 
the physical being had the union of sex in the one body, 
and yet a real musician on pipes or reed instruments. 


Before this we find the entity was in that land that 
has been termed Zu, or Lemuria, or Mu. This was before 
the sojourn of peoples in perfect body form; rather when 
they may be said to have been able to-through those 
developments of the period-be in the body or out of the 
body and act upon materiality. In the spirit or in flesh 
these made those things, those influences, that brought 
destruction; for the atmospheric pressure in the earth in 
the period was quite different from that experienced by 
the physical being of today. j 436-2 

In the land now known as Utah or Nevada, when the 
first peoples were separated into groups as families... 
The entity developed much and gave much to the people 
who were to succeed in that land, and in the ruins as are 
found in the mounds and caves in the northwestern portion 
of New Mexico may be seen some of the drawings the 
entity then made, some ten million years ago. 2665-2 


In the Atlantean land, during those periods when 
there were the divisions between those of the Law of One 
and the sons of Belial, and the offspring of what was the 
pure race and those that had projected themselves into 
creatures that became as the sons of men (as the 
terminology would be) rather than the creatures of God. 


The entity was among the children of the Law of One 
that succumbed to the wiles, -and it may be well 
interpreted in that answer recorded in Holy Writ,-"Ye 
shall not surely die (Genesis 3:4), but it is pleasant for the 
moment, and for the satisfying of longings within." Thus 
did the entity begin to use spiritual forces for the 
satisfying of material appetites. 2850-1 

(Q) Explain the "Sons of God-Daughters of Men-Sons 
of Man." 

(A) . ..the influences of those souls that sought 
material expression pushed themselves into thought 
forms in the earth... Then, as those expressed they were 
called the Sons of the Earth or Sons of Man. 

When the Creative Forces, God, made then the first 
man-or God-man-he was the beginning of the Sons of God. 

Then those souls who entered through a channel made 
by God-not by thought, not by desire, not by lust, not by 
things that separated continually-were the Sons of God, 
the Daughters of God. The Daughters of Men, then, were 
those who became the channels through which lust knew 
its activity; and it was in this manner then that the 
conditions were expressed as given of old, that the Sons of 
God looked upon the Daughters of Men and saw that they 
were fair, and lusted! 262-119 

All thought forms in matter were put away-through 
the experience of Noah. 257-201 


Man, in Adam (as a group; not as an individual), 
entered into the world (for he entered in five places at 
once, we see-called Adam in one, see?) 900-227 

(Q) Are the places designated for the beginning of 
the five races correct? 

(A) As we find, these are changed, in that: Those in 
the Gobi, the yellow. The white-rather in the 
Carpathians than India, though this is the change to 
which they are made. The red, of course, in the Atlantean 
and in the American. The brown in the Andean. The black 
in the plain and the Sudan, or in African. 

(Q) Where was the Carpathian region? 

(A) Aarat. 

(Q) Where is the location? Is it on the map today? 
(A) Southern part of Europe and Russia, and Persia 
and that land. Caucasian mountains. 

(Q) Why was the number five selected for the 
projection of the five races? 

(A) This, as we find, is that element which 
represents man in his physical form, and the attributes to 
which he may become conscious from the elemental or 
spiritual to the physical consciousness. As the senses; as 
the sensing of the various forces that bring to man the 
activities in the sphere in which he finds himseif. 

This, to be sure, may be expanded upon. This must 
bear in the same relation to that as did exist, to the 
promise that He will come again. Does any individual 
group think of themselves so exalted as that only to one 
peoples will He appear as in the beginning, so shall it 
ever be, that man's indwelling must recognize that not 
only must his desires carnally be crucified, but all 
elements that make for the awareness of the spiritual 
manifestations in the material plane! 

(Q) Did the appearance of what became the five 
races occur simultaneously? 

(A) Occurred at once. 

(Q) Describe the earth's surface at the period of the 
appearance of the five projections. 

(A) This has been given. In the first, or that known 
as the beginning, or in the Caucasian and Carpathian, or 
the Garden of Eden, in that land which lies now much in 
the desert, yet much in mountain and much in the rolling 
lands there. The extreme northern portions were then the 
southern portions, or the polar regions were then turned to 
where they occupied more of the tropical and semi- 
tropical regions; hence it would be hard to discern or 
disseminate the change. The Nile entered into the 
Atlantic Ocean. What is now the Sahara was an 
inhabited land and very fertile. What is now the central 
portion of this country, or the Mississippi basin, was then 
all in the ocean; only the plateau was existent, or the 
regions that are now portions of Nevada, Utah and 
Arizona formed the greater part of what we know as the 
United States. That along the Atlantic board formed the 
outer portion then, or the lowlands of Atlantis. The 
Andean, or the Pacific coast of South America, occupied 
then the extreme western portion of Lemuria. The Urals 
and the northern regions of same were turned into a 
tropical land. The desert in the Mongolian land was then 
the fertile portion. This may enable you to form same 
concept of the status of the earths representations at that 
time! The oceans were then turned about; they no longer 
bear their names, yet from whence obtained they their 
names? What is the legend, even, as to their names? 

(Q) Are the following the correct places? Atlantean, 
the red. 

(A) Atlantean and American, the red race. 

(Q) Upper Africa for the black? 

(A) Or what would be known now as the more western 
portion of upper Egypt for the&lack. You see, with the 
changes-when there came the uprisings in the Atlantean 
land, and the sojourning southward-with the turning of 
the axis, the white and yellow races came more into that 
portion of Egypt, India, Persia and Arabia. 

(Q) There was no original projection in upper India? 

(A) This was a portion rather of the white and the 
yellow as represented. Let these represent the attributes 


of the physical, or the senses and what forms they take, 
rather than calling them white, black, yellow, red and 
green, etc. What do they signify in the sensing? Sight, 
vision-white. Feeling-red. Black-gratifying of 
appetites in the senses. Yellow-mingling in the hearing. 
What is the law of the peoples that these represent? 
Their basic thoughts run to those elements! 364-13 


The entity during the first of the appearances of man 
in the earth's plane, during that period when the five 
appeared. The entity then was in that now of the 
Nevada and Utah. ' 195-14 

represent a portion of Arizona, New Mexico, Colorado, 

There the entity was among those who made for the 
associations with those activities when the great powers 
or nations-through those influences as brought by the 
activities in Egypt, India, the Gobi, the Og-cooperated in 
one great cause. 

The entity then was a leader among those peoples for 
the alleviating of man's influence upon that created by 
man in the enormous animals that had lost control by the 
influences of the powers of suggestion in the associations 
of the spirit-or sons of men-upon the animal world. 

The entity's name then, as would be sounded, would be 
Oum-om. 1211-1 

The land (Gobi) was among those in which there was 
the first appearance of those that were as separate 
entities or souls disentangling themselves from material 
or that we know as animal associations. For the 
projections of these had come from those influences that 
were termed Lemure, or Lemurian, or the land of Mu. 


The Sons of Belial were of one group, or those that 
sought more the gratifying, the satisfying, the use of 
material things for self, without thought or consideration 
as to the sources of such nor the hardships in the 
experiences of others. Or, in other words, as we would 
term it today, they were those without a standard of 

The other group-those who followed the Law of 
One-had a standard. The Sons of Belial had no standard, 
save of self, self-aggrandizement. 

Those entities that were then the producers (as we 
would term today), or the laborers, the farmers or the 
artisans, or those who were in the positions of what we 
would call in the present just machines, were those that 
were projections of the individual activity of the group. 

And it was over these then, and the relationships 
that they bore to those that were in authority, that the 
differences arose. 877-26 

Again we find an experience in the Atlantean land, 
when there were those disturbing forces-or just previous to 
the first disturbing forces that brought the first 
destruction in the continent; through the application of 
spiritual things for self-indulgences of material peoples. 

Those were the periods as termed in thy Scripture 
when The sons of God looked upon the daughters of men, 
and saw them as being fair." 

In the experience the entity held fast to the Law of 
One. This brought many material sorrows, but implanted 
that which is as a portion of the entity; to know evil, to 
know good, when it is in the surroundings of the entity. 


We find the entity was in the land of the present 
nativity, during those periods when there were the first 
of the activities of those peoples in the lands which now 

In the one before this we find in the days when the 
peoples of the nations were gathered as one to defend self 
against the fowls of air and beast of field. The entity 
among those as would be called an envoy to such 
gatherings, and came to that gathering in what would 
now-this period-present, be called lighter than air 
machines. 2749-1 

(Q) What was the date B.C. of this gathering? 
(A) 50,722 262-39 

The entity was in the Indian land or in those periods 
of Saad as the leader the ruler... 

The entity then was among those who were of the 
group who gathered to rid the earth of the enormous 
animals which overran the earth, but ice, the entity 
found, nature, God, changed the poles and the animals 
were destroyed. 5249-1 


In the one before this we find in a strange land, now 
unknown in the world's experience; that lying westward 
from what is NOW southern California and Mexico. In 
this land the entity ruled as with an iron hand, for-from 
and through this land-many were the escapes from the 
various upheavals that occurred in those olden periods 
when there were the divisions of waters and the 
divisions of land, and dry land appeared. In this 
experience the entity lost, and in the aggrandizing of 
selfish interests. In the name Olu. 2669-1 

Before that the entity was in the Atlantean land, at 
those periods when there were the second divisions, or 
when there was the destruction of the lands which made 
Poseidia the remaining portion in which there was the 
greater activity of the sons of the Law of 'One. 

Those were the periods in which there was the 
application of much of that being discovered or 
rediscovered today, in the application of power to modes 
of transit, as well as the use of nature's means for a 
helpful force in giving greater crops for individual 
consumption. Also they were the periods when a great 
deal of thought was given as to conveniences of every 


nature; as the lift or the elevating activities developed 
by that entity, as well as the application of defense as 
well as offensive principles. 2526-1 

Before that we find the entity was in the Atlantean 
land, during those periods when there were those 
determining as to whether there would be the 
application of the laws of the children of One, or the sons 
of Belial in turning into destructive channels those 
influences of infinite power as were being gained from the 
elements as well as from what is termed spiritual or 
supernatural powers in the present 

These we find the entity wavered oft between the 
choices; and when the destruction came about, by the use 
of those rays as were applied for the beneficial forces, 
the entity was found among those who had misapplied 
the abilities. 

In the application then of self from those experiences, 
as Entezor,-we find that the influences of the atomic 
energies, of the electrical forces as of every nature, become 
an instrument for activity in which good or bad may come. 

The entity is drawn to same,-but what will ye do 
with same? Will ye use same for beneficial or beneficent 
effects, for helpful influences, or for destruction? 1792-2 

(Q) What was the date of the Peruvian incarnation 
as given in Life Reading, and what was the disturbance in 
the earth as mentioned? Give such details as will clear 
up this period. 

(A) As indicated from that just given, the entity was 
in Atlantis when there was the second period of 
disturbance - which would be some twenty-two thousand, 
five hundred (22,500) before the periods of the Egyptian 
activity covered by the Exodus; or it was some twenty- 
eight thousand (28,000) before Christ, see? 470-22 


The Atlanteans are all exceptional. They either 
wield woe or great development. And their influences are 
felt, whether the individual recognizes it in himself or 

This entity as we find, as in most of the Atlanteans' 
experiences, requires a great deal of mental and oft 
physical activity to satisfy, or to fill the self. For it is a 
very active mind! 

The entity was in the Atlantean land during those 
periods between the second and the last upheavals; when 
there were the great antagonistic feelings between the 
sons of Belial and the children of the Law of One. The 
entity was among the children of the Law of One who 
made the greater overtures to those peoples for the 
acknowledging of the laborers, and to make their 
experiences easier,-those laborers that were considered 
by many as merely things rather than individual souls. 


In the city of Poseidon... (the entity) acted as the 
priestess in the Temple of Light... who oversaw the 
activities of the communications between the various 
lands-as from Om, Mu, the hierarchy land in that now 
known as the United States, in that particular portion of 
Arizona and Nevada, that are as a portion of the 
Brotherhood of those people from Mu. 812-1 

From what was left of Lemuria, or Mu-in what is now 
lower California, portions of the valleys of death (an 
Atlantean priestess) journeyed there to see, to know. 

And during those experiences much was set up that 
may be of interest to the entity, that will be a part of the 
discoveries of natures or natural formations in what is 
now the Canyon Island. 

For this was the entity's place of the temple. 


The entity was in what is now called the Gobi land, 
with the children of the Sun. Then in the name Taoi, the 
entity was a priestess in the Temple of Gold, that is yet to 
be unearthed, that there may be more known of those 
things that are as old as the earth itself. 2402-2 

The entity was in that land known now as the 
Peruvian, during the period of the Ohums, before the 
Incals and the peoples of the Poseidian land entered. 


In the one before this we find in the days of the 
peoples coming from the waters in the submerged areas of 
the Southern portion as is now of Peru, when the earth 
was divided, and the people began to inhabit the earth 
again. One entity among those who succeeded in gaining 
the higher grounds, and then in the name of (which was 
changed afterwards) Omrui, and changed to Mosases, for 
the entity became the ruler and the guide, or the 
patriarch of that age and gave much assistance to the few 
as was gathered about the entity. 470-2 

Before that we find the entity was in that land now 
known as Mu, or the vanished land of the Pacific, the 
Peaceful; during those periods when many of those had 
risen to power when there were being those banishments 
and preparations for the preserving; for they had known 
that the land must be soon broken up. 

The entity was among those that journeyed from Mu to 
what is nowOregon; and there still may be seen 
something of the worship as set up, in what was the 
development from that set up by the entity's associates, 
as the totem or the family tree. 

In that experience the entity was in the same sex as at 
present, but among those that were the leaders; for then 
the women ruled-rather than men. 630-2 

Then, what took place during the period, or periods, 
when it was being broken up? What became of the 
inhabitants? What was the character of their 
civilization? Are there any evidences of those, or any 
portion of, the inhabitants' escape? The positionof the 
continent, and the like, mustbe of interest to peoples in 


the present day, if either by inference that individuals 
are being born into the earth plane to develop in the 
present, or are people being guided in their spiritual 
interpretation of individuals' lives or developments by 
the spirits of those who inhabited such a continent. In 
either case, if these be true, they are wielding-and are to 
wield-an influence upon the happenings of the present 
day world. 

The position as the continent Atlantis occupied, is 
that as between the Gulf of Mexico on the one hand-and 
the Mediterranean upon the other. Evidences of this lost 
civilization are to be found in the Pyrenees and Morocco on 
the one hand, British Honduras, Yucatan and America 
upon the other. There are some protruding portions 
within this that must have at one time or another been a 
portion of this great continent The British West Indies or 
the Bahamas, and a portion of same that may be seen in 
the present-if the geological survey would be made in 
some of these-especially, or notably, in Bimini and in the 
Gulf Stream through this vicinity, these may be even yet 
determined. 364-3 2/16/ 32 

(Q) What were the principal islands called at the 
time of the final destruction? 

(A) Poseidia and Aryan and Og. 364-6 

In the one before this we find in that land known as 
Atlantis, and the entity among those present when the 
destruction came, and ever present in the entity is fear of 
turmoils, riots, or of earthquakes. These really cause 
shudders even, in the inmost being of the entity. The 
name then Sailuen. The entity gained through that 
period, gaining in the attempt (though failing in same) to 
prevent the activities of the peoples towards self- 
engorgement, or the taking on of self in the manner of 
worshipping self's abilities rather than applying the 
self as the channel or the motive through which 
universal forces might act. 2886-1 


With the realization of the children of the Law of 
One that there was to be the final breaking up of the 
Poseidian-Atlantean lands, there were the emigrations 
with many of the leaders to the various lands. 1007-3 

Before that (and that which the entity is meeting 
most in self in the present), the entity was in Atlantis 
during those periods when there were the separations, 
just before the breaking up of Poseidia. 

The entity then controlled those activities where 
communications had been established with other lands, 
and the flying boats that moved through air or water 
were the means by which the entity carried many of 
those to the Iberian land, as well as later those groups in 
the Egyptian land-when there had been the determining 
that the records should be kept there. 3184-1 

Before that we find the entity was in the land now 
know as or called Egypt, yet the entity was a native of 
the Atlantean land-and one that made a visit and 
became active in many of the lands to which the 
Atlanteans went and made their various settlements in 
that period. 

Hence the entity was among the daughters of the Law 
of One, being a priestess of the temple in the Poseidian 
land; among those that went to the Egyptian land with 
those peoples for the establishing of the associations; 
also visiting those that established themselves in now 
the Pyreneesor the eastern portion of the continental 
Europe, and those that established themselves in what is 
now known as a portion of America-in Arizona, New 
Mexico, Colorado, and those portions of the land. 

Then the entity's name was Assemelea. 11442 

Before that the entity was in the Atlantean land 
when there were those periods of the last upheavals, or 
the disappearance of the isles of Poseidia. The entity 
was among those groups that went into what later became 
known as the Inca. For the entity then was in the line of 
the house of Inca, and was the mother of an Inca in the 
Peruvian land as called in the present. The name then 
was Secunduca. 3611-1 

Before that we find the entity was in the land of the 
present nativity during those periods when there was the 
breaking up of the islands in now the South Seas, and the 
combinations of those that made for the changes in those 
environments of those peoples. 

The entity then was among those first that have 
become known as the cave or cliff dwellers, in that 
portion now known as Utah, Arizona, Colorado, New 
Mexico. In those environs and places did the entity make 
for its activities, in the name then Un-nn. 252-1 

in Atlantean land during the periods of exodus due to 
foretelling or foreordi nation of. activities which were 
bringing about destructive forces. Among those who were 
not only in Yucatan but in the Pyrenees and Egyptian land, 
for the manners of transportation and communications 
through airships of that period were such as Ezekiel 
described at a much later date. 

1859-1 (EZEKIEL 1 425 and 10 9-17) 

In the Atlantean land during those periods when 
there were the activities that brought about the last 
destruction through the warring of Sons of Law of One and 
Sons of Belial-among those sent to what later became the 
Yucatan land of the Mayan experiences. 1599-1 

In Atlantis when there was the breaking up of the 
land, came to what was called the Mayan land or what is 
now Yucatan-entity was the first to cross the water in the 
plane or air machine of that period. 1710-3 

In Atlantean land during period of egress before final 
destruction-coordinated departursactivities-joumied to 

Central America where some of the temples are being 
uncovered today-began practice of cremation, ashes may 
be found in one of temples prepared for same. 914-1 

In land now known as Yucatan, when there were 
establishments from Atlantean land-entity in temple as a 
recorder-were periods of dissension with those in 
authority; when there were the decisions of most of the 
people to join with the movement to what is now portions 
of Arizona-entity chose to remain-records may 
eventually be discovered again. 5245-1 

HLC: You will give an historical treatise on the 
origin and development of the Mayan civilization, 
answering questions. 

EC: Yes. In giving a record of the civilization in this 
particular portion of the world, it should be remembered 
that more than one has been and will be found as research 

That which we find would be of particular interest 
would be that which superseded the Aztec civilization, ' 
that was so ruthlessly destroyed or interrupted by Cortez. 

In that preceding this we had rather a combination of 
sources, or a high civilization that was influenced by 
injection of forces from other channels, other sources, as 
will be seen or may be determined by that which may be 

back to 10,600 years before the Prince of Peace came into 
the land of promise, and find a civilization being 
disturbed by corruption from within to such measures that 
the elements join in bringing devastation to a stiff-necked 
and adulterous people. 

With the second and third upheavals in Atlantis, 
there were individuals who left those lands and came to 
this particular portion then visible. 

But, understand, the surface was quite different from 
that which would be viewed in the present. For, rather 
than being a tropical area it was more of the temperate, 
and quite varied in the conditions and positions of the 
face of the areas themselves. 

In following such a civilization as a historical 
presentation, it may be better understood by taking into 
consideration the activities of an individual or group-or 
their contribution to such a civilization. This of 
necessity, then, would not make for a complete historical 
fact, but rather the activities of an individual and the 
followers, or those that chose one of their own as leader. 

Then, with the leavings of the civilization in 
Atlantis (in Poseidia, more specific), Iltar-with a group 
of followers that had been of the household of Atlan, the 
followers of the worship of the one with some ten 
individuals-left this land Poseidia, and came westward, 
entering what would now be a portion of Yucatan. And 
there began, with the activities of the peoples there, the 
development into a civilization that rose much in the 
same manner as that which had been in the Atlantean 
land. Others had left the land later. Others had left 
earlier. There had been the upheavals also from the 

land of Mu, or Lemuria, and these had their part in the 
changing, or there was the injection of their tenets in the 
varied portions of the land-which was much greater in 
extent until the final upheaval of Atlantis, or the islands 
that were later upheaved, when much of the contour of 
the land in Central America and Mexico was changed to 
that similar in outline to that which may be seen in the 

The first temples that were erected by Iltar and his 
followers were destroyed at the period of change 
physically in the contours of the land. That now being 
found, and a portion already discovered that has laid in 
waste for many centuries, was then a combination of those 
peoples from Mu, Oz and Atlantis. 

Hence, these places partook of the earlier portions of 
that peoples called the Incal, - though the Incals were 
themselves the successors of those of Oz, or Og, in the 
Peruvian land, and Mu in the southern portions of that 
now called California and Mexico and southern New 
Mexico in the United States. 

This again found a change when there were the 
injections from those peoples that came with the division 
of those peoples in that called the promise land. Hence 
we may find in these ruins that which partakes of the 
Egyptian, Lemurian an d Oz civilizations, and the later 
activities partaking even of the Mosaic activities. 

Hence each would ask, what specific thing is there 
that we may designate as being a portion of the varied 
civilizations that formed the earlier civilization of this 
particular land? 

The stones that are circular, that were of the 
magnetized influence upon which the Spirit of the One 
spoke to those peoples as they gathered in their service, 
are of the earliest Atlantean activities in religious 
service, we would be called today. 

The altars upon which there were the cleansings of 
the bodies of individuals (not human sacrifice; for this 
came much later with the injection of the Mosaic, and 
those activities of that area), these were later the altars 
upon which individual activities-that would today be 
termed hate, malice, selfishness, self-indulgence-were 
cleansed from the body through the ceremony, through 
the rise of initiates from the sources of light, that came 
from the stones upon which the angels of light during the 
periods gave their expression to the peoples. 

The pyramid, the altars before the doors of the 
varied temple activities, was an injection from the people 
of Oz and Mu; and will be found to be separate portions, 
and that referred to in the Scripture as high places of 
family altars, family gods, that in many portions of the 
world became again the injection into the activities of 
groups in various portions, asgradually there were the 
turnings of the people to the satisfying and gratifying of 
self's desires, or as the Baal or Baalilal activities again 
entered the peoples respecting their associations with 
those truths of light that came from the gods to the 
peoples, to mankind, in the earth. 

With the injection of those of greater power in their 
activity in the land, during that period as would be 


called 3,000 years before the Prince of Peace came, those 
peoples that were of the Lost Tribes, a portion came into 
the land; infusing their activities upon the peoples from 
Mu in the southernmost portion of that called America or 
United States, and then moved on to the activities in 
Mexico, Yucatan, centralizing that now about the spots 
where the central of Mexico now stands, or Mexico City. 
Hence there arose through the age a different 
civilization, a mixture again. 

Those in Yucatan, those in the adjoining lands as 
begun by lltar, gradually lost in their activities; and 
came to be that people termed, in other portions of 
America, the Mound Builders. 

Ready for questions. 

(Q) How did the Lost Tribe reach this country? 

(A) In boats. 

(Q) Have the most important temples and pyramids 
been discovered? 

(A) Those of the first civilization have been 
discovered, and have not all been opened; but their 
associations, their connections, are being replaced-or 
attempting to be rebuilt. Many of the second and third 
civilization may never be discovered, for these would 
destroy the present civilization in Mexico to uncover 

(Q) By what power or powers were these early 
pyramids and temples constructed? 

(A) By the lifting forces of those gases that are being 
used gradually in the present civilization, and by the fine 
work or activities of those versed in that pertaining to 
the source from which all power comes. 

For, as long as there remains those pure in body, in 
mind, in activity, to the law of the One God, there is the 
continued resource for meeting the needs, or for 
commanding the elements and their activities in the 
supply of that necessary in such relations. 

5750-1 11/12/33 


Much might be given respecting the activities of the 
entity who sealed with the seal of the Alta and 
Atlanteans, and the aid given in the completion of the 
pyramid of initiation (The Great Pyramid at Giza) as 
well as in the records that are to be uncovered... 

In the record chambers there were more ceremonies 
than in calling the peoples at the finishing of that called 
the pyramid. For, here those that were trained in the 
Temple of Sacrifice as well as in the Temple Beautiful 
were about the sealing of the record chambers. For, these 
were to be kept as had been given by the priests in 
Atlantis or Poseidia (Temple), when these records of the 
race, of the developments, of the laws pertaining to One 
were put in their chambers and to be opened only when 
there was the returning of those into materiality, or to 
earths experience, when the change was imminent in the 
earth; which change, we see, begins in '58 and ends with 
the changes wrought in the upheavals and the shifting of 

the poles, as begins then the reign in '98 (as time is 
counted in the present). 

Then, the sealings were the activities of Hept-supht 
with Ra-Ta and Isi-so and the king Araaraart, when 
there were the gatherings of all the peoples for this 
record sealing; with incense from the altars of the Temple 
and altars of the cleansings that were opened for their 
activities in the grounds about this tomb or temple of 
records; and many were the cleansings of the peoples from 
those things or conditions that separated them from the 
associations of the lower kingdoms that had brought 
those activities in all lands of the worship of Baalilal 
and of the desires as from carnal associations and 

This was in the period, as given, of 10,500 years 
before the entering of the Prince of Peace in the land to 
study to become an initiate in or through those same 
activities that were set by Hept-supht in this dedicating 

(Q) If the King's Chamber is on the 50th course, on 
what course is this sealed room? 

(A) The sealed room of records is in a different place; 
not in this pyramid. 

(Q) Give in detail what the sealed room contains. 

(A) A record of Atlantis from the beginnings of those 
periods when the Spirit took form or began the 
encasements in that land, and the developments of the 
peoples throughout their sojourn, with the record of the 
first destruction and the changes that took place in the 
land, with the record of the sojoumingsof the peoples to 
the varied activities in other lands, and a record of the 
meetings of all the nations or lands for the activities in 
the destructions that became necessary with the final 
destruction of Atlantis and the buildings of the pyramid 
of initiation, with who, what, where, would come the 
opening of the records that are as copies from the sunken 
Atlantis; for with the change it must rise (the temple) 

This in position lies, as the sun rises from the waters, 
the line of the shadow (or light) falls between the paws 
of the Sphinx, that was later set as the sentinel or guard, 
and which may not be entered from the connecting 
chambers from the Sphinx's paw (right paw) until the 
TIME has been fulfilled when the changes must be active 
in this sphere of man's experience. 

(Q) Am I the one to receive directions as to where the 
sealed room is and how to find it? 

(A) One of the two. Two, with a guide. Hept-supht, 
El-ka (?), and Atian. These will appear. 378-16 

There was not only the adding to the monuments, but 
the Atlanteans aided in their activities 'with the 
creating of that called the Pyramid, with its records of 
events of the earth through its activity in all of the ages 
to that in which the new dispensation is to come. 281-43 

(Q) What was the date of the actual beginning and 
ending of the construction of the Great Pyramid? 


(A) Was one hundred years in construction. Begun and 
completed in the period of Araaraart's time, with 
Hermes and Ra. 

(Q) What was the date B.C. of that period? 

(A) 10,490 to 10,390 before the Prince entered into 
Egypt. 5748-6 

The pyramids, the house of records as well as the 
chamber in which the records are built in stone, were put 
together by song. 2462-2 

Seek either of the three phases of the ways and 
means in which those records of the activities of 
individuals were preserved, - the one in the Atlantean 
land, that sank, which will rise and is rising again; 
another in the place of the records that leadeth from the 
Sphinx to the hall of records, in the Egyptian land; and 
another in the Aryan or Yucatan land, where the temple 
there is overshadowing same. 2012-1 

(Q) In which pyramid or temple are the records 
mentioned in the readings given through this channel on 
Atlantis, in April, 1932? [[364] series] 

(A) As given, that temple was destroyed at the time 
there was the last destruction in Atlantis. 

Yet, as time draws nigh when changes are to come 
about, there may be the opening of those three places 
where the records are one, to those that are the initiates 
in the knowledge of the One God: 

The temple by Iltar will then rise again. Also there 
will be the opening of the temple or hall of records in 
Egypt, and those records that were put into the heart of 
the Atlantean land may also be found there-that have 
been kept, for those that are of that group. 

The records are one. " 5750-1 11/ 12/33 

(Q) Who will uncover the history of the past in 
record form which are said to be near the sphinx in 

(A) As was set in those records of the law of One in 
Atlantis, that there would come three that would make 
of the perfect way of life. And as there is found those 
that have made, in their experience from their sojourn in 
the earth, a balance in their spiritual, their mental, 
their material experiences or existences, so may they 
become those channels through which there may be 
proclaimed to a seeking, a waiting, a desirous body, those 
things that proclaim how there has been preserved in the 
earth (that as is a shadow of the mental and the 
spiritual reservation of God to His children) those truths 
that have been so long proclaimed. Those, then, that 
make themselves that channel. 3976-15 


The entity was among those of the second generation 
of Atlanteans who struggled northward from Yucatan, 
settling in what is now a portion of Kentucky, Indiana, 

Ohio; being among those of the earlier period known as 
Mound Builders. 

Then the entity was among those who supplied to the 
peoples the fruits of the soil, learning how to crack corn, 
wheat and grain, that it might be prepared into foods 
through cooking-though much in those periods was taken 
raw. And in the present, as the entity may learn, the raw 
foods will contribute much to the entity's physical 
welfare-the green as well as other foods. 3528-1 

In the one before the (first Incal period in Peru) we 
find the entity was among those first in that country now 
known as the Southwest, and among those who became 
the first cliff dwellers... The earthenware, that pieces of 
same may still be seen, though in earth's years thousands 
and thousands of years ago. 4805-1 

Before that the entity was in the land of the present 
sojourn, but in the areas of the Southwest; for the entity 
then was among those called the Cliff Dwellers, being of 
those peoples who came up from Yucatan to the 
Northeast and to portions of Arizona and New MexiC0-as 
now known. The entity was a teacher, a leader, a 
priestess of the people. 5729-1 

Before that the entity was again in the land of the 
present nativity during those periods when activities 
were set up or established in the Southwest, by those who 
had journeyed from other lands when the Ten Tribes were 
carried away. 

The entity was among those children born in that 
land, now a portion of Arizona and New Mexico. These 
portions of the land appeal in many ways to the 
entity-the wide open spaces, and yet there is the desire 
for home, for security, in mental as well as in spiritual as 
may apply in material things. 3513-1 

The entity was then among the peoples, the Indians, 
of the Iroquois; those of noble birth, those that were the 
pure descendants of the Atlanteans, those that held to 
the ritualistic influences from nature itself. 

Hence all nature, all experiences of nature, all 
natural forces become as a part of the entity's experience. 



Be it true that there IS the fact of reincarnation, and 
that souls that once occupied such an environ (Atlantis) 
are entering the earth's sphere and inhabiting 
individuals in the present, is it any wonder that-if they 
made such alterations in the affairs of the earth in their 
day, as to bring destruction upon themselves-if they are 
entering now, they might make many changes in the 
affairs of peoples and individuals in the present? 

364-1 2/3/32 

What an unusual record-and one of those who might 
be termed as physically the mothers of the world! For 
the entity was one of those in the ark. 

In giving the interpretations of the records here, we 
find that there is much from which to choose. But these 
we choose with the desire and purpose to be the means of 
help to the entity in better fulfilling those purposes for 
which it has entered the earth's plane in varied periods 
of its experience. 

For the entity has appeared when there were new 
revelations to be given. And again it appears when there 
are new revelations to be made. 

May the entity so conduct its mind, its body and its 
purposes, then, as to be a channel through which such 
messages may come that are needed for the awakenings in 
the minds of men as to the necessity for returning to the 
search for their relationship with the Creative Forces or 

For as has been given from the beginning, the deluge 
was not a myth (as many would have you believe) but a 
period when man had so belittled himself with the cares 
of the world, with the deceitfulness of his own knowledge 
and power, as to require that there be a return to his 
dependence wholly-physically and mentally-upon the 
Creative Forces. 

Will this entity see such again occur in the earth? 
Will it be among those who may be given those directions 
as to how, where, the elect may be preserved for the 
replenishing again of the earth? 

Remember, not by water-for it is the mother of life in 
the earth-but rather by the elements, fire. 

3653-1 1/7/44 

HLC: We seek at this time such information as will 
be of value and interest to those present, including T. 
Mitchell Hastings, Jr, in the next room, regarding the 
spiritual, mental and physical changes which are coming 
to the earth. You will tell us what part we may play in 
meeting and helping others to understand these changes- 
EC: Yes; as each of you gathered here have your own 
individual development, yet as each seeks to be a channel 
of blessings to the fellow man, each attunes self to the 
Throne of universal information. And there may be 
accorded you that which may be beneficial, not only in 
thine own experience, but that which will prove helpful, 
hopeful, in the experience of others- 
First, then: There is soon to come into the world a 
body; one of our own number here that to many has been a 
representative of a sect; of a thought, of a philosophy, of 
a group, yet one beloved of all men in all places where the 
universality of God in the earth has been proclaimed, 
where the oneness of the Father as God is known and is 
consciously magnified in the activities of individuals 
that proclaim the acceptable day of the Lord. Hence 
that one John, the beloved in the earth-his name shall be 
John, and also at the place where he met face to face 

When, where, is to be this one? In the hearts and 
minds of those that have set themselves in that position 

that they become a channel through which spiritual, 
mental and material things become one in the purpose and 
desires of that physical body! 

As to the material changes that are to be as an omen, 
as a sign to those that this is shortly to come to pass-as 
has been given of old, the sun will be darkened and the 
earth shall be broken up in divers places-and then shall 
be proclaimed-through the spiritual interception in the 
hearts and minds and souls of those that have sought His 
way-that his star has appeared, and will point the way 
for those that enter into the holy of holies in themselves. 
For, God the Father, God the Teacher, God the director, 
in the minds and hearts of men, must ever be in those that 
come to know Him as first and foremost in the seeking of 
those souls; for He is first the god to the individual and 
as He is exemplified, as He is manifested in the heart 
and in the acts of the body, of the individual, He becomes 
manifested before men. And those that seek in the latter 
portion of the year of our Lord (as ye have counted in and 
among men) 36, He [He, Christ Spirit?] will appear. 

As to the changes physical again: The earth will be 
broken up in the western portion of America. The greater 
portion of Japan must go into the sea. The upper portion of 
Europe will be changed as in the twinkling of an eye. 
Land will appear off the east coast of America. There 
will be the upheavals in the Arctic and in the Antarctic 
that will make for the eruption of volcanoes in the Torrid 
areas, and there will be shifting then of the poles-so that 
where there has been those of a frigid or the semi- 
tropical will become the more tropical, and moss and fern 
will grow. And these will begin in those periods in '58 to 
'98, when these will be proclaimed as the periods when 
His light will be seen again in the clouds. As to times, as 
to seasons, as to places, ALONE is it given to those who 
have named the name-and who bear the mark of those of 
His calling and His election in their bodies. To them it 
shall be given. 

As to those things that deal with the mental of the 
earth, these shall call upon the mountains to cover many. 
As ye have seen those in lowly places raised to those of 
power in the political, in the machinery of nations' 
activities, so shall ye see those in high places reduced 
and calling on the waters of darkness to cover them. And 
those that in the inmost recesses of theirselves awaken to 
the spiritual truths that are to be given, and those places 
that have acted in the capacity of teachers among men, 
the rottenness of those that have ministered in places 
will be brought to light, and turmoils and strifes shall 
enter. And, as there is the wavering of those that would 
enter as emissaries, as teachers, from the throne of life, 
the throne of light, the throne of immort^ality, and wage 
war in the air with those of darkness, then know ye the 
Armageddon is at hand. For with the great numbers of 
the gathering of the hosts of those that have hindered 
and would make for man and his weaknesses 
stumblingblocks, they shall wage war with the spirits of 
light that come into the earth for this awakening; that 
have been and are being called by those of the sons of men 
into the service of the living God. For He, as ye have 


been told, is not the God of the dead, not the God of those 
that have forsaken Him, but those that love His coming, 
that love His associations among men-the God of the 
living, the God of Life! For, He is Life. 

Who shall proclaim the acceptable year of the Lord 
in him that has been born in the earth in America? Those 
from that land where there has been the regeneration, not 
only of the body but the mind and the spirit of men, they 
shall come and declare that John Peniel is giving to the 
world the new order of things. Not that these that have 
been proclaimed have been refused, but that they are 
made plain in the minds of men, that they may know the 
truth and the truth, the life, the light, will make them 

(Q) What are the world changes to come this year 

(A) The earth will be broken up in many places. The 
early portion will see a change in the physical aspect of 
the west coast of America. There will be open waters 
appear in the northern portions of Greenland. There will 
be new lands seen off the Caribbean Sea, and dry land 
will appear. There will be the falling away in India of 
much of the material suffering that has been brought on a 
troubled people. There will be the reduction of one risen 
to power in central Europe to naught. The young king son 
will soon reign. In America in the political forces we see a 
re-stabilization of the powers of the peoples in their own 
hands, a breaking up of the rings, the cliques in many 
places. South America shall be shaken from the 
uppermost portion to the end, and in the Antarctic off of 
Tierra Del Fuego land, and a strait with rushing waters. 

(Q) To what country is the reference made regarding 
the young king? 

(A) In Germany. 

. ..if there is not the acceptance in America of the 
closer brotherhood of man, the love of the neighbor as 
self, civilization must wend its way westward • and again 
must Mongolia, must a hated people, be raised. 

3976-15 1/19/34 

The catastrophes of outside forces to the earth in '36 
will come from the shifting of the equilibrium of the 
earth itself in space, with those consequential effects 
upon the various portions of the country-or 
world-affected by same. 

. . . Not by a great deal is the present condition the 
most serious of even the present civilization, for this 
point was passed in the fall of '29 (twenty-nine) when 
there was given into the hands of two • yea three 
individuals - the FINANCIAL conditions and situations 
of the world. These represent as two upon the one side, 
ONE upon the dark side - or dark forces. 

(Q) Who are the three individuals controlling the 
financial world in the present? 

(A) Warburg, Mellon, Morgan. 3976-10 2/8/32 

(Q) What will be the type and extent of the 
upheavals in '36? 

(A) The wars, the upheavals in the interior of the 
earth, and the shifting of same by the differentiation in 
the axis as respecting the positions from the Polaris 
center. " 57484 7/1/32 

(Note that geologists have discovered that indeed the axis of 
rotation of the sottd core of the earth differs from the axis of 
rotation of the exterior of the earth. The seismic data used to 
determine this goes back only to the early '60s, and scientists 
have assumed this is a 'normal" situation. The above reading 
suggests otherwise.) 

(Q) Are details of the earth's eruptions in 1936 so 
fixed that you can give me an outline of the Pacific Coast 
area to be affected? 

(A) All of these are, as is ever on or in such an 
activity, dependent upon individuals or groups who are in 
or keep an attitude respecting the needs, the desires, the 
necessary requirements in such a field of activity. That 
some are due and will occur is written, as it were, but-as 
we find-as to specific date or time in the present this may 
not be given. 270-32 6/12/34 

(Q) How soon will the changes in the earth's 
activity begin to be apparent? 

(A) When there is the first breaking up of some 
conditions in the South Sea (that's South Pacific, to be 
sure), and those as apparent in the sinking or rising of 
that that's almost opposite same, or in the 
Mediterranean, and the Etna area, then we may know it 

(Q) How long before this will begin? 

(A) The indications are that some of these have 
already begun, yet others would say these are only 
temporary. We would say they have begun. '36 will see 
the greater changes apparent, to be sure. 

(Q) Will there be any physical changes in the 
earth's surface in North America? If so, what sections 
will be affected, and how? 

(A) All over the country we will find many physical 
changes of a minor or greater degree. The greater change, 
as we will find, in America, will be the North Atlantic 
Seaboard. Watch New York! Connecticut, and the like. 

(Q) When will this be? 

(A) In this period. As to just when - 

(Q) What, if any, changes will take place around 
Norfolk area, VA? 

(A) No material, that would be effective to the area, 
other than would eventually become more beneficial - in a 
port, and the like. 311-8 4/9/32 

(Q) What is the primary cause of earthquakes? Will 
San Francisco suffer from such a catastrophe this year? If 
so, give date, time and information for the guidance of 
this body, who has personal property, records and a wife, 
all of which it wishes safety. 

(A) We do not find that this particular district (San 
Francisco) in the present year will suffer the great 
material damages that have beenexperienced 
heretofore. While portions of the country will be 
affected, we find these will be farther east than San 


Francisco-or those south, where there has not been 
heretofore the greater activity. The causes of these, of 
course, are the movements about the earth; that is, 
internally -and the cosmic activity or influence of other 
planetary forces and stars and their relationships 
produce or bring about the activities of the elementals of 
the earth; that is, the Earth, the Air, the Fire, the 
Water-and those combinations make for the replacements 
in the various activities. 

If there are the greater activities in the Vesuvius, or 
Pelee, then the southern coast of California-and the 
areas between Salt Lake and the southern portions of 
Nevada-may expect, within the three months following 
same, an inundation by the earthquakes. 

But these, as we find, are to be more in the southern 
than in the northern hemisphere. 270-35 1/21/36 

(Q) Three hundred years ago Jacob Boehme decreed 
Atlantis would rise again at this crisis time when we 
cross from this Piscean Era into the Aquarian. Is Atlantis 
rising now? Will it cause a sudden convolution and about 
what Year? 

(A) In 1998 we may find a great deal of the activities 
as have been wrought by the gradual changes that are 
coming about. These are at the periods when the cycle of 
the solar activity, or the years as related to the sun's 
passage through the various spheres of activity become 
paramount or Catamount [?] [Tantamount?] to the change 
between the Piscean and the Aquarian age. This is a 
gradual, not a cataclysmic activity in the experience of 
the earth in this period. 1602-3 

Even many of the battlefields of the present (1941 WWII) 
will be ocean, will be the seas, the bays, the lands over 
which the neworder will carry on their trade. 

Portions of the now east coast of New York, or New 
York City itself, will disappear. This will be another 
generation, though. The southern portions of Carolina, 
Georgia will disappear. This will come first. 

The waters of the Great Lakes will empty into the 
Gulf of Mexico rather than the waterway over which 
such discussions have been recently made (St. Lawrence 
seaway). It would be well if the new waterway were 

Then the area where the entity is now located 
(Virginia Beach) will be among the safety lands, as will 
be what is now Ohio, Indiana and Illinois and much of 
the southern portion of Canada and the eastern portion of 
Canada. While, the western land is to be disturbed. 

(Q) I have for many months felt that I should move 
away from New York City. 

(A) This is well. There is too much unrest. There 
will continue to be the character of vibrations that to this 
body will be disturbing. Eventually, there will be the 
destructive forces there-though these will be in the next 

(Q) Will Los Angeles be safe? 

(A) Los Angeles, San Francisco, most all of these will 
be among those that will be destroyed before New York 

(Q) Is Virginia Beach to be safe? 

(A) It is the center - and the only seaport and center - 
of the White Brotherhood. (1152-11 8/13/41) 

Poseidia will be among the first portions of Atlantis 
to rise again. Expect it in sixty-eight and sixty-nine. Not 
so far away. 958-3 6/28/40 

There will be found much more gold in the lands under 
the sea than there is in the world circulation today. ..And 
as may be known, when the changes begin, these portions 
(Bimini, of the Bahamas) will rise among the first. 


The first highest civilization will be uncovered in 
some of the adjacent lands to the west and south of the 
isles (Bimini), see? 

(Q) Is this the continent known as Alta or Poseidia? 

(A) A temple of the Poseidians was in a portion of 
this land. 996-12 

As to conditions in the geography of the world, of the 
country, changes are gradually coming about. 

No wonder, then, that the entity feels the need, the 
necessity for change of central location. For, many 
portions of the east coast will be disturbed, as well as 
many portions of the west coast, as well as the central 
portion of the U.S. 

In the next few years lands will appear in the 
Atlantic as well as in the Pacific. And what is the 
coastline of many a land now will be the bed of the ocean. 

(Q) In view of the uncertainty of existing conditions, 
did I act wisely in establishing my home in Norfolk? 

(A) It's a mighty good place, and a safe place when 
turmoils are to arise, though it may appear that it may 
be in the line of those areas to rise, while many a higher 
land will sink. This is a good area to stick to. 2746-2 

(Q) What great change or the beginning of what 
change, if any, is to take place in the earth in the year 
2,000 to 2,001 A.D.? 

(A) When there is a shifting of the poles. Or a new 
cycle begins. 826-8 

(Q) What is the meaning of one thousand years that 
Satan is bound? 

(A) Is banished. That, as there are the activities of 
the forty and four thousand-in the same manner that the 
prayer of ten just should save a city, the deeds, the 
prayers of the faithful will allow that period when the 
incarnation of those only that $re in the lord shall rule 
fhe earth, and the period is as a thousand years. 

Thus is Satan bound, thus is Satan banished from the 
earth. The desire to do evil is only of him. And when 
there are-as the symbols-those only whose desire and 
purpose of their heart is to glorify the Father, these will 
be those periods when this shall come to pass. 


Be ye all determined within thy minds, thy hearts, 
thy purposes, to be of that number! 

(Q) In Rev. 21:1 what is the meaning of "a new 
heaven and a new earth: for the first heaven and the 
first earth were passed away; and there was no more 

(A) When the foundations of the earth are broken up 
by those very disturbances. Can the mind of man 
comprehend no desire to sin, no purpose but that the glory 
of the Son may be manifested in his life? Is this not a new 
heaven, a new earth? For the former things would have 
passed away. For as the desires, the purposes, the aims 
are to bring about the whole change physically, so does it 
create in the experience of each soul a new vision, a new 

For as has been given, it hath not entered the heart of 
man to know the glories that have been prepared, that 
are a part of the experiences of those that love only the 
Lord and His ways. 

(Q) Please explain 2nd through 4th verse of Chapter 
21-the new Jerusalem and no more death. 

(A) Those then that are come into the new life, the 
new understanding, the new regeneration, there is then 
the new Jerusalem. For as has been given, the place is not 
as a place alone but as a condition, as an experience of the 

Jerusalem has figuratively, symbolically, meant the 
holy place, the holy city-for there the ark of the 
covenant, the ark of the covenant in the minds, the 
hearts, the understandings, the comprehensions of those 
who have put away earthly desires and become as the 
new purposes in their experience, become the new 
Jerusalem, the new undertakings, the new desires. 281-37 

(Q) In what form does the anti-Christ come, spoken 
of in Revelation? 

(A) In the spirit of that opposed to the spirit of 
truth. The fruits of the spirit of the Christ are love, joy, 
obedience, long-suffering, brotherly love, kindness. 
Against such there is no law. The spirit of hate, the anti- 
Christ, is contention strife, fault-finding, lovers of self, 
lovers of praise. Those are the anti-Christ, and take 
possession of groups, masses, and show themselves even in 
the lives of men. 281-16 

(Q) What will the Aquarian Age mean to mankind as 
regards Physical, Mental and Spiritual development? 

(A) Think Ye this might be answered in a word? 
These are as growths. What meant that awareness as just 
indicated? In the Piscean age, in the center of same, we 
had the entrance of Emmanuel or God among men, see? 
What did that mean? The same will be meant by the full 
consciousness of the ability to communicate with or to be 
aware of the relationships to the Creative Forces and the 
uses of same in material environs. This awareness during 
the era or age in the age of Atlantis and Lemuria or Mu 
brought what? Destruction to man, and his beginning of 
the needs of the journey up through that of selfishness. 

Then, as to what will these be, • ONLY those who 
accept same will even become aware of what's going on 
about them! How few realize the vibratory forces as 
create influences from even one individual to another, 
when they are even in the same vibratory force or 
influence! And yet ye ask what will the Aquarian age 
bring in mind, in body, in experience? 

(Q) Can a date be given to indicate the beginning of 
the Aquarian Age? 

(A) This has already been indicated as the period 
when it should pass, but that is when it begins to affect 
It laps over from one to another, as is the natural sources, 
as he holds to that which has been, which is. As has 
been indicated, we will begin to understand fully in '98. 


The time and times and half times shall pass, and 
then shall man come to know that in the temple, in the 
tabernacle of his own temple will, he meet his God face to 
face! 257-201 


(Q) Please give the important re-incarnations of 
Adam in the world's history. 

(A) In the beginning as Amilius, as Adam, as 
Melchizedek, as Zend, as Ur [?] [Enoch? CD's note: 
Perhaps Ur was prehistory person who established Ur of 
the Chaldees? I don't think he was mentioned anywhere 
else in the readings as an incarnation of Jesus.], as Asaph, 
as Jeshua-Joseph-Jesus. 

Then, as that coming into the world in the second 
coming-for He will come again and receive His own, who 
have prepared themselves through that belief in Him 
and acting in that manner; for the spirit is abroad, and 
the time draws near, and there will be the reckoning of 
those even as in the first so in the last, and the last shall 
be first; for there is that Spirit abroad-He standeth near. 
He that hath eyes to see, let him see. He that hath ears 
to hear, let him hear that music of the coming of the Lord 
of this vineyard, and art thou ready to give account of 
that thou hast done with thine opportunity in the earth 
as the Sons of God, as the heirs and joint heirs of glory 
with the Son? Then make thine paths straight, for there 
must come an answering for that thou hast done with 
thine Lord! He will not tarry, for having overcome He 
shall appear even as the Lord and Master. Not as one 
born, but as one that returneth to His own, for He will 
walk and talk with men of every clime, and those that 
are faithful and just in their reckoning shall be caught up 
with Him to rule and to do judgmentfor a thousand years! 


(Q) Is it true that Jesus is the only begotten son of God, 
and what does this mean? 

(A) In this to give the full concept is to give the 
history then of all those who have entered into flesh 
without that act which man knows as copulation. For as 
those experiences Jesus, known as Jesus, the brother of this 


entity, came into the earth, the first that were of the sons 
of God to enter flesh, there the first and only begotten of 
God. Again, as names would say, Enoch walked with 
God, became aware of God in his movements-s till t hat 
entity, that soulcalled Jesus-as Melchizedek, without 
father, without mother, came-still the soul of Jesus; the 
portion of God that manifests. 

But each son, each daughter, through these very acts 
of the only begotten, of the son of Mary, of the first in the 
earth, of that without father and without mother, 
without days, without years-becomes then as the elder 
brother to all who are bomin the earth, as the maker, as 
the creator, as the first, as the last; as the beginning, as 
the end of man's soul's experience through the earth and 
throughout the spheres of consciousness in and about the 

Thus is He the only begotten, the firstborn, the first to 
know flesh, the first to purify it 

And so man in his concepts, in his understandings, in 
his wisdom of God, purifies-here a little, there a little. 


(Q) When did the knowledge come to Jesus that he 
was to be the Savior of the world? 

(A) When he fell in Eden. 2067-7 

(Q) Should the Christ-Consciousness be described as 
the awareness within each soul, imprinted in pattern on 
the mind and waiting to be awakened by the will, of the 
soul's oneness withGod? 

A) Correct. That's the idea exactly! 

(Q) Please list the names of the incarnations of the 
Christ, and of Jesus, indicating where the development of 
the man Jesus began. 

(A) First; in the beginning of course; and then as 
Enoch, Melchizedek, in the perfection. Then in the earth 
as Joseph, Joshua, Jeshua, Jesus. 5749-14 

(Q) What is the sign of his presence? 
(A) The circle with the Cross; these make for the sign 
that all thou hast heard is fulfilled in Him. 423-3 

(Q) He said He would come again. What about His 
second coming? 

(A) The time no one knows. Even as He gave, not even 
the Son Himself, only the Father. Not until His 
enemies-and the earth-are wholly in subjection to His 
will, His powers. 

(Q) Are we entering the period of preparation for His 

(A) Entering the test period, rather. 

5749-2 6/28/32 

What is meant by "the day of the Lord is near at 

(A) That as has been promised through the prophets 
and the sages of old, the time-and half time-has been 
and is being fulfilled in this day and generation, and that 
soon there will again appear in the earth that one 

through whom many will be called to meet those that are 
preparing the way for His day in the earth. The Lord, 
then, will come, "even as ye have seen him go". 

(Q) How soon? 

(A) When those that are His have made the way 
clear, passable, for Him to come. 262-49 7/9/33 

Then, as there is prepared the way by those that 
have made and do make the channels for the entering in, 
there may come into the earth those influences that will 
save, regenerate, resuscitate, hold-if you please-the 
earth in its continued activity toward the proper 
understanding and proper relationships to that which is 
the making for the closer relationships to that which is 
in Him alone.. . 

Ye have seen His Spirit-in the leaders in all realms of 
activity, whether in the isles of the sea, the wilderness, 
the mountain or in the various activities of every race, 
every color, every activity of that which has produced 
and does produce contention in the minds and hearts of 
those that dwell in the flesh. 

For, what must be obliterated? Hate, prejudice, 
selfishness, backbiting, unkindness, anger, passion, and 
those things of the mire that are created in the activities 
of the sons of men. 

Then again He may come in body to claim His own. Is 
He abroad today in the earth? Yea, in those that cry unto 
Him from every corner; for He, the Father, hath not 
suffered His soul to see corruption; neither hath it taken 
hold on those things that make the soul afraid. For, He 
is the Son of Light; of God, and is holy before Him And 
He comes again in the hearts and souls and minds of those 
that seek to know His ways. 57495 5/1/34 

(Q) Please explain what is meant by "He will walk 
and talk with men of every clime". Does this mean he 
will appear to many at once or appear to various peoples 
during a long period? 

(A) As given, for a thousand years He will walk and 
talk with men of every clime. Then in groups, in masses, 
and then they shall reign of the first resurrection for a 
thousand years; for this will be when the changes 
materially come. 

In the manner as He sat at the peace conference in 
Geneva, in the heart and soul of a man not reckoned by 
many as an even unusually Godly man; yet raised for a 
purpose, and he chose rather to be a channel of His 
thought for the world. So, as there has been, so will it be 
until the time as set... 

He will not leave thee desolate, but will come to 
thee-but not unless invited; for, as in the periods, as we 
find, when He walked with men as the Master among 
men, or when as Joseph in the kingdoms that were raised 
as the saving of his peoples that sold him into bondage, 
or as the priest of Salem in the days when the call came 
that a peculiar peoples would proclaim his name, He has 
walked and talked with men. ..or in the garden when 
those temptations came, or as the first begotten of the 
Father that came as Amilius in the Atlantean land and 


allowed himself to be led in ways of selfishness. Hence, 
as we see, all the various stages of developments that 
have come to man through the ages have been those 
periods when He walked and talked with man... 

In all those periods that the basic principle was the 
Oneness of the Father, He has walked with men. 364-8 

(Q) When Jesus the Christ comes the second time, 
will He set up His kingdom on earth and will it be an 
everlasting kingdom? 

(A) Read His promises in that ye have written of His 
words, even as "I gave". He shall rule for a thousand 
years. Then shall Satan be loosed again for a season. 


For man is made a co-creator with the Godhead... As 
is given from the beginning: God said, "Let there be 
light" and there was light, and that light became, and is 
the iight of the world. For it is true that light, that 
knowledge, the understanding of that Jesus who became 
the Christ, is indeed thy elder brother and yet Creator, 
Maker of the universe; and thus are ye a part of same and 
a directing influence. 

Then, as ye practice His principles ye become aware 
of same. And these are first: 'Thou shalt love the Lord 
thy God with all thy heart, thy mind, thy soul, and thy 
neighbor as thyself." 5124-1 

GC: You will have before you the entity {602], at 
home, ... Md. You will give a mental and spiritual 
reading for this entity, considering the anxiety keenly 
felt over the safety and welfare of her son, Private [670], 
who is in the Quartermaster Corps of the USA in Ft. Sill, 
Okla. Please give advice, guidance and help to this 
confused mind, and answer the questions, as I ask them: 

EC: Yes, we have the body, the inquiring mind, [602]. 

In giving a mental and spiritual reading, especially 
in relationship to those confusions and disturbances in the 
body and mind, -many varied phases of the mental and 
spiritual life, the mental and spiritual experience, must 
be taken into consideration. 

To be sure, there is builded within the consciousness of 
the entity, [602], an aversion to strife, to war, and to all 
phases of military activity. The entity should consider, 
however, if this consciousness bears the same 
relationships to all other forms of activity that may 
more subtly destroy the soul, rather than the body. 

Remember, there has been given, "Fear rather him 
who may destroy body and soul than he who may destroy 
the body alone." 

In an hour of trial, when there are influences abroad 
that would change or mar, or take away that freedom 
which is the gift of the Creative Forces to man; that man 
might by his own innate desire be at-one with God, the 
Father, as was manifested in Jesus, the Christ; there 
should be the willingness to pattern the life, the 
emergencies, the exigencies as may arise, much in the way 
and manner as the Master indicated to each and every 

According to the pattern of the life, as He gave, one 
should ever be able to give the evidence of the hope and 
faith that lies within the individual. 

One should ever be able and willing even to lay down 
the life for the principles that may live as He indicated; 
that of freedom not only from the fear of servitude, not 
only from the dictates as to the manner in which love, 
sacrifice, obedience may be administered to-the faith and 
hope that lies within him, but that the whole earth may 
indeed be a better place for an individual, for those that 
are to come to reside in. 

To be sure, taken as a personal application, these 
become in a manner necessarily as of self. But self, too, 
may needs be offered on the altar of sacrifice. 

When He withheld not His own Son, how can ye ask 
Him to withhold thine? If it needs be that necessary 
that the world may know that He, the Father, sent the 
Son into the earth? 

Live in thine own life that which is worthy of 
acceptance, of that ye ask of the Father, and He will not 
withhold any good thing from thee. 

Are thy principles, thy activities in keeping with 
His purposes? 

Know and realize that the earth is the Lord's, with 
all its turmoils and its strifes, with all its hates and 
jealousies, with all its political and economic 
disturbances. And His ways, the Lord's ways, are not past 
finding out. By living them in the little things day by 
day may that surety in self, that sureness in Him, be 
thine. For His promises have been and are sure. And, as 
His promise has been, "Let not your heart be troubled; ye 
believe in God," believe also in the Christ, who gave "If 
ye love me ye will keep my commandments, and I and the 
Father will come and abide with thee day by day." 

So live, then, so think, so act in thy conversation, in 
thy convocation with thy fellow man, that others may 
know, too, that the Lord walks with thee. 

Then, so instill that hope, that encouragement in the 
mind and in the heart of thy son that he, too, may live, 
may look to the Lord for strength, for purpose, for 
sureness; and that in the peace which is to come there 
will be the needs for his activity among the children of 
men, that the way of the Lord may be sure in the earth. 

If this attitude is kept,-if the Lord be with thee, who 
may be against thee! 

Let that mind be in thee, then, as was in Christ Jesus, 
who boldly claimed His relationship to God, and so lived 
among His fellow man. 

He, too, showed anger at the house of the Lord being 
turned into a den of those who took advantage of their 
fellow man. He, too, brought-through that expression, 
that hope-that knowledge to /those that seek His face, 
that He knows the heartache of disappointment, He 
knows the heartaches of fear,-even as He prayed, "If it 
be possible, let this cup pass from me-not my will, God, 
but Thine be done." 

In that attitude, in that pronouncement may there 
come to thee that strength, that knowledge that ye can, 
ye may trust wholly in the Lord. ' 


Ready for questions. 

(Q) Could he be transferred to some post closer to his 

(A) This may be, but is it best? Rather than making 
the environ by doubts and fears, isn't it better to put it all 
into the hands and upon the heart of thy Elder Brother? 
yea, in the hands of thy God? seeking that He use thee 
and thy body, as manifest in thy son, to bring hope and 
love and peace to the children of men. 

(Q) Is it best for him where he is? 

(A) As He gave,-consider well His answer, the 
Master,-"No man is in this or that position save by the 
grace of God." Then the opportunities are where he is in 
the present, usingthe knowledge of the material, the 
mental and spiritual life for the betterment of his fellow 
man where he is. 

That impress, that instill in self. 

(Q) Is there any other branch of the service where he 
could serve, that would be less dangerous? 

(A) No portion of the service is dangerous if he is put 
in the hands of God, and the self and the son live that as 
is known! Look upon that condition which disturbs not 
from the material angle but from the standpoint of a 
mental and a spiritual blessing to others in the 
opportunities offered. 

(Q) Could he better serve in some defense work 
outside the military service? 

(A) If it had been, would not this have been the 
place? If what has been given is studied, these questions 
will be answered. Fill the place better where ye are, and 
the Lord will open the way! Is this not in keeping with 
His life, His teachings? These are worthy of acceptation. 
These are worthy of being trusted, of being lived. 

602-7 1/8/42 

Forms, shadows, colors, numbers, -even as to 
astrological aspects, -have their place. But know that 
they are but as lessons, as signposts along the way. They 
indicate, as the weather vane, from what direction the 
impulse may arise, -the easier way of any activity; and 
are not, thus, the thing nor the power itself. For, learn 
indeed what it meaneth in this respect, and apply in 
self s own Way, "Know, child that seeks, the Lord thy 
God is One!" 

What meaneth this, then? That every form of 
activity of expression is but a movement that the 
individual soul, in the pattern or image of the Maker, 
may be more aware that those forces or influences in the 
experience are not only as signs and omens but may indeed 
be used as stepping-stones for the greater comprehension 
of the relationship self bears with that universal 

Then indeed, as thy Elder Brother has shown in His 
journey through the planes of experience-physical, 
mental and spiritual-it becomes necessary that ye become 
aware of yourself beingyourself yet one with Him. 

These are not merely philosophical presentations to 
thee, but as ye study thy own abilities, as ye are 
persuaded here or there to look into this form or that 

manner, be not deceived by any. For as hath been given of 
old, it is not who or what will bring thee a message from 
above, or who from over the seas may present thee with a 
formula by which ye may use the influences about you to 
the greater application of materialization of forces. For 
lo, it is within thine own self. He is nearer than thy 
hand, closer than thy foot. 

For it is in Him ye live, and move, and have thy 
being. And it is in thy body-temple, where He hath 
promised to meet thee-in the holy of hoiies. 

How, then, do ye keep that holy of holies? Cluttered 
with strange fires? with unholy water? with vain 
sayings, or signs of the moon or of the sun, or the visitation 
of seasons? Hath He not warned concerning these? 
'These I have hated; but he that will do the will of the 
Father, him have I loved." And, "As ye do it unto the 
least of these, thy brethren, ye do it unto thy Maker." 



(Reincarnation) is questioned by many, yet there is 
this period when the fact needs stressing to answer many 
questions. 1152-12 

Life and its expressions are one. Each soul or entity 
will and does return, or cycle, as does nature in its 
manifestations about man; thus leaving, making or 
presenting-as it were-those infallible, indelible truths 
that it-Life-is continuous. And though there may be a 
few short years in this or that experience, they are one; 
the soul, the inner self being purified, being lifted up, 
that it may be one with that first cause, that first 
purpose for its coming into existence. 

And though there may be those experiences here and 
there, each has its relationships with that which has 
gone before, that is to come. And there has been given to 
each soul that privilege, that choice, of being one with 
the Creative Forces. 938-1 

Ye, as a soul-entity, in the beginning sought 
companionship with God; losing that companionship by 
choice of that which would satisfy or gratify a material 
desire only. Thus, ye, as the Master, enter again and 
again, ye come to fulfill the law, the law that brought 
thy soul into being to be one with Him. 

Hence at this particular period when there are 
changes to be wrought, ye have work to do. For ye have 
been made conscious of the fact that all have fallen short 
of their duty, and that if they would bring the earth to be 
a place in which even their own offspring would live, 
they must learn to search for their God. And they must 
put away those gods of the Sidonians, those gods of the 
heathen, gods of self, gods of gratifying of flesh; and 
crucifying the flesh-in mind, in body, in spirit-show 
thyself worthy of being given the opportunity to express 
thyself to others. *" *" 3645-1 1/15/44 


(Q) Must each soul continue to be reincarnated in the 
earth until it reaches perfection, or are some souls lost? 

(A) Can God lose itself, if God be God-or is it 
submerged, or is it as has been given, carried into the 
universal soul or consciousness? The soul is not lost; the 
individuality of the soul that separates itself is lost. 
The reincarnation or the opportunities are continuous until 
the soul has of itself become an entity in its whole or has 
submerged itself. 

(Q) If a soul fails to improve itself, what becomes of 

(A) That's why the reincarnation, why it 
reincarnates; that it may have the opportunity. Can the 
will of man continue to defy its Maker? 826-8 


environment or what not, surpasses the will; else why 
would there have been that pattern shown in which the 
individual soul, no matter how far astray it may have 
gone, may enter with Him into the holy of holies? 


(Q) From which side of my family do I inherit most? 

(A) You have inherited most from yourself, not from 
family! The family is only a river through which it (the 
entity, soul) flows! 1233-1 

Not so much self-development, but rather developing 
the Christ Consciousness in self, being selfless, that He 
may have His way with thee, that He-the Christ-may 
direct thy ways, that He will guide thee in the things 
thou doest, thou sayest. 281-20 

Only in disillusion and suffering, in time, space, and 
patience, does he come to the wisdom that his real will is 
the will of God, and in its practice is happiness and 
heaven. 2537-1 

That which is so hard to be understood in the minds or 
the experiences of many is that the activities of a soul are 
for self-development, yet must be selfless in its activity 
for it, the soul, to develop. 275-39 

In patience we become aware of our souls, of our 
identity, of our being each a corpuscle, as it were, in the 
great body, in the heart of our God. And He has not 
willed otherwise. 262-114 

that all would realize, come to the consciousness 
that what we are-in any given experience, or time—is the 
combined result of what we have done about the ideals 
that we have set. 1549-1 

An ideal, then. ..must be of the spiritual nature-that 
has its foundation in Truth, in God, in the Godhead. 
. ..the gift of God to man is an individual soul that may be 
one with Him, and that may know itself to be one with 
Him and yet individual in itself, with the attributes of 
the whole, yet not the whole. 262-1 1 

Study, then, to show thyself approved unto an ideal. 
What is an ideal? This ye must first determine in thine 

Choose that most in keeping with thy purposes, thy 
aims, thy desires. Are thy desires and thy purposes 
ideal, in thine own consciousness? What is thy ideal, 

Then from that may be gained the ideal mentally. 

And the material is the outgrowth of those two. 


He without an ideal is sorry indeed; he with an ideal 
and lacking courage to live it is sorrier still. Know that. 


(Q) Are hereditary, environment and will equal 
factors in aiding or retarding the entity's development? 

(A) Will is the greater factor, for it may overcome 
any or all of the others; provided that will is made one 
with the pattern see? For, no influence of heredity, 

(Q) Am I an old or a young soul in evolutionary 

(A) All souls are from one. It is the application that 
has grown to be that which is termed old or young soul. 
For all souls were created in the one. The entity has 
applied self, the entity has kept self close in contact 
with many who have through the awareness of the 
oneness of God's purpose with man been attempting to 
bring him to-that awareness; and hence an "Old" soul in 
service. 1770-2 

As has been given as one of the immutable laws, that 
which the mind of a soul - a soul- dwells upon it becomes; 
for mind is the builder. And if the mind is in attune with 
the law of the force that brought the soul into being, it 
becomes spiritualized in its activity. If the mind is 
dwelling upon or directed in that desire towards the 
activities of the carnal influences, then it becomes 
destructive in such a force. 262-63 

Thoughts are things and. ..AS the mental dwells upon 
these thoughts, so does it give strength, power to things 
that do not appear. And thus does indeed there come that 
as is so oft given, that faith is the evidence of things not 
seen. 906-3 

It has ever been and is, even in materiality, a 
reciprocal world. "If ye will be my people, I will be thy 
God." If ye would know good, do Good. If ye would have 
life, give life. If ye would know Jesus, the Christ, then be 
like Him. .."There is no life without death, there is no 
renewal without the dying of the old." 1158-9 

For thy Father-God is within self and without. Then 
as ye treat thy fellow man, ye are treating thy Maker. 
These are immutable, unchangeable laws of divine origin 
- not of man' s concept. What ye sow in body, in mind, in 


purpose, ye must one day in the physical being, reap. 
That, too, is immutable, unchangeable. Thus what ye do 
to others, ye are doing to thyself, whether it is in abuse of 
privileges, abuse of body, abuse of mind, or just the 
opposite in adding to the abilities in any direction. 


Let that rather be thy watchword, "I am my brother's 
keeper." Who is thy brother? Whoever, wherever he is 
that bears the imprint of the Maker in the earth, be he 
black, white, gray or grizzled, be he young, be he 
Hottentot; or on the throne or in the president's chair. 


(Q) Is there some karmic debt to be worked out with 
either or both and should I stay with them until I have 
made them feel more kindly toward me? 

(A) These- What is karmic debt? It is merely self 
being met, in relationship to that they themselves are 
working out and not a karmic debt betweenbut a karmic 
debt of self that may be worked out betweenthe 
associations that exist in the present! And this is true for 
every soul. 1436-3 

Offenses must come...but woe to him that bringeth 
same to pass. 272-9 

Self-glory, self-exaltation, self-indulgence becometh 
those influences that become as abominations to the 
Divinity in each soul; and separate them from a 
knowledge of Him. 12931 

Live with this in mind (and every soul may take 
heed): Ye shall pay every whit, that ye break of the law 
of the lord. For the law of the Lord is perfect; it 
converteth the soul. 3559-1 

Whatsoever an entity, an individual sows, that must 
he reap. That as law cannot be changed. As to whether 
one meets it in the letter of the law or in mercy, in grace, 
becomes the choice of the entity. If one would have 
mercy, grace, love, friends, one must show self in such a 
manner to those with whom one becomes associated. For 
like begets like. 5001-1 

Only as ye forgive those who blamed thee without a 
cause, who have spoken vilely of thee without reason, 
can the giver of life and light forgive thee. 3660-1 

In sacrifice there is penance, but grace doth more 
greatly abound to him who sheds the love of the Father 
upon those that the body may contact from day to day. 


Repentance, then, is "Not my will but Thine, Lord, 
be done in me, through me, day by day." 2533-7 

In love the world was saved and made; in hate and 
indifference the world may be destroyed. 9033 

In England, during the Crusades, the entity learned 
much; that they who fight, they who war against their 
brethren find themselves warring as against the spirit of 
truth. For that as is sown in dread, must be reaped in 
turmoil and in strife. 1226-1 

Put not then the cup of misunderstanding nor a 
stumbling block in the way of the weakest brother. 


Then only as an individual gives itself in service does 
it become aware. For as the divine love has manifested, 
does become manifested, that alone ye have given away 
do ye possess. That alone is the manner in which the 
growth, the awareness, the consciousness grows to be 


You'll not be in heaven if you're not leaning on the 
arm of someone you have helped. 3352-1 

(Q) [993]: Before we can have cooperation, do we not 
have to offer ourselves? 

(A) In cooperation is the offering of self to be a 
channel of activity, of thought; for as line upon line, 
precept upon precept, comes, so does it come through the 
giving of self; for he that would have life must give life, 
they that would have love must show themselves lovely, 
they that would have friends must be friendly, they that 
would have cooperation mustcooperate by the giving of 
self to that as is to be accompiished-whether in the 
bringing of light to others, bringing of strength, health, 
understanding, these are one in Him. 262-3 

It is not by might and power but by the little leaven 
that leaveneth the whole lump. It is line upon line, 
precept upon precept, here a little and there a little, that 
each soul seeks and finds its relationship to the Creative 
Forces or God-so that it may apply same in its own 
experience with the fellow man. 2509-2 

No fault, no hurt comes to self save that thou hast 
created in thine consciousness, in thine inner self, the 
cause. 262-83 

In the earth, one only meets self. Learn then, to stand 
oft aside and watch self pass by-even in those influences 
that at times are torments to thy mind. 3292-1 

Know that each soul constantly meets its own self. No 
problem may be run away from. Meet it now! 1204-3 

It is error to sit still. As we have oft indicated, do 
something: but never find fault, -and donot condemn self 
for being this or that Just do with thy might what thy 
hands find to do! 2437-1 

Do not attempt to be good, but rather good for 
something! 830-3 


Faint not because of disappointment. Rather use even 
failures as stepping-stones for gaining the greater vision 
of the light. ° 311-8 

It is the 'try' that is the more often counted as 
righteousness, and not the success or failure. 931-1 

You only fail if you quit trying. 3292-1 

"Whom the Lord loveth He chasteneth", and purgeth 
every one; for corruption may notinherit eternal life, and 
mustbebumedup. 262-26 

Fear is the root of most of the ills of mankind.„To 
overcome fear is to fill the mental, spiritual being with 
that which wholly casts out fear: the love manifest in 
the world through Him. 5459-3 

Be mad and sin not. Righteous anger is a virtue. He 
that has no temper is very weak; but he who controls not 
his temper is much worse. 3416-1 

Know, as the Teacher of teachers gave, there is one 
proof for all: "By their fruits ye shall know them" 
(Matthew 7:20). 2067-1 

Make concessions only to the weak. Defy the strong if 
they are in the wrong. 1336-1 

Better to trust one heart and that deceiving, than 
doubt one heart which if believing would bless thy life 
with true understanding. 2448-2 

See only the pure, the good! For until ye are able to 
see within the life and activities of those ye have come 
to hate the most, something ye would worship in thy 
Creator, ye haven't begun to think straight. Look for good 
and ye will find it. Search for it, for it is as a pearl of 
great price. For there is so much good in the worst, that 
ye may never judge another by thine own short standards. 


Speak gently, speak kindly to those who falter. Ye 
know not their own temptations, nor the littleness of their 
understanding. Judge not as to this or that activity of 
another; rather pray that the light may shine even in 
their lives as it has in thine. 2112-2 

Keep the heart singing! Keep the mind clear! Keep 
the face toward the light! The shadows then are behind. 


See the funny side-don' t be too serious. Remember, He 
even made a joke as He walked to the Garden to be 
betrayed. Remember, He looked with love upon His 
disciple that denied Him, even as He stood alone. 


Don't think a grouchy man can ever raise a headed 
cabbage or a tomato that will agree as well as those 
raised by a man who laughs and tells a good joke, though 
it may be smutty. 470-35 

Never worry as long as you can pray. When you can't 
pray-you'd better begin to worry. For then you have 
something to worry about. 3569-1 

He that would know the way must be oft in prayer, 
Joyous prayer, knowing He giveth life to as many as seek 
in sincerity to be a channel of blessing to someone. 281-12 

The prayers of ten may save a city; the prayers of 
twenty-five may save a nation-as the prayers of one 
may! But in union there is strength. 15982 

Prayer is supplication for direction, for 
understanding. Meditation is listening to the Divine 
within. " " 1861-19 

For the prayer is as a supplication or a plea to thy 
superior; yet thy meditation is that thou art meeting on 
common ground. 281-28 

Let the strength of self not be wavered by advice of 
the many; but turn to the within, knowing that the power 
lieth there. For when ye enter into the holy of holies, in 
thine own self, there ye may find strength that is beyond 
compare of man's physical abilities. 1752-1 

What is Meditation? 

It is not musing, not daydreaming; but as ye find your 
bodies made up of the physical, mental and spiritual, it 
is the attuning of the mental body and the physical body 
to its spiritual source... 

It is the attuning of thy physical and mental 
attributes seeking to know the relationships to the 
Maker. That is true meditation... 

Ye must learn to meditate, - just as ye have learned to 
walk, to talk... 

There must be a conscious contact with that which is a 
part of thy body-physical, thy body-mental, to thy soul- 
body or thy superconsciousness. The names indicate that 
ye have given it metes and bounds, while the soul is 
boundless - and is represented by many means or measures 
or manners in the expressions in the mind of each of you. 

But there are physical contacts which the anatomist 
finds not, or those who would look for imaginations or the 
minds. Yet it is found that within the body there are 
channels, there are ducts, there are glands, there are 
activities that perform no oneicnows what! in a living, 
moving, thinking being. In many individuals such become 
dormant. Many have become atrophied. Why? Non- 
usage, non-activity! Because only the desires of the 
appetite, self-indulgences and such, have so glossed over 
or used up the abilities in these directions that they 
become only wastes as it were in the spiritual life of an 


individual who has so abused or misused those abilities 
that have been given him for the greater activity. 

Then, purify thy mind if ye would meditate. How? 
Depending on what is thy concept of purification! Does it 
mean to thee a mixing up with a lot of other things, or a 
setting aside of self, a washing with water, a cleansing or 
purifying by fire or what not? 

Purify thy body. Shut thyself away from the cares of 
the world. Think on that as ye would do to have thy God 
meet thee face to face. "Ah," ye say "but many are not 
able to speak to God!" Many, you say, are fearful. Why? 
Have ye gone so far astray that ye cannot approach Him 
who is all merciful? He knows thy desires and thy needs, 
and can only supply according to the purposes that ye 
would perform within thine own self. 

Then, purify thy body, physically. Sanctify thy 
body, as the laws were given of old, for tomorrow the Lord 
would speak with thee - as a father speaketh to his 
children. Has God changed? Have ye wandered so far 
away? Know ye not that, as He has given, "If ye will be 
my children, I will be thy God"? and Though ye wander 
far away, if ye will but call I will hear"? 

If any of you say, "Yes, but it was spoken to those of 
old, • we have no part in such," then indeed ye have no 
part They that would know God, would know their own 
souls, would know how to meditate or to talk with God, 
must believe that He is, • and that He rewards those who 
seek to know and to do His biddings. 

That He gave of old is as new today as it was in the 
beginning of man's relationship or seeking to know the 
will of God, if ye will but call on Him within thine inner 
self! Know that thy body is the temple of the living God. 
there He has promised to meet thee! 

In thine own house, in thine own body there are the 
means for the approach, - through the desire first to know 
Him; putting that desire into activity by purging the 
body, the mind of those things that ye know or even 
conceive of as being hindrances, - not what someone else 
says! It isn't what you want someone else to give! As 
Moses gave of old, it isn't who will descend from heaven 
to bring you a message, nor who would come from over the 
seas, but Lo, ye find Him within thine own heart, within 
thine own consciousness! if ye will meditate, open thy 
heart, thy mind! Let thy body and mind be channels that 
ye may do the things ye ask God to do for you! Thus ye 
come to know Him. 28141 

(Q) Please explain in detail the steps I should take 
in meditation. 

(A) In whatever manner that to thine own 
consciousness is a cleansing of the body and of the mind, 
that ye may present thyself clean before thyself and 
before thy God, do! Whether washing of the body with 
water, purging of same with oils, or surrounding same 
with music or incense. But do that thy consciousness 
directs thee! Not questioning! For he that doubteth has 
already built his barrier! 

Then, meditation upon that which is thy highest 
ideal within thyself, raise the vibrations from thy lower 

self, thy lower consciousness through the centers of thy 
body to the temple of thy mind, thy brain, thy eye that is 
single in purpose; or to the glandular forces of the body as 
the Single Eye. 

Then, listen - listen! For it is not in the storm, not in 
the noise, but the still small voice that rises within. 


(In meditation) never open self, my friend, without 
surrounding self with the spirit of the Christ, that ye 
may ever be guarded. 440-8 

(Q) What is my best time for meditation? 
(A) As would be for all, two to three o'clock in the 
morning. 462-8 

(Q) (What is the best polarity for this body) as it 

(A) Facing the East, to be sure. 2072-12 

There is that access, then, that way, to the Throne of 
grace, of mercy, of peace, of understanding, within thine 
own self. For He has promised to meet thee in thine own 
temple, in thine own body, through thine own mind. And 
as He has given of old, as He has made manifest in the 
flesh, as He has spoken to thee and to thy fellow man 
again and again, consecrate your mind, your body; purge 
same in a manner that to thee in thine own consciousness 
has made and does make thee as receiving thy Lord, thy 
God! And then enter into the holy of holies, within thine 
own consciousness; turn within; see what has prompted 
thee. And He has promised to meet thee there. And 
there shall it be told thee from within the steps thou 
shouldst take day by day, step by step. Not that some 
great exploit, some great manner of change should come 
within thine body, thine mind, but line upon line, precept 
upon precept, here a little, there a little. 

For it is, as He has given, not the knowledge alone but 
the practical application-in thine daily experience with 
thy fellow man-that counts. Not that one seeks out this, 
that or the other manner, or the other channel; for lo, He 
is within thine own self-yet without, that He may guide, 
guard, direct thy ways day by day! It is just in living 
those things in the material manner that are the fruits of 
the Spirit, that bring with them their reward-which 
maketh for the understanding within thee: Love ye one 
another; show forth gentleness, kindness; speak softly, 
even to those that are harsh; upbraid not; condemn not; be 
long-suffering. Be patient, even with thine own self; not 
as some men count patience, but as an activative principle, 
as an activative experience in thine own self. For as the 
Master of Masters has said; in patience possess ye, do ye 
become aware of, thine own soul! 

See, know, feel, understand that thy body is but the 
shell, the shadow, the encasement of thy soul; with thy 
mind that is both spiritual and material, that partakes 
of heaven-yea, and of hell also. For as He has given, as 
heaven is His home and earth His footstool, "as ye are in 
me and I in thee and I in the Father," so abide ye; that ye 


may know. Not that, then, which maketh afraid. Not 
that which is of fear. Not that which is of trembling. 
But the love, the peace, the patience, the mercy, that 
casteth out fear; the patience that turneth away wrath; 
the mercy that doeth good even unto those that speak 
evil of thee, who despitefully use thee, who say unkind 
things about thee. Speak gently. These make for that 
within self which brings the awareness such that thy 
face, thy body, shines even as a light unto Him. For if He 
abides with thee, who can make thee afraid? 

Will He abide with thee? "As ye call, so will I 
harken." For by what judgment are ye to be judged? 
"Inasmuch as ye do it unto the least of these, my children, 
ye do it unto me." 

Keep the faith that thou hast had. knowHe is; and 
as ye seek Him He rewards those that diligently seek 
Him. 922-1 

Know that the entering of a manifested life is not 
chance, but through the will of the Father. For He hath 
not willed that any soul should perish, but hath with 
every temptation offered a channel, an 
opportunity-through the choice of the entity-to meet 

Hence know that a life-experience is not for self- 
indulgence, self-gratificatiorv-but that ALL things shall 
be according to the will of the Creator in Whom ye live 
and move and have thy being! 1745-1 


(Cayce had the following dream after his arrest and trial In 
Detroit for practicing medicine without a license. Although he was 
acquitted, this experience was an excruciating one for Cayce, 
and caused hi much inner turmoil and selfdoubt about whether 

he was really doing God's will.) 

(Q) Interpret and explain the dream which Edgar 
Cayce has on March 3,1936 in which he was born again 
over two hundred years in the future and traveled to 
various sections of this country where records of Edgar 
Cayce could be found. 

[Detailed dream not read:] 

(3/3/36 On train from Detroit to Va. Beach, following 
end of court action in re: his arrest in 11/35 for "practicing 
medicine without a license". See 254-89 Reports of Court 

I had been born again in 2158 A.D. in Nebraska. The 
sea apparently covered all of the western part of the 
country, as the city where I lived was on the coast. The 
family name was a strange one. At an early age as a child 
I declared myself to be Edgar Cayce who had lived 200 
yrs. before. Scientists, men with long beards, little hair, 
and thick glasses, were called in to observe me. They 
decided to visit the places where I said I had been born, 
lived and worked, in Ky., Ala., N.Y., Mich., and Va. 
Taking me with them the group of scientists visited these 
places in a long, cigar-shaped, metal flying ship which 
moved at high speed. Water covered part of Ala. 

Norfolk, Va. had become an immense seaport N.Y. had 
been destroyed either by war or an earthquake and was 
being rebuilt. Industries were scattered over the 
countryside. Most of the houses were of glass. 

Many records of my work as Edgar Cayce were 
discovered and collected. The group returned to Nebraska 
taking the records with them to study. 

(A) These experiences, as has oft been indicated, come 
to the body in those manners in which there may be help, 
strength, for periods when doubt or fear may have arisen. 
As in this experience, there were about the entity those 
influences which appeared to make for such a record of 
confusion as to appear to the material or mental-minded 
as a doubting or fearing of those sources that made for the 
periods through which the entity was passing in that 
particular period. 

And the vision was that there might be strength, 
there might be an understanding that though the moment 
may appear as dark, though there may be periods of the 
misinterpreting of purposes, even these will be turned into 
that which will be the very proof itself in the 
experiences of the entity and those whom the entity 
might, whom the entity would in its experience through 
the earth plane, help; and those to whom the entity 
might give hope and understanding. 

This then is-the interpretation. As has been given, 
'Fear not' Keep the faith; for those that be with thee are 
greater than those that would hinder. Though the very 
heavens fall, though the earth shall be changed, though 
the heavens shall pass, the promises in Him are sure and 
will stand-as in that day-as the proof of thy activity in 
the lives and hearts of those of thy fellow man. 

For indeed and in truth ye know, "As ye do it unto thy 
fellow man, ye do it unto thy God, to thyself." For, self 
effaced, God may indeed glorify thee and make thee 
stand as one that is called for a purpose in the dealings, 
the relationships with thy fellow man. 

Be not unmindful that He is nigh unto thee in every 
trial, in everytemptation, and hath not willed that thou 
should est perish. 

Make thy will then one with His. Be not afraid. 

That is the interpretation. That the periods from the 
material angle as visioned are to come to pass matters not 
to the soul, but do thy duty TODAY! TOMORROW will 
care for itself. 

These changes in the earth will come to pass, for the 
time and times and half times are at an end, and there 
begin those periods for the readjustments. For how hath 
He given? "The righteous shall inherit the earth." 

Hast thou, my brethren, a heritage in the earth? 

?94-185 6/30/36 


Other Prophecies 

Here is a collection of other Native and non-Native prophecies which comes from the internet 
web site "M organa's bservatory" (http:/ / morgana/ index.htm), an 
excellent source of a wide variety of prophetic material. I cannot vouch for the accuracy or source 
for all of the foil owing prophecies, butl know several of them to be authentic and suspect the 
balance are authentic as well: 

Helena P. Blavatsky, Russian Seer 

"We are at the close of the cycle of 5,000 years of the 
present Aryan Kali Yuga or dark age. This will be 
succeeded by an age of light Even now under our very 
eyes, the new Race or Races are preparing to be formed, 
and that is in America that the transformation will take 
place, and has already silently commenced. This Race 
will be altered in mentality and will move toward a more 
perfect spiritual existence." 

That the periodical sinking and reappearance of mighty 
continents, now called Atlantean and Lemurian by modem 
writers, is not fiction will be demonstrated. It is only in 
the 20th century that portions, if not the whole, of the 
present work will be vindicated. 

"A world destruction as happened to Atlantis 11,000 
years ago... instead of Atlantis all of England and parts of 
NW European coast will sink into the sea, in contrast, the 
sunken Azores region, the Isle of Poseidonis, will again be 
raised from the sea." 

Count Louis Hamon (Cheiro) 
(1927 Prediction) 

"Germany and Italy will war against France and 
England. In the coming 50 years an earthquake zone will 
develop in NE Pacific coast of Peru up through to the 
Arctic regions. Eastern cities of the U.S. will be affected, 
and parts of New York will be destroyed in 50-100 years. 
A series of earthquakes will cause the Azores to rise and 
Atlantis will resurface and be explored." 

Wovoka, Paiute Prophet 

"When I was in the other world with the Old Man, I saw 
all the people who have died. But they were not sad. 
They were happy while engaged in their old-time 
occupations and dancing, gambling, and playing ball. It 
was a pleasant land, level, without rocks or mountains, 
green all the time, and rich in abundance of game and 
fish. Everyone was forever young. 

"After showing me all of heaven, God told me to go back 
to Earth and tell His people you must be good and love one 
another, have no quarreling, and live in peace with the 
whites; that you must work, and not lie or steal; and that 
you must put an end to the practice of war. 

"If you faithfully obey your instructions from on high, you 
will at last be reunited with your friends in a renewed 
world where there would be no more death or sickness or 
old age. First, though, the Earth must die. Indians should 
not be afraid, however. For it will come alive again just 
like the sun died and came alive again. In the hour of 
tribulation, a tremendous earthquake will shake the 
ground. Indians must gather on high ground. A mighty 
flood shall follow. The water and mud will sweep the 
white race and all Indian skeptics away to their deaths. 
Then the dead Indian ancestors will return, as will the 
vanished buffalo and other game, and everything on 
Earth will once again be an Indian paradise." 

Tim Sikyea, Yellowknife Tribe 

"Many of the dreams or visions don't necessarily mean the 
end; they could also indicate a change. Our people say 
that people who are not spiritually in tune can't adapt to 
this change. They won't have the necessary physical, 
mental and spiritual strength to change themselves. It is 
being said that humanity will become mad. 

There will be an energy or something similar that will 
influence the atmosphere. As a consequence, the pressure 
in our brains will increase by 35 percent. But people who 
have become spiritually clear and accept these 
approaching energies of the cosmos will be able to be 
secure from this human cleansing process. 

Seventy to 80 percent of humanity are not spiritually but 
materialistically oriented. That's why they won't be 
able to endure this transformation; they will go mad. 
They will kill themselves and destroy everything around 
them. It will be like a madhouse. Proba'bly, somebody 
will then push the famous button because of this." 

Brave Buffalo, Brule Sioux Nation 

"According to the Sacred Hoop and the prophecies, it is 
time to share this ancient wisdom. It is time for the Great 


Purification. We are at a point of no return. The two- 
legged are about to bring' destruction to life on Earth. It's 
happened before, and it's about to happen again. The 
Sacred Hoop shows how all things go in a circle. The old 
become new; the new becomes old. Everything repeats. 
White people have no culture. Culture is having roots in 
the Earth. People without culture don't exist very long 
because Nature is God. Without a connection to Nature, 
the people drift, grow negative, destroy themselves. In 
the beginning we had one mind, and it was positive, a 
thing of beauty, seeing beauty everywhere. 

'The Earth People never wrote anything down and had no 
written language. They knew that, if they wrong 
anything down, it would be disastrous. If you write 
something down, you don't have to remember it. And mind 
goes off into unconsciousness. It becomes negative, or 
unconscious force." 

Sun Bear, 'Bear Tribe" Medicine Man 

'These changes might not be convenient for humans, but 
the earth will make them anyway. As a dog shakes itself 
to get rid of fleas, the earth will generate earthquakes, 
volcanoes and climactic changes to rid itself of surplus 
and troublesome humans. If it is necessary that a lot of 
people die off during the major changes, and that the 
people that survive are conscious people that are 
responsible for the earth and are living on it in harmony 
and love and respect, then that is what is supposed to 

'The people who will survive will be those who love life 
and affirm life in every way they can. They will be 
people who are willing to make a conscious change in the 
way they view life and in their actions toward all 
creation. They will not be those sitting with their rifles 
over a can of beans. The survivors will be people reaching 
out for another level of consciousness and seeking 
communication with the Creator and the Earth. They 
will be people living close to the earth far from large 
cities who are able to grow and harvest or gather their 
own food from the wild." 

"I'm trying to reach out and create a larger group of 
people who are in harmony with the earth. These people 
won't get wiped out in the process of the earth changes. If 
you know where to be and how to prepare, this can be a 
very comfortable, interesting and exciting time." 

The 1989 San Francisco quake and the 1993 Northridge 
one were just warnings of much larger ones that will rock 

Sun Bear, who was part Chippewa Indian, medicine chief 
of the Bear Tribe, and a teacher and visionary said, in 


'The earth is an intelligent living being! Before any 
major changes ever happen upon the Earth Mother, it has 
warned people. . . . You're going to see major changes here. 
When I asked the Spirit about the earthquakes, and 
whether these things could be changed, and what would 
happen? Spirit said it's already sealed. It's already 

A volcano that will devastate the Seattle area is 
foretold is an ancient prophecy from Washington State's 
Puyallup tribe, which says, 'The time will come when 
Little Sister will speak, and Grandfather will answer. 
And the land will be swept clean to the ocean." Sun Bear 
explained that Donald Matheson, a leader of the 
Puyallup tribe, moved his people to Idaho in 1979 because 
he believed it was time for this prophecy to be fulfilled. 
In March 1980, the mountain that we call little sister 
began to whisper. May 18th of 1980, the Little Sister 
spoke with a cubic mile of mountain that was spread over 
the northwest area, and many other parts of the world... 
'The Little Sister is called Mount St. Helens. Soon, the 
Grandfather is going to answer so much bigger. That one is 
called Mt. Rainier." Indian prophecies also foretold 
worldwide environmental catastrophes such as the 
greenhouse effect, "changes in the seasons and in the 
weather, disappearance of wildlife, famine," and the 
ozone hole, which was referred to as a "hole in our 


Traditional Dineh (Navajo) View of the "Hopi/Navajo Dispute" 
(Dineh, which is pronounced dee-neh', is the traditional name of the Navajo people.) 

I intentionally have avoided a political tone in this collection. As G randfather Commanda says, 
"Its too late for political action. Pray!" r, as expressed by Starhawk in the 10th Anniversary 
edition of her classic book on the rebirth of the G oddess M ovement Spiral Dance: "Political 
awareness can become a tyranny of its own, not least because it locks us into the issues and 
perspectives of a particular time. But when we are looking at questions of the sacred, we move 
beyond time. To create the changes in consciousness needed to transform society at a deep level, 
we need insights broader than those the issues of the moment can provide. ■ -true spirituality 
must also take us beyond the will, down into the realms of mystery, of letting go, of echoing 
questions rather than resounding answers." 

In Hopiland, however, often there is the blurring of distinctions that once seemed clear. The Hopi 
say they are a microcosm of the world. I have seen and felt this myself. In this way, the political 
struggles of the moment take on a greater, more spiritual significance. In the following statements 
from the Traditional Dineh living on Big Mountain look for the archetypes of the spiritual 
struggle which encompasses us all. 

As I report elsewhere in this collection, the chief dispute here is between the Hopi Tribal Council 
and the traditional people of both the Hopi and Dineh. Traditional Hopi do believe it is right for 
Dineh to be living on Big Mountain, si nee Hopi prophecy holds that the Dineh will occupy and 
protect the land. However, traditional Hopi have told me that Big Mountain is a particularly 
important part of the land over which the Hopi were given stewardship in their Covenant with 
the Creator. The Traditionals say that when they were driven from Oraibi in 1906 and established 
Hotevilla, there were no Dineh living on Big Mountain at that time. The traditional Dineh say 
Big Mountain is their ancestral homeland. In this collection of material I present both points of 

(I have resisted including material I have found from the Israeli internet site: 'The Temple Mount 
in Jerusalem" (http:/ / The parallels between the so-called 
"Hopi/ Navajo" conflict and the "Jewish/ Palestinian" conflict are truly remarkable.) 

Sovereign Dineh Nation Alert 

e-mail # 

home page address http;/ / 

Sovereign Dineh 

Roberta Blackgoat, Chairperson, 


Sovereign Dineh Nation Office 

P.O. Box 40319 

Flagstaff, A Z 86004 

phone 520/522-8683 

Re: Statement to be read and submitted to International 
Day of the World's Indigenous People, August 9, 19%, 
United Nations Headquarters, New York 

I bring to you today greetings and statements from the 
Dineh residents living on Black Mesa, who today, as for 
the last 22 years, are resisting the efforts of the United 

States government to evict us from our ancestral land. 
10,000 people have been forcibly relocated to clear the 
land for coal mining. Only a few hundred families 
remain, living in the shadows of North America's largest 
coal field, which has been carved into the heart of our 
sacred land. We who continue to resist are political and 
religious prisoners, divided by miles of barbed wire fence 
on our ancestral land. 

First I will begin by reading this statement from Roberta 
Blackgoat; who was born and has lived for 76 years in 
Thin Rock Mesa: "I am the Chairperson of Sovereign 
Dineh Nation, the organization formed to protect our 
homes. I give my greetings and would like to be here in 
person, but I have a long way to travel to be in San 
Francisco next week, where the final mediation meeting 
is being held concerning a proposed 75 year lease 


"In 1864, the U.S. Government forcibly removed nearly 
10,000 Dineh to the world's first concentration camp at 
Fort Sumner, New Mexico. As a result of this ethnic 
cleansing, thousands perished from illnesses brought on by 
physical and spiritual diseases and mal nourishment. 
Only when the survivors were allowed to return home to 
Dinetah and rejoin those who avoided removal was 
health restored to our Nation. 110 years later Congress 
again brought "war" against our people through the evil 
known as the Relocation Act. Again nearly 10,000 Dineh 
were intimidated into leaving their Church and Altar. 
Many who left have since met with premature deaths. 
Many more have been devastated by physical and 
spiritual illnesses. 

We who are unalterably opposed to relocation gain our 
strength by maintaining our traditional religion. We 
wish harm to no one and don't understand why we've been 
made to suffer so much for so long. We remember our 
honored friend and Traditional Hopi Elder, Grandfather 
David Monongye. He often told why many Traditional 
Hopi knew it was the Creator's idea for Dineh to live 
here. He was taught the Dineh were brought to surround 
the Mesa by the Holy Ones so as to provide a protective 
buffer from the forces of greed and destruction. If, and 
when, the Traditional Dineh were removed from these 
lands, his people would fall in turn, and the Earth would 
be destroyed. He knew from ancient teachings that Dineh 
and Hopi were physically and spiritually bound 
together. He realized, as do the current Resisters to 
relocation, that if the Dineh Church and Altar can be 
destroyed, so could everyone else's. 

The Hopi and Dineh people do not have a quarrel, but 22 
years ago, a group of mining and power companies 
deceived the U.S. government into thinking there was a 
range war between us. These mining companies convinced 
the U.S. government that the solution was to evict 
everyone who lived in the areas which they wished to 

Rachael Chaat says, "I am 13 years old. My grandmother 
lives in Big Mountain. I was raised with her and I was 
taught Dineh values. I don't know why the U.S. 
government is pressuring all the Elders into relocating. 
You don't know about the hardship that happens out 
here. All the U.S. government and most of the 
untraditional Hopis are only interested in mining. My 
grandmother once said mining is like raping the Earth. In 
fact ifs true, but you wouldn't believe it Have you ever 
seen the mining area? How would you like it if someone 
was mining in your front yard? Everyone don't like the 
Agreement just as you don't like the Dineh. why do you 
cause so much pain and suffering?" 

Brenndon Tso says, "I am 9 years old. I was bom in a dirt 
floored hogan in Mosquito Springs. I have nightmares 
when the Hopi tribe threatens to tear it down. I was 

scared when I had to run seven miles to save my 
grandma's horses from the BIA rangers. They interrupted 
a ceremony I was participating in. I am a Sun Dancer. I 
have helped bury my relatives and it makes me sick to 
my stomach to think of the Hopis having control over 
this area. My umbilical cord and afterbirth is buried 
here. These are my places that I am to care for all my 
life. And it makes me sad because I cannot live with my 
grandma all the time. I would like to help herd the 
sheep and take care of the horses every day. But my 
family was forced out when they tore down a new round 
house. There was no room for us to stay. We were forced 
to move off the reservation. That makes me real sad. My 
parents can't pay their bills. If we could choose to, we 
would still be living in Mosquito Springs." 

Sam Tso, Sovereign Dineh Nation, age 33 says, "What 
the United Nations should do is cite the U.S. government 
for human rights violations against the Indian people 
throughout the North American continent All Native 
Americans are aware of this. Where I live we face forced 
relocation and it makes me feel jittery. But I know that I 
must face it. Our family line living in the Mosquito 
Springs area up to Blue Canyon area can be traced back 
eighteen generations. That puts us far beyond the 

The U.S. Congress should be working on ways to return our 
People and to help heal the wounds it has caused. 
Instead, the U.S. Congress is getting ready to pass 
legislation that will seal the fate of the few families 
remaining on the land. This bill, Senate #1973, is opposed 
by all the people remaining on the land. This bill tells us 
we must pay rent to live on the land where our families 
have lived for hundreds of years, that we must pay 
grazing fees for the livestock herds with which we 
survive. It says we must obey the laws of a police state 
that does not allow us to have visitors, or to be 
represented in its government. It says we must submit to a 
foreign government who only wishes to remove us by any 
means necessary so that they can sell our land to the 
mining companies. The U.S. Congress intends to pass this 
law without ever allowing any of our people to appear 
before it or to testify about what it means. 

Katherine A. Smith says, "I am 79 years old. I live here 
under Big Mountain. My ancestors have always been here 
from time immemorial My grandmother and 
grandparents went to Fort Sumner on the long walk. We 
have always been here before the Long Walk and 
afterwards, it has been over a thousand years now. 
Today, I am still here and myrhildren are here also. 
Here in Big Mountain we have many prayers that tie us to 
the land. This place that we call Big Mountain, it is our 
life. It is not just Big Mountain, we also hold the trees, 
the dirt from the earth, and even the wind in our prayers. 
These trees and the plants are our medicine, we live in 
this environment. The Holy Ones speak to us through 
these entities, so this is where ourprayers lie. The 


sheep, the horse, cattle, dogs, goats, and even cats are a 
part of our daily lives, they exist also in our prayers. We 
do not have jobs, this is our life. Even the cornfield, this 
is a big part of our lives. Today, we cannot plant without 
the Hopi and BlA's complaint. We cannot build a dam for 
water and we cannot haul wood for fire. The law is 
something that we do not understand. We do not speak 
English, we have never gone to school. The BIA impounds 
our horses, cattle, mules, goats and sheep. They steal 
them from us. The law Pi. 93531 was passed in 1973 
without our knowledge. These laws were passed without 
our consent or understanding. And our children, even 
though we were raising them here, we were told they 
were no longer residents here. They threw our children 
out like trash. 

So, as for me, from where I stand, I believe that the land 
was stolen. Our livestock are stolen. Even our very being 
is being stolen, they threaten to throw us off the land. 
They put fear in our hearts, and this is the way they are 
killing us. This land that I am sitting on, this earth here, 
there are many minerals underneath that could bring 
wealth to people. That is why they crush me with their 
laws to tell me that I do not belong here. For these 
reasons, I am resisting. I was born here. Big Mountain is 
my mother, and that is why I will remain. I cannot just 
walk away from my mother. She is the one who will 
decide when it is time for me to return to her, this is when 
I will leave." 

The rights which we request are only the minimum 
granted to all people under the United Nation's 
Universal Declaration of Human Rights. We request your 
support and the support of the United Nations in 
protecting our right to continue in our traditional way of 

Thank you 


For Immediate Release August 9,19% 

Please contact Sovereign Dineh Nation 

c/o Bobby Castillo, American Indian Movement 


Dineh (Navajo) Elders and youth, traveling from Big 
Mountain, and throughout the Black Mesa region of the 
Navajo Nation will hold a prayer vigil and 
demonstration beginning 8:30 am, Wednesday, August 14, 
in front of the U.S. Court of Appeals for Ninth Circuit 
Court, 121 Spear St., San Francisco. At 12:00 noon, a press 
conference will be held outside of 450 U.S. Federal 

Elders and youth are traveling a distance of two thousand 
miles, to tell Ninth Circuit Court that they reject the 

proposed Accommodation Agreement; 75-year lease being 
imposed upon them by the Hopi and the U.S. government 

The resisters have been denied legal representation 
throughout the negotiations. Attorney Lee Phillips, who 
is paid by the Navajo Nation to "represent" the families, 
states that he only represents the people that want to 
sign the Agreement; which has been rejected by ratios of 
250:1 within the communities affected by it. He has 
refused to provide any information regarding the final 
Mediation hearing in San Francisco to the people whose 
lives depend on its results. 

Even though they are the ones facing another relocation 
deadline, the families in the Black Mesa communities 
continue to be denied a voice. They ask why the U.S. 
government, the U.S. Department of Justice and the Hopi 
tribe need to hold the final Mediation meeting in San 
Francisco, behind closed doors? 

The proposed lease does not resolve what Congress, 
including Senator Barry Goldwater, Sr., Sidney Yates, 
and Senator McCain, have through the years called 'a 
great mistake' when referring to Pi. 93-531, the 
Relocation Act. It was passage of this Act in 1974 that 
prompted the forced relocation of over 10,000 Traditional 
Dineh from their ancestral homeland to clear the way for 
mineral resource development by energy companies, 
including Peabody Coal Company. 

Roberta Blackgoat, Chairperson for Sovereign Dineh 
Nation says, The Hopi and Dineh people do not have a 
quarrel, but 22 years ago, a group of mining and power 
companies deceived the U.S. government into thinking 
there was a 'range war' between us. The mining and 
power companies deceived the U.S. government that the 
solution was to evict everyone who lived in the areas 
which they wished to mine. So Congress intervened." 
Since 1974, hundreds of millions of dollars has been spent 
on Relocation, while those who resist have been denied 
access to safe drinking water, and have been denied home 
improvement and new home construction for over twenty 
years, even in cases of demonstrated medical need. 

Recently Dineh resisters won a major victory, delaying a 
vote on S. 1973 The Navajo-Hopi Land Dispute 
Settlement Act of 1996" one day before Congress went on 
recess. This bill if passed would have caused the 104th 
Session of Congress to be remembered the second Session of 
Congress to commit a travesty of justice against the Dineh 
people. What the Senate Select Committee on Indian 
Affairs has called a fair hearing for them is a hearing at 
a location several thousands of miles from where they 
live, for which they were given less than five days 

Behind closed doors huddle a group of people interested 
only in money. Outside these doors stand the families 
whose ancestral homes will become the property of a 


hostile government, who will have their means of #1973, if it can force the people into leaving or signing an 

survival taken away by grating restrictions that deny Agreement which they do not want, 
them the minimum needed to support themselves in the 

traditional way their families have lived for hundreds Isn't it time for the voice of the people to be heard? 

of years, and who will subject to the rule of a foreign Human, Civil, Religious and Constitutional-rights 

government which has been promised $50.2 million violations perpetrated against the Dineh people must 

dollars by the U.S. government under the Senate bill cease. Please attend this prayer vigil and press 



Sources of Additional Information 

Many of you have asked for a list of books or other information on the Hopi. Here is a list of sources not only on the Hopi 
but on other topics as well. 


Hotevilla -Hopi Shrine of theCovena nt- Microcosm of the World by Thomas E. Mails and Dan Evehema. Copyright © 
1995. Marlow & Company, 632 Broadway, Seventh floor, New York, NY 10012 

There is one "must read". It is Hotevilla - H opi Shrine of the Covenant -Microcosm of the World by Thomas E. Mails 
and Dan Evehema. It is not perfect Mails has included a large portion of information on Hopi ancestors that comes from 
Western anthropologists. Much of this information is misleading, inaccurate or just plain wrong. But the value of the 
book lies the extensive reprints of statements directly from Hopi Elders. In particular, the book reprints excerpts of 43 of 
the 45 issues of Techqua Ikachi (Land and Life), a newsletter the traditional elders of Hotevilla published 
clandestinely between 1975 and 1986. These newsletters and the other verbatim quotes from Hopi elders are a rich source 
of information on Hopi Prophecies and Teachings. 

Note that Mails subsequently published on his own a book titled: The Hopi Survival Kit While Hopi traditional from 
Hotevilla heartily recommend Hotevilla, they do NOT recommend The Hopi Survival Kit, which apparently was 
published without their blessing and which they suggest is not accurate. I have noted several inaccuracies in it myself, 
but it may still be a worthwhile read for Mails has combed the many Techqua Ikachi newsletters and printed all 
prophecies from them in The Hopi Survival Kit I caution you that much of the interpretation and advice in this book is 
from Mails himself and differs in important ways from the teachings of the Hopi themselves. 

The Book of the Hopi Copyright © 1963, Frank Waters, Viking Penguin Inc. 

A book which is a rich source of fascinating material on Hopi history and religion is Frank Waters' 1963 book The Book 
of the Hopi. Waters interviewed 30 elders for two years to gather information for this book. However, most of them 
were from Oraibi, where "progressives" violently drove out "traditional s" in September 1906. The traditionals then 
founded Hotevilla. The traditional elders of Hotevilla do NOT recommend this book, saying it is not accurate. Two 
specific criticisms: 1. The account of the driving out of traditionals from Oraibi suggests they were allowed to go back into 
their homes to gather belongings. The Elders say this is not true. 2. The idea is put forth of a "Blue Star Kachina" who 
will dance in the plaza as a sign of impending Purification. A Hotevilla traditional I visited in July 1997 discounted this 
idea, saying that it represents a misunderstanding of the "Blue Star Kachina". The traditionals don't make a connection 
between this Kachina and their prophecies for Purification. So, read this book at your own risk! 

Pumpkin Seed Point Copyright © 1969, Frank Waters, Sage/Swallow Press Incorporated 

Mountain Dialogues Copyright © 1981, Frank Waters, Sage/Swallow Press Books, now Ohio University Press 

Pumpkin Seed Point is Waters' first-person story of the three years he spent living in Hopiland while he collected 
information for The Book of the Hopi. Anyone who has read Book of the Hopi or is interested in Hopi culture will find 
Pumpkin Seed Point absorbing. Mountain Dialogues, written later, is my second favorite book by Waters (my favorite 
being TheM an 1/1/ ho Killed theDeer). Dialogues contains a series of related, provocative essays on humanity's mystical 
relationships with one another, nature and the sacred. The chapter on Hopi prophecy is perhaps the best single thing I 
have read on the topic. Much food for thought here. 

Truth of a Hopi Copyright © 1967, Edmund Nequatewa, Northern Arizona Society of Science and Art, available from 
the Museum of Northern Arizona, Flagstaff. Originally issued in 1936 as Bulletin No. 8 

Absolutely fascinating and historic collection of Hopi Creation and Migration stories, historyand other teachings. 
Includes first hand accounts of 20th Century events such as the taking of Hopi children by US government soldiers, the 
rift in Oraibi which led to the settlement of Hotevilla and others. 


Sun Chief, The Autobiography of a Hopi Indian Copyright © 1942, Don Talayesva, edited by Leo W. Simmons, Yale 
University Press 

Absorbing and intimate life story told with great courage and humor by a Hopi who was among the "Friendlies" in 
Oraibi in 1906 when the "Hostiles" were kicked out. Talayesva was sent by Federal Authorities to Sherman School for 
Indians in Riverside, California. The story of his return to his own culture and the necessary adjustments is particularly 
touching. I couldn't put this book down. 

Pages From Hopi History Copyright © 1974, Harry C. James, The University of Arizona Press 

James has associated with the Hopi for most of this century, and his friends and acquaintances include most of the Hopi 
who played important roles in the shaping of 20th century Hopi History. Among them was Tewaquaptewa, the Oraibi 
Kikmongwi who kicked the "Hostiles" out of Oraibi in 1906. James' first book on the Hopi, Treasure of the Hopitu, was 
published in 1927. Pages From Hopi History include first hand and other accounts from Hopi History from Creation to 
the early 1970s. This is a historically important and well-written work I haven't read any of James' other books, 
which include Haliksai! Hopi Legends of Grand Canyon Country, ©1940 and The Hopi Indians, ©1956. 

Po Pai Mo, The Search for White Buffalo Woman Copyright © 1983, Robert Boissiere, Sunstone Press 
The Hopi Way, an Odyssey Copyright ©1985, Robert Boissiere, Sunstone Press 
Meditations With the Hopi Copyright © 1986, Robert Boissiere, Bear & Company, Inc. 
The Return of Pahana Copyright © 1990, Robert Boissiere, Bear & Company Publishing 

Boissiere was adopted by a Hopi family and became a participant in their cultural life. Po Pai Mo tells the fascinating 
story of his coming to the US from France immediately following World War II and his journey of personal discovery 
which led to the Hopi Mesas, among other places in Native America. The Hopi Way is a great little book with a first 
hand account of daily life among the Hopi. It tells the poignant story of a Hopi family trying to maintain their 
traditions in an intrusive modem world. Meditations With the Hopi is a fascinating series of interpretations of Hopi 
thoughts, stories or teachings. I am in no position to judge whether Boissiere accurately represents Hopi philosophies, 
but I found the book rich and thought-provoking. The Return of Pahana is a highly-interpreted view of Hopi Legend and 
Prophecy that has not to my knowledge been reviewed by any traditional Hopi religious leaders. It does contain 
something which may be of interest: excerpts from the July, 1955 Federal "Hopi Hearings" in which the commissioner of 
Indian Affairs Glenn L. Emmons finally agreed to traditional Hopi requests to send a delegation to Hopiland to hear 
Hopi in every village air their grievances. Boissiere was present and obtained one of the few original transcripts. He 
reprints excerpts of Hopi records, legends, myths and sacred teachings from the more than 400 page document. There are 
quotes from Hotevilla traditional elders Dan Katchongva and David Monongye. Boissiere doesn't say where one could 
find a copy of the transcript; but mentions that shortly after the hearings he obtained a copy at the Phoenix area office 
of the federal Bureau of Indian Affairs. 


The single best source of documents and information relating to the Hopi on the Web right now is The Hopi Information 

Network" at http;/ / 

Sources of information on other Native Nations 

Virtually every Native American Nation has prophecies relating to this great transition we have now entered. 

Black Elk Speaks : Being the Life Story of a Holy M an oftheOglala Sioux, 1988, John G. Neihardt, University of 
Nebraska Press '' 

The classic co-written autobiography of the great Oglala holy man, first published in 1932. Black Elk's vision is 
startlingly similar to Revelations in the New Testament, and should be read by anyone with an interest in native 
American culture, history and prophecy. 


Wisdomkeepers, Meetings with Native American Spiritual Elders, Copyright © 1990, Steve Wall and Harvey Arden, 
Beyond Words Publishing, Inc. 

In-depth stories and teachings from 17 great Native American elders including Thomas Banyacya of Hopi and Leon 
Shenandoah, Tadodaho Ho-de-no-sau-ne (Chief of Chiefs of The People of the Long House - Iroquois Confederacy). 
Sadly, both elders have passed to Spirit in the past few years, as have so many other great Native American Elders. 

Profiles in W isdom, Native Elders Speak about the Earth, Copyright © 1991, Steven McFadden, Bear & Company 

Steve was the coordinator for the 1995-1996 Sunbow 5 Walk for the Earth when I met him. This prayer walk from First 
Encounter Beach, Cape Cod to Santa Barbara, CA was guided spiritually by Anishnabe elder Grandfather William 
Commanda, who is one of the elders profiled in this book. (Other elders guiding the walk included Hopis Dan Evehema 
and Martin Gashweseoma.) Other elders profiled in Steve's book include the well-known Mayan Hunbatz Men, Seneca 
Grandmother Twylah Nitsch, Etowa Cherokee Dhyani Ywahoo and Sun Bear. Steve has an intuitive feel for Native 
teachings and a tremendous store of Native lore and knowledge, making this book particularly interesting. 

The Book of Elders, The Life Stories & Wisdom of Great American Indians, Copyright © 1994, Sandy Johnson, 

Another book containing stories and teachings from 16 elders, including Martin Gashweseoma and Thomas Banyacya of 
Hopi, Roberta Blackgoat, Dineh, Leon Shenandoah, Tadodaho Ho-de-no-sau-ne, and Arvol Looking Horse, Lakota, who 
is the carrier of the Sacred Pipe given to the Lakota by White Buffalo Calf Woman. 

Touch the Earth, A Self-Portrait of Indian Existence, Copyright © 1971, Compiled by T.C. McLuhan, A Touchstone Book, 
Simon & Schuster. 

A deeply moving book, containing words spoken by great Native Americans from the 17th century to present, including a 
letter sent by Hopi traditional elders to President Nixon in 1970 protesting the strip-mining of coal from sacred land. 
This book contains some of the most touching poetry I have read. A sample: "We love quiet; we suffer the mouse to play; 
when the woods are rustled by the wind, we fear not." -Indian Chief to the governor of Pennsylvania, 17%. 

Sacred Path Cards, Copyright © 1990, Jamie Sams, HarperSanFrancisco 

A truly wonderful 325 page hardcover book comes with the Sacred Path Cards: The Discovery of Self Through Native 

Teachings by Jamie Sams. Jamie, a Seneca, spent many years studying with elders from her own and other nations. From 
my own exposure to native teachings, I can say that Jamie's book is an authentic give-away of true native teachings. She 
does not reveal the details of ceremonies, which would be improper, but does give the essence, of many important 
teachings. There are 44 cards, each representing a unique teaching, and a chapter explaining each one. 


You undoubtedly have found several books on prophecy. Here are some lesser-known ones I have found of particular 

Black Dawn, Bright Day, Copyright © 1992, Sun Bear with Wabun Wind, A Fireside Book, Simon & Schuster 

A book which recounts prophecies of several native nations is Black Dawn, Bright Day, by Sun Bear (with Wabun 
Wind). Sun Bear, a Chippewa man who passed to the Spirit World a couple years ago, was a colorful and sometimes 
controversial figure. He led the formation of a community of all colors of people in Washington State called 'The Bear 
Tribe", and wrote (or co-wrote) several books intended primarily for a non-native audience. This book gives interesting 
details and perspectives on several different native prophecies. Much of his book gives practical suggestions for 
physical preparations to deal with the coming times. Hopi elders ridicule this idea, suggesting there will be only 
spiritual shelters in the coming times. In other words, take care of your relationship with Creator. Everything else 
flows from that. 


The Millennium Book of Prophecy, 1997, John Hogue, Harper Collins, San Francisco 

Contains "Visions and Predictions from Nostradamus, Edgar Cayce, Gurdjieff, Tamo-san, Madame Blavatsky, the Old 
and New Testament Prophets and 89 others." A nearly indispensable source of hundreds of prophecies. The design, 
layout and typography of. the original 1994 edition is so incredibly horrendous - high tech/NflV/ Information Age - as to 
make it virtually unreadable. Make certain you avoid that edition. Fortunately the 1997 edition is greatly improved. 

When the Comet Runs, Copyright © 1997, Tom Kay, Hampton Roads Publishing Company, Inc. 

Anyone who begins to write a book about a comet a full year before the comet is "discovered" certainly has my attention! 
I highly recommend Tom's book. He covers many excellent prophetic sources of which I was not aware, and does an 
excellent job relating them to each other. 

TheEndTimes, Prophecies of Coming Changes, Copyright © 1994, John Van Auken, A.R.E. Press 

John was an executive director of the A. RE. and is an expert on ancient Egypt. This book looks at prophecies from the 
Bible, Edgar Cayce, Nostradamus and the Holy Mother as she has appeared in visions over the years. For me, Johns 
work has a great deal of credibility and scholarship, and he makes important connections between the prophecies of the 
different sources. 

Notes From the Cosmos, Copyright 6 1997, Gordon-Michael Scallion, Matrix Institute, ISBN 0-9619709-0-1 

Gordon-Michael Scallion is perhaps the most well-known contemporary non-native seer. His Earth Changes Report 
newsletter has been published since 1991, and he has made numerous public appearances. Scallion is not a prophet, in 
that not 100 percent of what he predicts actually happens. He has hit many events right on, however, including 
Landers, Big Bear and Northridge quakes of Southern California, the Kobe quake of 1995, and Hurricane Andrew. He 
also accurately predicted the enormous El Nino of 1997-98, and in giving the cause, stated what I had been feeling 
strongly in my heart: that the heating of so much water (the Pacific ocean!!) would take a geologic event. Scallion said 
the cause was the great movement of magma under the sea floor. 

But Scallion has missed as many as he has hit. Why? Well it could be for a couple reasons. First, he might just 
simply have not "seen" correctly. But second, he could have seen something that in TRUE time (not linear) actually DID 
happen. But because what happens is in large part determined by humanity's choices, if humanity changes (grows 
spiritually), the choices may change and therefore the outcome also. If this is the case with Scallion, then his accuracy 
should be better the closer he gets to an event, and in fact this seems to be the case. A true prophet sees the changes in 
humanity, and the distance in time makes no difference, but true prophets are few and far between. 

Notes From the Cosmos contains the story of the awakening of Scallion' s gift and a great number of the things he has 

The Bible Code, Copyright ©1997, Michael Drosnin, Simon & Schuster 

Cracking the Bible Code: The real story of thestunning discovery of hidden know I edge in the first five books of the 
Bible, Copyright © 1997, Jeffrey Satinover, M.D., William Morrow & Co. Inc. 

Both books document the stunning discovery of a code in the Torah, the Hebrew version of the first five books of the 
Bible. Many people appear either to be unaware of or disbelieve in what could be the most important discovery of the 
last 10,000 years. I find this very strange. The existence of the code has been proven by the most highly respected 
statisticians and mathematicians in the Western world, who published their findings in the August 1994 issue of 
Statistical Science, a respected US journal. Scientists who have attempted to expose the findings as a fluke have instead 
uncovered more corroborating evidence. This is the real thing, folks. 

Events reflected in the Bible Code include the assassinations of the Kennedy brothers, Anwar Sadat and, Yitzak 
Rabin, the election of Netanyahu, the collision of comet Shoemaker-Levy with Jupiter, and many, many more events of 
the past 3000 years. , 

The first book released, The Bible Code, is a less-conservative, outsiders view of the discovery of the code among 
Israeli scientists. Based on his shocking finding of an apparent prediction of Rabin's assassination, Drosnin sent a letter 
warning the Israeli Prime Minister before he was assassinated. Rabin apparently didn't take the warning seriously. 
The second book, Cracking the Bible Code, is more detailed and represents an insiders look at the fascinating story of the 
discovery and application of this code. Satinover, who represents the "party line" of Israeli scientists on the code, is 
conservative to a fault. For example, he makes the tenuous assertion that the code can't be used to predict the future, yet 
he presents codes which connect the name ""Sadat" with: "the conspiracy", "to assassinate", "Sadat", "a parade", "on 


the 8th of Tishri" (the correct date of the assassination in the Hebrew calendar), "1981" (the year of the assassination), 
"C haled" (the assassin's first name) and "Islambooli" (the correct spelling of the assassin's last name). Satinover points 
out that even that day's New York Times had it wrong, reporting the name as "Istanbooli"! As to the idea the code can't 
predict the future, well, wasn't Sadat's Egypt in Moses' future??? 


The best overall internet source I've found is Morgana's Observatory. It contains scores of documents on native and non- 
native prophecies, material on ancient mysteries, and other good stuff. I have spent hours exploring this site and still 
haven't reached bottom. You'll find it at http;/ / index.htm 

Evidence of Ancient Technological Civilizations 

Fingerprints of the Gods, Copyright © 1995, Graham Hancock, Crown Trade Paperbacks 

Contains a wide variety of strong evidence for ancient, technologically advanced civilizations. Unfortunately many of 
Graham's conclusions differ from what the Hopi tell us. For me, Hopi history has more credibility. Nonetheless, 
Graham presents an abundance of fascinating and compelling evidence for the Hopi Third World. 

The Message of the Sphinx, Copyright © 19%, Graham Hancock and Robert Bauval, Three Rivers Press 

This book presents the recent findings of the tribe of "Amateur Egyptologists" who have made significant discoveries in 
Egypt lately. This includes John Anthony West; who, with Geologist Robert Schoch established that the weathering 
patterns on the Sphinx were caused by heavy precipitation, something Giza has not seen for at least 7,000 years, and 
probably more like 12,000. Of course this completely upsets current "Egyptologists" story of the development of the 
monuments on the Giza plateau. The book also recaps findings from Bauval's earlier book, The Orion Mystery, in which 
Bauval shares the important discovery that the pyramids of Giza are laid out according to the alignment of stars 
important to ancient Egyptian religion. Bauval presents the information that the alignment is exact only for one time in 
history: 10,500 BC, which is the exact date given by Edgar Cayce for the construction of the Sphinx and pyramids. In The 
Message of the Sphinx the authors present their theories regarding the development of the monuments of the Giza 
plateau as relating to an area in the sky known as the "duat". The entire complex is shown to be a model for human 
history on Earth and in the Heavens, and suggests that the "Hall of Records" spoken of by Cayce is buried roughly 100 
feet under the Sphinx. A fascinating read. Hancock's collaboration with Bauval has resulted in a very solid work. 

Atlantis, TheEighth Continent, Copyright © 1984, Charles Berlitz 

There are many good sources of information about Atlantis, including the extraordinary information given by Edgar 
Cayce and the scholarly 1882 classic, Atlantis: Myths of the Antediluvian World by Ignatius Donnelly. But my current 
favorite is this one by Charles Berlitz, which is written in an engaging style and which brings together a great deal of 
fascinating and compelling evidence. 

Edgar Cayce 

Edgar Cayce, 1877-1945, was perhaps the best-documented psychic of all time. I was introduced to his work by a 
fellow Sunbow 5 walker, and was astounded by what I read: the information given by Mr. Cayce while in a hypnotic 
state agrees very remarkably with the information given by the Hopi themselves. The story of this humble person and 
his extraordinary life's work are well worth investigating. I have found no inconsistencies between the teachings of the 
Hopi, Edgar Cayce or Christ. They all tell us the same thing, albeit in different ways. 

There are literally hundreds of books on various of the more than 10,000 topics touched on in the more than 14,000 
documented Edgar Cayce Readings. Here are a few of my favorites: ' 

THE EDGAR CAYCE COMPANION, a Comprehensive Treatise of the Edgar Cayce Readings Copyright © 1995, B. 
Ernest Frejer, A.R.E. Press. ISBN 0-87604-357-0 (pbk) 

The best overview source of verbatim quotes by Cayce, containing extracts from the readings on 264 topics. 


There is a River, Copyright 6 1942, Thomas Sugrue, Holt, Rinehart & Winston, and, 
Edgar Cayce, the Sleeping Prophet, Copyright 61967, Jess Steam, Doubleday & Co. 

Sugrue was Cayce's biographer who received guidance on the book directly from Cayce himself. His book is more of a 
biography of Cayce, though the Philosophy section is considered a classic, having been informed by specific readings. 

Steam's book also contains biographical information, but presents more of an overview of the material from the readings. 

Other Interesting Titles 

CA TACLYSM ! Compelling evidence of a cosmic catastrophe in 9500 BC I SB N 1-879181-42-8 (pbk) D.S. Allan & J .B. 
Delair, Copyright © 1997, Bear & Co., Santa Fe. Note: this originally was published in 1995 under the title: When the 
Earth Nearly Died by G ateway Books, Bath, U K . 

This presents overwhelming evidence for a global flood. The authors compile a staggering collection of scientific data 
from geologists, paleo-zoologists, paleo-botanists, oceanographers, archeologists and anthropologists to conclusively 
demonstrate that the flood spoken of in the Bible and in stories from more than 500 cultures world-wide is not myth, as 
many believe, but provable fact The book is heavy reading with extensive notations (over 1500 in all) but presents a 
very convincing, perhaps indisputable picture. It isn't perfect, of course. Despite the common assertion by many ancient 
traditions that there have been a series of destructions of the Earth spread over tens of thousands of years, Allan & 
Delair tend to lump together all the evidence and suggest that there was one "Big One" approximately 11,500 years ago. 
Nonetheless, for the richness of data alone, this one is worth taking a look at. 

M any Lives, Many M usters, Copyright © 1988, Brian L. Weiss, M.D., A Fireside Book, Simon & Schuster 

My favorite book on reincarnation. This one is a quick, easy and fun read. It tells the true story of "a prominent 
psychiatrist, his young patient, and the past-life therapy that changed both their lives." 

Saved by the Light, 1995, Dannion Brinkley, Harper Mass Market Paperbacks 

There are many books available now which were written by people who have had "Near Death Experiences" (NDEs). 
Their often highly credible accounts are consistent, and support many of the spiritual teachings available on the 
afterlife, such as those of the Tibetans. Dannion Brinkley's gripping account is by far my favorite out of the 8 or so that 
I've read. His personal story is moving beyond words. In 1975 he was struck by lightning, and doctors could not revive 
him. His body was dead for 28 minutes. In fact when he returned to his body, it was in the hallway covered by a sheet, 
where it was to be taken to the morgue. While in the light, Brinkley was shown 117 specific visions of events to come, 
including the accident at Chernobyl. By 1993, 95 of these events have taken place. 

You may do as I did, and rush right out to get Brinkley's second book, At Peace in the Light, which recounts the 
extraordinarily heightened powers of perception he has developed as a result of his NDE. 

Peace Pilgrim, Her Life and Work in Her Own Words, Copyright © 1982,1991, Peace Pilgrim, An Ocean Tree Book, ISBN 
0-943734-20-7 (hardcover) or -943734-01-0 (pbk) 

A contemporary saint, Peace Pilgrim began her walking pilgrimage in 1953. By 1964, she had walked over 25,000 miles, 
crossing the U.S. several times in her quest for peace among nations, between people and the most important inner peace. 
Her teachings are among the most beautiful, lucid and powerful I have encountered.